davinci2.txt
8050 lines
| 347.2 KiB
| text/plain
|
TextLexer
Darren Dale
|
r3218 | strata; and in this shaft, on the side from which the hill slopes, | ||
smooth and flatten a space one palm wide from the top to the bottom; | ||||
and after some time this smooth portion made on the side of the | ||||
shaft, will show plainly which part of the hill is moving. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CIV.] | ||||
771. | ||||
The cracks in walls will never be parallel unless the part of the | ||||
wall that separates from the remainder does not slip down. | ||||
WHAT IS THE LAW BY WHICH BUILDINGS HAVE STABILITY. | ||||
The stability of buildings is the result of the contrary law to the | ||||
two former cases. That is to say that the walls must be all built up | ||||
equally, and by degrees, to equal heights all round the building, | ||||
and the whole thickness at once, whatever kind of walls they may be. | ||||
And although a thin wall dries more quickly than a thick one it will | ||||
not necessarily give way under the added weight day by day and thus, | ||||
[16] although a thin wall dries more quickly than a thick one, it | ||||
will not give way under the weight which the latter may acquire from | ||||
day to day. Because if double the amount of it dries in one day, one | ||||
of double the thickness will dry in two days or thereabouts; thus | ||||
the small addition of weight will be balanced by the smaller | ||||
difference of time [18]. | ||||
The adversary says that _a_ which projects, slips down. | ||||
And here the adversary says that _r_ slips and not _c_. | ||||
HOW TO PROGNOSTICATE THE CAUSES OF CRACKS IN ANY SORT OF WALL. | ||||
The part of the wall which does not slip is that in which the | ||||
obliquity projects and overhangs the portion which has parted from | ||||
it and slipped down. | ||||
ON THE SITUATION OF FOUNDATIONS AND IN WHAT PLACES THEY ARE A CAUSE | ||||
OF RUIN. | ||||
When the crevice in the wall is wider at the top than at the bottom, | ||||
it is a manifest sign, that the cause of the fissure in the wall is | ||||
remote from the perpendicular line through the crevice. | ||||
[Footnote: Lines 1-5 refer to Pl. CV, No. 2. Line 9 _alle due | ||||
anteciedete_, see on the same page. | ||||
Lines 16-18. The translation of this is doubtful, and the meaning in | ||||
any case very obscure. | ||||
Lines 19-23 are on the right hand margin close to the two sketches | ||||
on Pl. CII, No. 3.] | ||||
772. | ||||
OF CRACKS IN WALLS, WHICH ARE WIDE AT THE BOTTOM AND NARROW AT THE | ||||
TOP AND OF THEIR CAUSES. | ||||
That wall which does not dry uniformly in an equal time, always | ||||
cracks. | ||||
A wall though of equal thickness will not dry with equal quickness | ||||
if it is not everywhere in contact with the same medium. Thus, if | ||||
one side of a wall were in contact with a damp slope and the other | ||||
were in contact with the air, then this latter side would remain of | ||||
the same size as before; that side which dries in the air will | ||||
shrink or diminish and the side which is kept damp will not dry. And | ||||
the dry portion will break away readily from the damp portion | ||||
because the damp part not shrinking in the same proportion does not | ||||
cohere and follow the movement of the part which dries continuously. | ||||
OF ARCHED CRACKS, WIDE AT THE TOP, AND NARROW BELOW. | ||||
Arched cracks, wide at the top and narrow below are found in | ||||
walled-up doors, which shrink more in their height than in their | ||||
breadth, and in proportion as their height is greater than their | ||||
width, and as the joints of the mortar are more numerous in the | ||||
height than in the width. | ||||
The crack diminishes less in _r o_ than in _m n_, in proportion as | ||||
there is less material between _r_ and _o_ than between _n_ and _m_. | ||||
Any crack made in a concave wall is wide below and narrow at the | ||||
top; and this originates, as is here shown at _b c d_, in the side | ||||
figure. | ||||
1. That which gets wet increases in proportion to the moisture it | ||||
imbibes. | ||||
2. And a wet object shrinks, while drying, in proportion to the | ||||
amount of moisture which evaporates from it. | ||||
[Footnote: The text of this passage is reproduced in facsimile on | ||||
Pl. CVI to the left. L. 36-40 are written inside the sketch No. 2. | ||||
L. 41-46 are partly written over the sketch No. 3 to which they | ||||
refer.] | ||||
773. | ||||
OF THE CAUSES OF FISSURES IN [THE WALLS OF] PUBLIC AND PRIVATE | ||||
BUILDINGS. | ||||
The walls give way in cracks, some of which are more or less | ||||
vertical and others are oblique. The cracks which are in a vertical | ||||
direction are caused by the joining of new walls, with old walls, | ||||
whether straight or with indentations fitting on to those of the old | ||||
wall; for, as these indentations cannot bear the too great weight of | ||||
the wall added on to them, it is inevitable that they should break, | ||||
and give way to the settling of the new wall, which will shrink one | ||||
braccia in every ten, more or less, according to the greater or | ||||
smaller quantity of mortar used between the stones of the masonry, | ||||
and whether this mortar is more or less liquid. And observe, that | ||||
the walls should always be built first and then faced with the | ||||
stones intended to face them. For, if you do not proceed thus, since | ||||
the wall settles more than the stone facing, the projections left on | ||||
the sides of the wall must inevitably give way; because the stones | ||||
used for facing the wall being larger than those over which they are | ||||
laid, they will necessarily have less mortar laid between the | ||||
joints, and consequently they settle less; and this cannot happen if | ||||
the facing is added after the wall is dry. | ||||
_a b_ the new wall, _c_ the old wall, which has already settled; and | ||||
the part _a b_ settles afterwards, although _a_, being founded on | ||||
_c_, the old wall, cannot possibly break, having a stable foundation | ||||
on the old wall. But only the remainder _b_ of the new wall will | ||||
break away, because it is built from top to bottom of the building; | ||||
and the remainder of the new wall will overhang the gap above the | ||||
wall that has sunk. | ||||
774. | ||||
A new tower founded partly on old masonry. | ||||
775. | ||||
OF STONES WHICH DISJOIN THEMSELVES FROM THEIR MORTAR. | ||||
Stones laid in regular courses from bottom to top and built up with | ||||
an equal quantity of mortar settle equally throughout, when the | ||||
moisture that made the mortar soft evaporates. | ||||
By what is said above it is proved that the small extent of the new | ||||
wall between _A_ and _n_ will settle but little, in proportion to | ||||
the extent of the same wall between _c_ and _d_. The proportion will | ||||
in fact be that of the thinness of the mortar in relation to the | ||||
number of courses or to the quantity of mortar laid between the | ||||
stones above the different levels of the old wall. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CV, No. 1. The top of the tower is wanting in | ||||
this reproduction, and with it the letter _n_ which, in the | ||||
original, stands above the letter _A_ over the top of the tower, | ||||
while _c_ stands perpendicularly over _d_.] | ||||
776. | ||||
This wall will break under the arch _e f_, because the seven whole | ||||
square bricks are not sufficient to sustain the spring of the arch | ||||
placed on them. And these seven bricks will give way in their middle | ||||
exactly as appears in _a b_. The reason is, that the brick _a_ has | ||||
above it only the weight _a k_, whilst the last brick under the arch | ||||
has above it the weight _c d x a_. | ||||
_c d_ seems to press on the arch towards the abutment at the point | ||||
_p_ but the weight _p o_ opposes resistence to it, whence the whole | ||||
pressure is transmitted to the root of the arch. Therefore the foot | ||||
of the arch acts like 7 6, which is more than double of _x z_. | ||||
II. | ||||
ON FISSURES IN NICHES. | ||||
777. | ||||
ON FISSURES IN NICHES. | ||||
An arch constructed on a semicircle and bearing weights on the two | ||||
opposite thirds of its curve will give way at five points of the | ||||
curve. To prove this let the weights be at _n m_ which will break | ||||
the arch _a_, _b_, _f_. I say that, by the foregoing, as the | ||||
extremities _c_ and _a_ are equally pressed upon by the thrust _n_, | ||||
it follows, by the 5th, that the arch will give way at the point | ||||
which is furthest from the two forces acting on them and that is the | ||||
middle _e_. The same is to be understood of the opposite curve, _d g | ||||
b_; hence the weights _n m_ must sink, but they cannot sink by the | ||||
7th, without coming closer together, and they cannot come together | ||||
unless the extremities of the arch between them come closer, and if | ||||
these draw together the crown of the arch must break; and thus the | ||||
arch will give way in two places as was at first said &c. | ||||
I ask, given a weight at _a_ what counteracts it in the direction | ||||
_n_ _f_ and by what weight must the weight at _f_ be counteracted. | ||||
778. | ||||
ON THE SHRINKING OF DAMP BODIES OF DIFFERENT THICKNESS AND WIDTH. | ||||
The window _a_ is the cause of the crack at _b_; and this crack is | ||||
increased by the pressure of _n_ and _m_ which sink or penetrate | ||||
into the soil in which foundations are built more than the lighter | ||||
portion at _b_. Besides, the old foundation under _b_ has already | ||||
settled, and this the piers _n_ and _m_ have not yet done. Hence the | ||||
part _b_ does not settle down perpendicularly; on the contrary, it | ||||
is thrown outwards obliquely, and it cannot on the contrary be | ||||
thrown inwards, because a portion like this, separated from the main | ||||
wall, is larger outside than inside and the main wall, where it is | ||||
broken, is of the same shape and is also larger outside than inside; | ||||
therefore, if this separate portion were to fall inwards the larger | ||||
would have to pass through the smaller--which is impossible. Hence | ||||
it is evident that the portion of the semicircular wall when | ||||
disunited from the main wall will be thrust outwards, and not | ||||
inwards as the adversary says. | ||||
When a dome or a half-dome is crushed from above by an excess of | ||||
weight the vault will give way, forming a crack which diminishes | ||||
towards the top and is wide below, narrow on the inner side and wide | ||||
outside; as is the case with the outer husk of a pomegranate, | ||||
divided into many parts lengthwise; for the more it is pressed in | ||||
the direction of its length, that part of the joints will open most, | ||||
which is most distant from the cause of the pressure; and for that | ||||
reason the arches of the vaults of any apse should never be more | ||||
loaded than the arches of the principal building. Because that which | ||||
weighs most, presses most on the parts below, and they sink into the | ||||
foundations; but this cannot happen to lighter structures like the | ||||
said apses. | ||||
[Footnote: The figure on Pl. CV, No. 4 belongs to the first | ||||
paragraph of this passage, lines 1-14; fig. 5 is sketched by the | ||||
side of lines l5--and following. The sketch below of a pomegranate | ||||
refers to line 22. The drawing fig. 6 is, in the original, over line | ||||
37 and fig. 7 over line 54.] | ||||
Which of these two cubes will shrink the more uniformly: the cube | ||||
_A_ resting on the pavement, or the cube _b_ suspended in the air, | ||||
when both cubes are equal in weight and bulk, and of clay mixed with | ||||
equal quantities of water? | ||||
The cube placed on the pavement diminishes more in height than in | ||||
breadth, which the cube above, hanging in the air, cannot do. Thus | ||||
it is proved. The cube shown above is better shown here below. | ||||
The final result of the two cylinders of damp clay that is _a_ and | ||||
_b_ will be the pyramidal figures below _c_ and _d_. This is proved | ||||
thus: The cylinder _a_ resting on block of stone being made of clay | ||||
mixed with a great deal of water will sink by its weight, which | ||||
presses on its base, and in proportion as it settles and spreads all | ||||
the parts will be somewhat nearer to the base because that is | ||||
charged with the whole weight. | ||||
III. | ||||
ON THE NATURE OF THE ARCH. | ||||
779. | ||||
WHAT IS AN ARCH? | ||||
The arch is nothing else than a force originated by two weaknesses, | ||||
for the arch in buildings is composed of two segments of a circle, | ||||
each of which being very weak in itself tends to fall; but as each | ||||
opposes this tendency in the other, the two weaknesses combine to | ||||
form one strength. | ||||
OF THE KIND OF PRESSURE IN ARCHES. | ||||
As the arch is a composite force it remains in equilibrium because | ||||
the thrust is equal from both sides; and if one of the segments | ||||
weighs more than the other the stability is lost, because the | ||||
greater pressure will outweigh the lesser. | ||||
OF DISTRIBUTING THE PRESSURE ABOVE AN ARCH. | ||||
Next to giving the segments of the circle equal weight it is | ||||
necessary to load them equally, or you will fall into the same | ||||
defect as before. | ||||
WHERE AN ARCH BREAKS. | ||||
An arch breaks at the part which lies below half way from the | ||||
centre. | ||||
SECOND RUPTURE OF THE ARCH. | ||||
If the excess of weight be placed in the middle of the arch at the | ||||
point _a_, that weight tends to fall towards _b_, and the arch | ||||
breaks at 2/3 of its height at _c e_; and _g e_ is as many times | ||||
stronger than _e a_, as _m o_ goes into _m n_. | ||||
ON ANOTHER CAUSE OF RUIN. | ||||
The arch will likewise give way under a transversal thrust, for when | ||||
the charge is not thrown directly on the foot of the arch, the arch | ||||
lasts but a short time. | ||||
780. | ||||
ON THE STRENGTH OF THE ARCH. | ||||
The way to give stability to the arch is to fill the spandrils with | ||||
good masonry up to the level of its summit. | ||||
ON THE LOADING OF ROUND ARCHES. | ||||
ON THE PROPER MANNER OF LOADING THE POINTED ARCH. | ||||
ON THE EVIL EFFECTS OF LOADING THE POINTED ARCH DIRECTLY ABOVE ITS | ||||
CROWN. | ||||
ON THE DAMAGE DONE TO THE POINTED ARCH BY THROWING THE PRESSURE ON | ||||
THE FLANKS. | ||||
An arch of small curve is safe in itself, but if it be heavily | ||||
charged, it is necessary to strengthen the flanks well. An arch of a | ||||
very large curve is weak in itself, and stronger if it be charged, | ||||
and will do little harm to its abutments, and its places of giving | ||||
way are _o p_. | ||||
[Footnote: Inside the large figure on the righi is the note: _Da | ||||
pesare la forza dell' archo_.] | ||||
781. | ||||
ON THE REMEDY FOR EARTHQUAKES. | ||||
The arch which throws its pressure perpendicularly on the abutments | ||||
will fulfil its function whatever be its direction, upside down, | ||||
sideways or upright. | ||||
The arch will not break if the chord of the outer arch does not | ||||
touch the inner arch. This is manifest by experience, because | ||||
whenever the chord _a o n_ of the outer arch _n r a_ approaches the | ||||
inner arch _x b y_ the arch will be weak, and it will be weaker in | ||||
proportion as the inner arch passes beyond that chord. When an arch | ||||
is loaded only on one side the thrust will press on the top of the | ||||
other side and be transmitted to the spring of the arch on that | ||||
side; and it will break at a point half way between its two | ||||
extremes, where it is farthest from the chord. | ||||
782. | ||||
A continuous body which has been forcibly bent into an arch, thrusts | ||||
in the direction of the straight line, which it tends to recover. | ||||
783. | ||||
In an arch judiciously weighted the thrust is oblique, so that the | ||||
triangle _c n b_ has no weight upon it. | ||||
784. | ||||
I here ask what weight will be needed to counterpoise and resist the | ||||
tendency of each of these arches to give way? | ||||
[Footnote: The two lower sketches are taken from the MS. S. K. M. | ||||
III, 10a; they have there no explanatory text.] | ||||
785. | ||||
ON THE STRENGTH OF THE ARCH IN ARCHITECTURE. | ||||
The stability of the arch built by an architect resides in the tie | ||||
and in the flanks. | ||||
ON THE POSITION OF THE TIE IN THE ABOVE NAMED ARCH. | ||||
The position of the tie is of the same importance at the beginning | ||||
of the arch and at the top of the perpendicular pier on which it | ||||
rests. This is proved by the 2nd "of supports" which says: that part | ||||
of a support has least resistance which is farthest from its solid | ||||
attachment; hence, as the top of the pier is farthest from the | ||||
middle of its true foundation and the same being the case at the | ||||
opposite extremities of the arch which are the points farthest from | ||||
the middle, which is really its [upper] attachment, we have | ||||
concluded that the tie _a b_ requires to be in such a position as | ||||
that its opposite ends are between the four above-mentioned | ||||
extremes. | ||||
The adversary says that this arch must be more than half a circle, | ||||
and that then it will not need a tie, because then the ends will not | ||||
thrust outwards but inwards, as is seen in the excess at _a c_, _b | ||||
d_. To this it must be answered that this would be a very poor | ||||
device, for three reasons. The first refers to the strength of the | ||||
arch, since it is proved that the circular parallel being composed | ||||
of two semicircles will only break where these semicircles cross | ||||
each other, as is seen in the figure _n m;_ besides this it follows | ||||
that there is a wider space between the extremes of the semicircle | ||||
than between the plane of the walls; the third reason is that the | ||||
weight placed to counterbalance the strength of the arch diminishes | ||||
in proportion as the piers of the arch are wider than the space | ||||
between the piers. Fourthly in proportion as the parts at _c a b d_ | ||||
turn outwards, the piers are weaker to support the arch above them. | ||||
The 5th is that all the material and weight of the arch which are in | ||||
excess of the semicircle are useless and indeed mischievous; and | ||||
here it is to be noted that the weight placed above the arch will be | ||||
more likely to break the arch at _a b_, where the curve of the | ||||
excess begins that is added to the semicircle, than if the pier were | ||||
straight up to its junction with the semicircle [spring of the | ||||
arch]. | ||||
AN ARCH LOADED OVER THE CROWN WILL GIVE WAY AT THE LEFT HAND AND | ||||
RIGHT HAND QUARTERS. | ||||
This is proved by the 7th of this which says: The opposite ends of | ||||
the support are equally pressed upon by the weight suspended to | ||||
them; hence the weight shown at _f_ is felt at _b c_, that is half | ||||
at each extremity; and by the third which says: in a support of | ||||
equal strength [throughout] that portion will give way soonest which | ||||
is farthest from its attachment; whence it follows that _d_ being | ||||
equally distant from _f, e_ ..... | ||||
If the centering of the arch does not settle as the arch settles, | ||||
the mortar, as it dries, will shrink and detach itself from the | ||||
bricks between which it was laid to keep them together; and as it | ||||
thus leaves them disjoined the vault will remain loosely built, and | ||||
the rains will soon destroy it. | ||||
786. | ||||
ON THE STRENGTH AND NATURE OF ARCHES, AND WHERE THEY ARE STRONG OR | ||||
WEAK; AND THE SAME AS TO COLUMNS. | ||||
That part of the arch which is nearer to the horizontal offers least | ||||
resistance to the weight placed on it. | ||||
When the triangle _a z n_, by settling, drives backwards the 2/3 of | ||||
each 1/2 circle that is _a s_ and in the same way _z m_, the reason | ||||
is that _a_ is perpendicularly over _b_ and so likewise _z_ is above | ||||
_f_. | ||||
Either half of an arch, if overweighted, will break at 2/3 of its | ||||
height, the point which corresponds to the perpendicular line above | ||||
the middle of its bases, as is seen at _a b_; and this happens | ||||
because the weight tends to fall past the point _r_.--And if, | ||||
against its nature it should tend to fall towards the point _s_ the | ||||
arch _n s_ would break precisely in its middle. If the arch _n s_ | ||||
were of a single piece of timber, if the weight placed at _n_ should | ||||
tend to fall in the line _n m_, the arch would break in the middle | ||||
of the arch _e m_, otherwise it will break at one third from the top | ||||
at the point a because from _a_ to _n_ the arch is nearer to the | ||||
horizontal than from _a_ to _o_ and from _o_ to _s_, in proportion | ||||
as _p t_ is greater than _t n_, _a o_ will be stronger than _a n_ | ||||
and likewise in proportion as _s o_ is stronger than _o a_, _r p_ | ||||
will be greater than _p t_. | ||||
The arch which is doubled to four times of its thickness will bear | ||||
four times the weight that the single arch could carry, and more in | ||||
proportion as the diameter of its thickness goes a smaller number of | ||||
times into its length. That is to say that if the thickness of the | ||||
single arch goes ten times into its length, the thickness of the | ||||
doubled arch will go five times into its length. Hence as the | ||||
thickness of the double arch goes only half as many times into its | ||||
length as that of the single arch does, it is reasonable that it | ||||
should carry half as much more weight as it would have to carry if | ||||
it were in direct proportion to the single arch. Hence as this | ||||
double arch has 4 times the thickness of the single arch, it would | ||||
seem that it ought to bear 4 times the weight; but by the above rule | ||||
it is shown that it will bear exactly 8 times as much. | ||||
THAT PIER, WHICH is CHARGED MOST UNEQUALLY, WILL SOONEST GIVE WAY. | ||||
The column _c b_, being charged with an equal weight, [on each side] | ||||
will be most durable, and the other two outward columns require on | ||||
the part outside of their centre as much pressure as there is inside | ||||
of their centre, that is, from the centre of the column, towards the | ||||
middle of the arch. | ||||
Arches which depend on chains for their support will not be very | ||||
durable. | ||||
THAT ARCH WILL BE OF LONGER DURATION WHICH HAS A GOOD ABUTMENT | ||||
OPPOSED TO ITS THRUST. | ||||
The arch itself tends to fall. If the arch be 30 braccia and the | ||||
interval between the walls which carry it be 20, we know that 30 | ||||
cannot pass through the 20 unless 20 becomes likewise 30. Hence the | ||||
arch being crushed by the excess of weight, and the walls offering | ||||
insufficient resistance, part, and afford room between them, for the | ||||
fall of the arch. | ||||
But if you do not wish to strengthen the arch with an iron tie you | ||||
must give it such abutments as can resist the thrust; and you can do | ||||
this thus: fill up the spandrels _m n_ with stones, and direct the | ||||
lines of the joints between them to the centre of the circle of the | ||||
arch, and the reason why this makes the arch durable is this. We | ||||
know very well that if the arch is loaded with an excess of weight | ||||
above its quarter as _a b_, the wall _f g_ will be thrust outwards | ||||
because the arch would yield in that direction; if the other quarter | ||||
_b c_ were loaded, the wall _f g_ would be thrust inwards, if it | ||||
were not for the line of stones _x y_ which resists this. | ||||
787. | ||||
PLAN. | ||||
Here it is shown how the arches made in the side of the octagon | ||||
thrust the piers of the angles outwards, as is shown by the line _h | ||||
c_ and by the line _t d_ which thrust out the pier _m_; that is they | ||||
tend to force it away from the centre of such an octagon. | ||||
788. | ||||
An Experiment to show that a weight placed on an arch does not | ||||
discharge itself entirely on its columns; on the contrary the | ||||
greater the weight placed on the arches, the less the arch transmits | ||||
the weight to the columns. The experiment is the following. Let a | ||||
man be placed on a steel yard in the middle of the shaft of a well, | ||||
then let him spread out his hands and feet between the walls of the | ||||
well, and you will see him weigh much less on the steel yard; give | ||||
him a weight on the shoulders, you will see by experiment, that the | ||||
greater the weight you give him the greater effort he will make in | ||||
spreading his arms and legs, and in pressing against the wall and | ||||
the less weight will be thrown on the steel yard. | ||||
IV. | ||||
ON FOUNDATIONS, THE NATURE OF THE GROUND AND SUPPORTS. | ||||
789. | ||||
The first and most important thing is stability. | ||||
As to the foundations of the component parts of temples and other | ||||
public buildings, the depths of the foundations must bear the same | ||||
proportions to each other as the weight of material which is to be | ||||
placed upon them. | ||||
Every part of the depth of earth in a given space is composed of | ||||
layers, and each layer is composed of heavier or lighter materials, | ||||
the lowest being the heaviest. And this can be proved, because these | ||||
layers have been formed by the sediment from water carried down to | ||||
the sea, by the current of rivers which flow into it. The heaviest | ||||
part of this sediment was that which was first thrown down, and so | ||||
on by degrees; and this is the action of water when it becomes | ||||
stagnant, having first brought down the mud whence it first flowed. | ||||
And such layers of soil are seen in the banks of rivers, where their | ||||
constant flow has cut through them and divided one slope from the | ||||
other to a great depth; where in gravelly strata the waters have run | ||||
off, the materials have, in consequence, dried and been converted | ||||
into hard stone, and this happened most in what was the finest mud; | ||||
whence we conclude that every portion of the surface of the earth | ||||
was once at the centre of the earth, and _vice_versa_ &c. | ||||
790. | ||||
The heaviest part of the foundations of buildings settles most, and | ||||
leaves the lighter part above it separated from it. | ||||
And the soil which is most pressed, if it be porous yields most. | ||||
You should always make the foundations project equally beyond the | ||||
weight of the walls and piers, as shown at _m a b_. If you do as | ||||
many do, that is to say if you make a foundation of equal width from | ||||
the bottom up to the surface of the ground, and charge it above with | ||||
unequal weights, as shown at _b e_ and at _e o_, at the part of the | ||||
foundation at _b e_, the pier of the angle will weigh most and | ||||
thrust its foundation downwards, which the wall at _e o_ will not | ||||
do; since it does not cover the whole of its foundation, and | ||||
therefore thrusts less heavily and settles less. Hence, the pier _b | ||||
e_ in settling cracks and parts from the wall _e o_. This may be | ||||
seen in most buildings which are cracked round the piers. | ||||
791. | ||||
The window _a_ is well placed under the window _c_, and the window | ||||
_b_ is badly placed under the pier _d_, because this latter is | ||||
without support and foundation; mind therefore never to make a break | ||||
under the piers between the windows. | ||||
792. | ||||
OF THE SUPPORTS. | ||||
A pillar of which the thickness is increased will gain more than its | ||||
due strength, in direct proportion to what its loses in relative | ||||
height. | ||||
EXAMPLE. | ||||
If a pillar should be nine times as high as it is broad--that is to | ||||
say, if it is one braccio thick, according to rule it should be nine | ||||
braccia high--then, if you place 100 such pillars together in a mass | ||||
this will be ten braccia broad and 9 high; and if the first pillar | ||||
could carry 10000 pounds the second being only about as high as it | ||||
is wide, and thus lacking 8 parts of its proper length, it, that is | ||||
to say, each pillar thus united, will bear eight times more than | ||||
when disconnected; that is to say, that if at first it would carry | ||||
ten thousand pounds, it would now carry 90 thousand. | ||||
V. | ||||
ON THE RESISTANCE OF BEAMS. | ||||
793. | ||||
That angle will offer the greatest resistance which is most acute, | ||||
and the most obtuse will be the weakest. | ||||
[Footnote: The three smaller sketches accompany the text in the | ||||
original, but the larger one is not directly connected with it. It | ||||
is to be found on fol. 89a of the same Manuscript and there we read | ||||
in a note, written underneath, _coverchio della perdicha del | ||||
castello_ (roof of the flagstaff of the castle),--Compare also Pl. | ||||
XCIII, No. 1.] | ||||
794. | ||||
If the beams and the weight _o_ are 100 pounds, how much weight will | ||||
be wanted at _ae_ to resist such a weight, that it may not fall | ||||
down? | ||||
795. | ||||
ON THE LENGTH OF BEAMS. | ||||
That beam which is more than 20 times as long as its greatest | ||||
thickness will be of brief duration and will break in half; and | ||||
remember, that the part built into the wall should be steeped in hot | ||||
pitch and filleted with oak boards likewise so steeped. Each beam | ||||
must pass through its walls and be secured beyond the walls with | ||||
sufficient chaining, because in consequence of earthquakes the beams | ||||
are often seen to come out of the walls and bring down the walls and | ||||
floors; whilst if they are chained they will hold the walls strongly | ||||
together and the walls will hold the floors. Again I remind you | ||||
never to put plaster over timber. Since by expansion and shrinking | ||||
of the timber produced by damp and dryness such floors often crack, | ||||
and once cracked their divisions gradually produce dust and an ugly | ||||
effect. Again remember not to lay a floor on beams supported on | ||||
arches; for, in time the floor which is made on beams settles | ||||
somewhat in the middle while that part of the floor which rests on | ||||
the arches remains in its place; hence, floors laid over two kinds | ||||
of supports look, in time, as if they were made in hills [Footnote: | ||||
19 M. RAVAISSON, in his edition of MS. A gives a very different | ||||
rendering of this passage translating it thus: _Les planchers qui | ||||
sont soutenus par deux differentes natures de supports paraissent | ||||
avec le temps faits en voute a cholli_.] | ||||
Remarks on the style of Leonardo's architecture. | ||||
A few remarks may here be added on the style of Leonardo's | ||||
architectural studies. However incomplete, however small in scale, | ||||
they allow us to establish a certain number of facts and | ||||
probabilities, well worthy of consideration. | ||||
When Leonardo began his studies the great name of Brunellesco was | ||||
still the inspiration of all Florence, and we cannot doubt that | ||||
Leonardo was open to it, since we find among his sketches the plan | ||||
of the church of Santo Spirito[Footnote 1: See Pl. XCIV, No. 2. Then | ||||
only in course of erection after the designs of Brunellesco, though | ||||
he was already dead; finished in 1481.] and a lateral view of San | ||||
Lorenzo (Pl. XCIV No. 1), a plan almost identical with the chapel | ||||
Degli Angeli, only begun by him (Pl. XCIV, No. 3) while among | ||||
Leonardo's designs for domes several clearly betray the influence of | ||||
Brunellesco's Cupola and the lantern of Santa Maria del | ||||
Fiore[Footnote 2: A small sketch of the tower of the Palazzo della | ||||
Signoria (MS. C.A. 309) proves that he also studied mediaeval | ||||
monuments.] | ||||
The beginning of the second period of modern Italian architecture | ||||
falls during the first twenty years of Leonardo's life. However the | ||||
new impetus given by Leon Battista Alberti either was not generally | ||||
understood by his contemporaries, or those who appreciated it, had | ||||
no opportunity of showing that they did so. It was only when taken | ||||
up by Bramante and developed by him to the highest rank of modern | ||||
architecture that this new influence was generally felt. Now the | ||||
peculiar feature of Leonardo's sketches is that, like the works of | ||||
Bramante, they appear to be the development and continuation of | ||||
Alberti's. | ||||
_But a question here occurs which is difficult to answer. Did | ||||
Leonardo, till he quitted Florence, follow the direction given by | ||||
the dominant school of Brunellesco, which would then have given rise | ||||
to his "First manner", or had he, even before he left Florence, felt | ||||
Alberti's influence--either through his works (Palazzo Ruccellai, | ||||
and the front of Santa Maria Novella) or through personal | ||||
intercourse? Or was it not till he went to Milan that Alberti's work | ||||
began to impress him through Bramante, who probably had known | ||||
Alberti at Mantua about 1470 and who not only carried out Alberti's | ||||
views and ideas, but, by his designs for St. Peter's at Rome, proved | ||||
himself the greatest of modern architects. When Leonardo went to | ||||
Milan Bramante had already been living there for many years. One of | ||||
his earliest works in Milan was the church of Santa Maria presso San | ||||
Satiro, Via del Falcone[Footnote 1: Evidence of this I intend to | ||||
give later on in a Life of Bramante, which I have in preparation.]. | ||||
Now we find among Leonardos studies of Cupolas on Plates LXXXIV and | ||||
LXXXV and in Pl. LXXX several sketches which seem to me to have been | ||||
suggested by Bramante's dome of this church. | ||||
The MSS. B and Ash. II contain the plans of S. Sepolcro, the | ||||
pavilion in the garden of the duke of Milan, and two churches, | ||||
evidently inspired by the church of San Lorenzo at Milan. | ||||
MS. B. contains besides two notes relating to Pavia, one of them a | ||||
design for the sacristy of the Cathedral at Pavia, which cannot be | ||||
supposed to be dated later than 1492, and it has probably some | ||||
relation to Leonardo's call to Pavia June 21, 1490[Footnote 2: The | ||||
sketch of the plan of Brunellesco's church of Santo Spirito at | ||||
Florence, which occurs in the same Manuscript, may have been done | ||||
from memory.]. These and other considerations justify us in | ||||
concluding, that Leonardo made his studies of cupolas at Milan, | ||||
probably between the years 1487 and 1492 in anticipation of the | ||||
erection of one of the grandest churches of Italy, the Cathedral of | ||||
Pavia. This may explain the decidedly Lombardo-Bramantesque tendency | ||||
in the style of these studies, among which only a few remind us of | ||||
the forms of the cupolas of S. Maria del Fiore and of the Baptistery | ||||
of Florence. Thus, although when compared with Bramante's work, | ||||
several of these sketches plainly reveal that master's influence, we | ||||
find, among the sketches of domes, some, which show already | ||||
Bramante's classic style, of which the Tempietto of San Pietro in | ||||
Montorio, his first building executed at Rome, is the foremost | ||||
example[Footnote 3: It may be mentioned here, that in 1494 Bramante | ||||
made a similar design for the lantern of the Cupola of the Church of | ||||
Santa Maria delle Grazie.]. | ||||
On Plate LXXXIV is a sketch of the plan of a similar circular | ||||
building; and the Mausoleum on Pl. XCVIII, no less than one of the | ||||
pedestals for the statue of Francesco Sforza (Pl. LXV), is of the | ||||
same type. | ||||
The drawings Pl. LXXXIV No. 2, Pl. LXXXVI No. 1 and 2 and the ground | ||||
flour ("flour" sic but should be "floor" ?) of the building in the | ||||
drawing Pl. XCI No. 2, with the interesting decoration by gigantic | ||||
statues in large niches, are also, I believe, more in the style | ||||
Bramante adopted at Rome, than in the Lombard style. Are we to | ||||
conclude from this that Leonardo on his part influenced Bramante in | ||||
the sense of simplifying his style and rendering it more congenial | ||||
to antique art? The answer to this important question seems at first | ||||
difficult to give, for we are here in presence of Bramante, the | ||||
greatest of modern architects, and with Leonardo, the man comparable | ||||
with no other. We have no knowledge of any buildings erected by | ||||
Leonardo, and unless we admit personal intercourse--which seems | ||||
probable, but of which there is no proof--, it would be difficult to | ||||
understand how Leonardo could have affected Bramante's style. The | ||||
converse is more easily to be admitted, since Bramante, as we have | ||||
proved elsewhere, drew and built simultaneously in different | ||||
manners, and though in Lombardy there is no building by him in his | ||||
classic style, the use of brick for building, in that part of Italy, | ||||
may easily account for it._ | ||||
_Bramante's name is incidentally mentioned in Leonardo's manuscripts | ||||
in two passages (Nos. 1414 and 1448). On each occasion it is only a | ||||
slight passing allusion, and the nature of the context gives us no | ||||
due information as to any close connection between the two artists._ | ||||
_It might be supposed, on the ground of Leonardo's relations with | ||||
the East given in sections XVII and XXI of this volume, that some | ||||
evidence of oriental influence might be detected in his | ||||
architectural drawings. I do not however think that any such traces | ||||
can be pointed out with certainty unless perhaps the drawing for a | ||||
Mausoleum, Pl. XC VIII._ | ||||
_Among several studies for the construction of cupolas above a Greek | ||||
cross there are some in which the forms are decidedly monotonous. | ||||
These, it is clear, were not designed as models of taste; they must | ||||
be regarded as the results of certain investigations into the laws | ||||
of proportion, harmony and contrast._ | ||||
_The designs for churches, on the plan of a Latin cross are | ||||
evidently intended to depart as little as possible from the form of | ||||
a Greek cross; and they also show a preference for a nave surrounded | ||||
with outer porticos._ | ||||
_The architectural forms preferred by Leonardo are pilasters coupled | ||||
(Pl. LXXXII No. 1; or grouped (Pl. LXXX No. 5 and XCIV No. 4), often | ||||
combined with niches. We often meet with orders superposed, one in | ||||
each story, or two small orders on one story, in combination with | ||||
one great order (Pl. XCVI No. 2)._ | ||||
The drum (tamburo) of these cupolas is generally octagonal, as in | ||||
the cathedral of Florence, and with similar round windows in its | ||||
sides. In Pl. LXXXVII No. 2 it is circular like the model actually | ||||
carried out by Michael Angelo at St. Peter's. | ||||
The cupola itself is either hidden under a pyramidal roof, as in the | ||||
Baptistery of Florence, San Lorenzo of Milan and most of the Lombard | ||||
churches (Pl. XCI No. 1 and Pl. XCII No. 1); but it more generally | ||||
suggests the curve of Sta Maria del Fiore (Pl. LXXXVIII No. 5; Pl. | ||||
XC No. 2; Pl. LXXXIX, M; Pl XC No. 4, Pl. XCVI No. 2). In other | ||||
cases (Pl. LXXX No. 4; Pl. LXXXIX; Pl. XC No. 2) it shows the sides | ||||
of the octagon crowned by semicircular pediments, as in | ||||
Brunellesco's lantern of the Cathedral and in the model for the | ||||
Cathedral of Pavia. | ||||
Finally, in some sketches the cupola is either semicircular, or as | ||||
in Pl. LXXXVII No. 2, shows the beautiful line, adopted sixty years | ||||
later by Michael Angelo for the existing dome of St. Peter's. | ||||
It is worth noticing that for all these domes Leonardo is not | ||||
satisfied to decorate the exterior merely with ascending ribs or | ||||
mouldings, but employs also a system of horizontal parallels to | ||||
complete the architectural system. Not the least interesting are the | ||||
designs for the tiburio (cupola) of the Milan Cathedral. They show | ||||
some of the forms, just mentioned, adapted to the peculiar gothic | ||||
style of that monument. | ||||
The few examples of interiors of churches recall the style employed | ||||
in Lombardy by Bramante, for instance in S. Maria di Canepanuova at | ||||
Pavia, or by Dolcebuono in the Monastero Maggiore at Milan (see Pl. | ||||
CI No. 1 [C. A. 181b; 546b]; Pl. LXXXIV No. 10). | ||||
The few indications concerning palaces seem to prove that Leonardo | ||||
followed Alberti's example of decorating the walls with pilasters | ||||
and a flat rustica, either in stone or by graffitti (Pl. CII No. 1 | ||||
and Pl. LXXXV No. 14). | ||||
By pointing out the analogies between Leonardo's architecture and | ||||
that of other masters we in no way pretend to depreciate his | ||||
individual and original inventive power. These are at all events | ||||
beyond dispute. The project for the Mausoleum (Pl. XCVIII) would | ||||
alone suffice to rank him among the greatest architects who ever | ||||
lived. The peculiar shape of the tower (Pl. LXXX), of the churches | ||||
for preaching (Pl. XCVII No. 1 and pages 56 and 57, Fig. 1-4), his | ||||
curious plan for a city with high and low level streets (Pl. LXXVII | ||||
and LXXVIII No. 2 and No. 3), his Loggia with fountains (Pl. LXXXII | ||||
No. 4) reveal an originality, a power and facility of invention for | ||||
almost any given problem, which are quite wonderful. | ||||
_In addition to all these qualities he propably stood alone in his | ||||
day in one department of architectural study,--his investigations, | ||||
namely, as to the resistance of vaults, foundations, walls and | ||||
arches._ | ||||
_As an application of these studies the plan of a semicircular vault | ||||
(Pl. CIII No. 2) may be mentioned here, disposed so as to produce no | ||||
thrust on the columns on which it rests:_ volta i botte e non | ||||
ispignie ifori le colone. _Above the geometrical patterns on the | ||||
same sheet, close to a circle inscribed in a square is the note:_ la | ||||
ragio d'una volta cioe il terzo del diamitro della sua ... del | ||||
tedesco in domo. | ||||
_There are few data by which to judge of Leonardo's style in the | ||||
treatment of detail. On Pl. LXXXV No. 10 and Pl. CIII No. 3, we find | ||||
some details of pillars; on Pl. CI No. 3 slender pillars designed | ||||
for a fountain and on Pl. CIII No. 1 MS. B, is a pen and ink drawing | ||||
of a vase which also seems intended for a fountain. Three handles | ||||
seem to have been intended to connect the upper parts with the base. | ||||
There can be no doubt that Leonardo, like Bramante, but unlike | ||||
Michael Angelo, brought infinite delicacy of motive and execution to | ||||
bear on the details of his work._ | ||||
_XIV._ | ||||
_Anatomy, Zoology and Physiology._ | ||||
_Leonardo's eminent place in the history of medicine, as a pioneer | ||||
in the sciences of Anatomy and Physiology, will never be appreciated | ||||
till it is possible to publish the mass of manuscripts in which he | ||||
largely treated of these two branches of learning. In the present | ||||
work I must necessarily limit myself to giving the reader a general | ||||
view of these labours, by publishing his introductory notes to the | ||||
various books on anatomical subjects. I have added some extracts, | ||||
and such observations as are scattered incidentally through these | ||||
treatises, as serving to throw a light on Leonardo's scientific | ||||
attitude, besides having an interest for a wider circle than that of | ||||
specialists only._ | ||||
_VASARI expressly mentions Leonardo's anatomical studies, having had | ||||
occasion to examine the manuscript books which refer to them. | ||||
According to him Leonardo studied Anatomy in the companionship of | ||||
Marc Antonio della Torre_ "aiutato e scambievolmente | ||||
aiutando."_--This learned Anatomist taught the science in the | ||||
universities first of Padua and then of Pavia, and at Pavia he and | ||||
Leonardo may have worked and studied together. We have no clue to | ||||
any exact dates, but in the year 1506 Marc Antonio della Torre seems | ||||
to have not yet left Padua. He was scarcely thirty years old when he | ||||
died in 1512, and his writings on anatomy have not only never been | ||||
published, but no manuscript copy of them is known to exist._ | ||||
_This is not the place to enlarge on the connection between Leonardo | ||||
and Marc Antonio della Torre. I may however observe that I have not | ||||
been able to discover in Leonardo's manuscripts on anatomy any | ||||
mention of his younger contemporary. The few quotations which occur | ||||
from writers on medicine--either of antiquity or of the middle ages | ||||
are printed in Section XXII. Here and there in the manuscripts | ||||
mention is made of an anonymous "adversary"_ (avversario) _whose | ||||
views are opposed and refuted by Leonardo, but there is no ground | ||||
for supposing that Marc Antonio della Torre should have been this | ||||
"adversary"._ | ||||
_Only a very small selection from the mass of anatomical drawings | ||||
left by Leonardo have been published here in facsimile, but to form | ||||
any adequate idea of their scientific merit they should be compared | ||||
with the coarse and inadequate figures given in the published books | ||||
of the early part of the XVI. century. | ||||
William Hunter, the great surgeon--a competent judge--who had an | ||||
opportunity in the time of George III. of seeing the originals in | ||||
the King's Library, has thus recorded his opinion: "I expected to | ||||
see little more than such designs in Anatomy as might be useful to a | ||||
painter in his own profession. But I saw, and indeed with | ||||
astonishment, that Leonardo had been a general and deep student. | ||||
When I consider what pains he has taken upon every part of the body, | ||||
the superiority of his universal genius, his particular excellence | ||||
in mechanics and hydraulics, and the attention with which such a man | ||||
would examine and see objects which he has to draw, I am fully | ||||
persuaded that Leonardo was the best Anatomist, at that time, in the | ||||
world ... Leonardo was certainly the first man, we know of, who | ||||
introduced the practice of making anatomical drawings" (Two | ||||
introductory letters. London 1784, pages 37 and 39). | ||||
The illustrious German Naturalist Johan Friedrich Blumenback | ||||
esteemed them no less highly; he was one of the privileged few who, | ||||
after Hunter, had the chance of seeing these Manuscripts. He writes: | ||||
_Der Scharfblick dieses grossen Forschers und Darstellers der Natur | ||||
hat schon auf Dinge geachtet, die noch Jahrhunderte nachher | ||||
unbemerkt geblieben sind_" (see _Blumenbach's medicinische | ||||
Bibliothek_, Vol. 3, St. 4, 1795. page 728). | ||||
These opinions were founded on the drawings alone. Up to the present | ||||
day hardly anything has been made known of the text, and, for the | ||||
reasons I have given, it is my intention to reproduce here no more | ||||
than a selection of extracts which I have made from the originals at | ||||
Windsor Castle and elsewhere. In the Bibliography of the | ||||
Manuscripts, at the end of this volume a short review is given of | ||||
the valuable contents of these Anatomical note books which are at | ||||
present almost all in the possession of her Majesty the Queen of | ||||
England. It is, I believe, possible to assign the date with | ||||
approximate accuracy to almost all the fragments, and I am thus led | ||||
to conclude that the greater part of Leonardo's anatomical | ||||
investigations were carried out after the death of della Torre. | ||||
Merely in reading the introductory notes to his various books on | ||||
Anatomy which are here printed it is impossible to resist the | ||||
impression that the Master's anatomical studies bear to a very great | ||||
extent the stamp of originality and independent thought. | ||||
I. | ||||
ANATOMY. | ||||
796. | ||||
A general introduction | ||||
I wish to work miracles;--it may be that I shall possess less than | ||||
other men of more peaceful lives, or than those who want to grow | ||||
rich in a day. I may live for a long time in great poverty, as | ||||
always happens, and to all eternity will happen, to alchemists, the | ||||
would-be creators of gold and silver, and to engineers who would | ||||
have dead water stir itself into life and perpetual motion, and to | ||||
those supreme fools, the necromancer and the enchanter. | ||||
[Footnote 23: The following seems to be directed against students of | ||||
painting and young artists rather than against medical men and | ||||
anatomists.] | ||||
And you, who say that it would be better to watch an anatomist at | ||||
work than to see these drawings, you would be right, if it were | ||||
possible to observe all the things which are demonstrated in such | ||||
drawings in a single figure, in which you, with all your cleverness, | ||||
will not see nor obtain knowledge of more than some few veins, to | ||||
obtain a true and perfect knowledge of which I have dissected more | ||||
than ten human bodies, destroying all the other members, and | ||||
removing the very minutest particles of the flesh by which these | ||||
veins are surrounded, without causing them to bleed, excepting the | ||||
insensible bleeding of the capillary veins; and as one single body | ||||
would not last so long, since it was necessary to proceed with | ||||
several bodies by degrees, until I came to an end and had a complete | ||||
knowledge; this I repeated twice, to learn the differences [59]. | ||||
[Footnote: Lines 1-59 and 60-89 are written in two parallel columns. | ||||
When we here find Leonardo putting himself in the same category as | ||||
the Alchemists and Necromancers, whom he elsewhere mocks at so | ||||
bitterly, it is evidently meant ironically. In the same way | ||||
Leonardo, in the introduction to the Books on Perspective sets | ||||
himself with transparent satire on a level with other writers on the | ||||
subject.] | ||||
And if you should have a love for such things you might be prevented | ||||
by loathing, and if that did not prevent you, you might be deterred | ||||
by the fear of living in the night hours in the company of those | ||||
corpses, quartered and flayed and horrible to see. And if this did | ||||
not prevent you, perhaps you might not be able to draw so well as is | ||||
necessary for such a demonstration; or, if you had the skill in | ||||
drawing, it might not be combined with knowledge of perspective; and | ||||
if it were so, you might not understand the methods of geometrical | ||||
demonstration and the method of the calculation of forces and of the | ||||
strength of the muscles; patience also may be wanting, so that you | ||||
lack perseverance. As to whether all these things were found in me | ||||
or not [Footnote 84: Leonardo frequently, and perhaps habitually, | ||||
wrote in note books of a very small size and only moderately thick; | ||||
in most of those which have been preserved undivided, each contains | ||||
less than fifty leaves. Thus a considerable number of such volumes | ||||
must have gone to make up a volume of the bulk of the '_Codex | ||||
Atlanticus_' which now contains nearly 1200 detached leaves. In the | ||||
passage under consideration, which was evidently written at a late | ||||
period of his life, Leonardo speaks of his Manuscript note-books as | ||||
numbering 12O; but we should hardly be justified in concluding from | ||||
this passage that the greater part of his Manuscripts were now | ||||
missing (see _Prolegomena_, Vol. I, pp. 5-7).], the hundred and | ||||
twenty books composed by me will give verdict Yes or No. In these I | ||||
have been hindered neither by avarice nor negligence, but simply by | ||||
want of time. Farewell [89]. | ||||
Plans and suggestions for the arrangement of materials (797-802). | ||||
797. | ||||
OF THE ORDER OF THE BOOK. | ||||
This work must begin with the conception of man, and describe the | ||||
nature of the womb and how the foetus lives in it, up to what stage | ||||
it resides there, and in what way it quickens into life and feeds. | ||||
Also its growth and what interval there is between one stage of | ||||
growth and another. What it is that forces it out from the body of | ||||
the mother, and for what reasons it sometimes comes out of the | ||||
mother's womb before the due time. | ||||
Then I will describe which are the members, which, after the boy is | ||||
born, grow more than the others, and determine the proportions of a | ||||
boy of one year. | ||||
Then describe the fully grown man and woman, with their proportions, | ||||
and the nature of their complexions, colour, and physiognomy. | ||||
Then how they are composed of veins, tendons, muscles and bones. | ||||
This I shall do at the end of the book. Then, in four drawings, | ||||
represent four universal conditions of men. That is, Mirth, with | ||||
various acts of laughter, and describe the cause of laughter. | ||||
Weeping in various aspects with its causes. Contention, with various | ||||
acts of killing; flight, fear, ferocity, boldness, murder and every | ||||
thing pertaining to such cases. Then represent Labour, with pulling, | ||||
thrusting, carrying, stopping, supporting and such like things. | ||||
Further I would describe attitudes and movements. Then perspective, | ||||
concerning the functions and effects of the eye; and of | ||||
hearing--here I will speak of music--, and treat of the other | ||||
senses. | ||||
And then describe the nature of the senses. | ||||
This mechanism of man we will demonstrate in ... figures; of which | ||||
the three first will show the ramification of the bones; that is: | ||||
first one to show their height and position and shape: the second | ||||
will be seen in profile and will show the depth of the whole and of | ||||
the parts, and their position. The third figure will be a | ||||
demonstration of the bones of the backparts. Then I will make three | ||||
other figures from the same point of view, with the bones sawn | ||||
across, in which will be shown their thickness and hollowness. Three | ||||
other figures of the bones complete, and of the nerves which rise | ||||
from the nape of the neck, and in what limbs they ramify. And three | ||||
others of the bones and veins, and where they ramify. Then three | ||||
figures with the muscles and three with the skin, and their proper | ||||
proportions; and three of woman, to illustrate the womb and the | ||||
menstrual veins which go to the breasts. | ||||
[Footnote: The meaning of the word _nervo_ varies in different | ||||
passages, being sometimes used for _muscolo_ (muscle).] | ||||
798. | ||||
THE ORDER OF THE BOOK. | ||||
This depicting of mine of the human body will be as clear to you as | ||||
if you had the natural man before you; and the reason is that if you | ||||
wish thoroughly to know the parts of man, anatomically, you--or your | ||||
eye--require to see it from different aspects, considering it from | ||||
below and from above and from its sides, turning it about and | ||||
seeking the origin of each member; and in this way the natural | ||||
anatomy is sufficient for your comprehension. But you must | ||||
understand that this amount of knowledge will not continue to | ||||
satisfy you; seeing the very great confusion that must result from | ||||
the combination of tissues, with veins, arteries, nerves, sinews, | ||||
muscles, bones, and blood which, of itself, tinges every part the | ||||
same colour. And the veins, which discharge this blood, are not | ||||
discerned by reason of their smallness. Moreover integrity of the | ||||
tissues, in the process of the investigating the parts within them, | ||||
is inevitably destroyed, and their transparent substance being | ||||
tinged with blood does not allow you to recognise the parts covered | ||||
by them, from the similarity of their blood-stained hue; and you | ||||
cannot know everything of the one without confusing and destroying | ||||
the other. Hence, some further anatomy drawings become necessary. Of | ||||
which you want three to give full knowledge of the veins and | ||||
arteries, everything else being destroyed with the greatest care. | ||||
And three others to display the tissues; and three for the sinews | ||||
and muscles and ligaments; and three for the bones and cartilages; | ||||
and three for the anatomy of the bones, which have to be sawn to | ||||
show which are hollow and which are not, which have marrow and which | ||||
are spongy, and which are thick from the outside inwards, and which | ||||
are thin. And some are extremely thin in some parts and thick in | ||||
others, and in some parts hollow or filled up with bone, or full of | ||||
marrow, or spongy. And all these conditions are sometimes found in | ||||
one and the same bone, and in some bones none of them. And three you | ||||
must have for the woman, in which there is much that is mysterious | ||||
by reason of the womb and the foetus. Therefore by my drawings every | ||||
part will be known to you, and all by means of demonstrations from | ||||
three different points of view of each part; for when you have seen | ||||
a limb from the front, with any muscles, sinews, or veins which take | ||||
their rise from the opposite side, the same limb will be shown to | ||||
you in a side view or from behind, exactly as if you had that same | ||||
limb in your hand and were turning it from side to side until you | ||||
had acquired a full comprehension of all you wished to know. In the | ||||
same way there will be put before you three or four demonstrations | ||||
of each limb, from various points of view, so that you will be left | ||||
with a true and complete knowledge of all you wish to learn of the | ||||
human figure[Footnote 35: Compare Pl. CVII. The original drawing at | ||||
Windsor is 28 1/2 X 19 1/2 centimetres. The upper figures are | ||||
slightly washed with Indian ink. On the back of this drawing is the | ||||
text No. 1140.]. | ||||
Thus, in twelve entire figures, you will have set before you the | ||||
cosmography of this lesser world on the same plan as, before me, was | ||||
adopted by Ptolemy in his cosmography; and so I will afterwards | ||||
divide them into limbs as he divided the whole world into provinces; | ||||
then I will speak of the function of each part in every direction, | ||||
putting before your eyes a description of the whole form and | ||||
substance of man, as regards his movements from place to place, by | ||||
means of his different parts. And thus, if it please our great | ||||
Author, I may demonstrate the nature of men, and their customs in | ||||
the way I describe his figure. | ||||
And remember that the anatomy of the nerves will not give the | ||||
position of their ramifications, nor show you which muscles they | ||||
branch into, by means of bodies dissected in running water or in | ||||
lime water; though indeed their origin and starting point may be | ||||
seen without such water as well as with it. But their ramifications, | ||||
when under running water, cling and unite--just like flat or hemp | ||||
carded for spinning--all into a skein, in a way which makes it | ||||
impossible to trace in which muscles or by what ramification the | ||||
nerves are distributed among those muscles. | ||||
799. | ||||
THE ARRANGEMENT OF ANATOMY | ||||
First draw the bones, let us say, of the arm, and put in the motor | ||||
muscle from the shoulder to the elbow with all its lines. Then | ||||
proceed in the same way from the elbow to the wrist. Then from the | ||||
wrist to the hand and from the hand to the fingers. | ||||
And in the arm you will put the motors of the fingers which open, | ||||
and these you will show separately in their demonstration. In the | ||||
second demonstration you will clothe these muscles with the | ||||
secondary motors of the fingers and so proceed by degrees to avoid | ||||
confusion. But first lay on the bones those muscles which lie close | ||||
to the said bones, without confusion of other muscles; and with | ||||
these you may put the nerves and veins which supply their | ||||
nourishment, after having first drawn the tree of veins and nerves | ||||
over the simple bones. | ||||
800. | ||||
Begin the anatomy at the head and finish at the sole of the foot. | ||||
801. | ||||
3 men complete, 3 with bones and nerves, 3 with the bones only. Here | ||||
we have 12 demonstrations of entire figures. | ||||
802. | ||||
When you have finished building up the man, you will make the statue | ||||
with all its superficial measurements. | ||||
[Footnote: _Cresciere l'omo_. The meaning of this expression appears | ||||
to be different here and in the passage C.A. 157a, 468a (see No. | ||||
526, Note 1. 2). Here it can hardly mean anything else than | ||||
modelling, since the sculptor forms the figure by degrees, by adding | ||||
wet clay and the figure consequently increases or grows. _Tu farai | ||||
la statua_ would then mean, you must work out the figure in marble. | ||||
If this interpretation is the correct one, this passage would have | ||||
no right to find a place in the series on anatomical studies. I may | ||||
say that it was originally inserted in this connection under the | ||||
impression that _di cresciere_ should be read _descrivere_.] | ||||
Plans for the representation of muscles by drawings (803-809). | ||||
803. | ||||
You must show all the motions of the bones with their joints to | ||||
follow the demonstration of the first three figures of the bones, | ||||
and this should be done in the first book. | ||||
804. | ||||
Remember that to be certain of the point of origin of any muscle, | ||||
you must pull the sinew from which the muscle springs in such a way | ||||
as to see that muscle move, and where it is attached to the | ||||
ligaments of the bones. | ||||
NOTE. | ||||
You will never get any thing but confusion in demonstrating the | ||||
muscles and their positions, origin, and termination, unless you | ||||
first make a demonstration of thin muscles after the manner of linen | ||||
threads; and thus you can represent them, one over another as nature | ||||
has placed them; and thus, too, you can name them according to the | ||||
limb they serve; for instance the motor of the point of the great | ||||
toe, of its middle bone, of its first bone, &c. And when you have | ||||
the knowledge you will draw, by the side of this, the true form and | ||||
size and position of each muscle. But remember to give the threads | ||||
which explain the situation of the muscles in the position which | ||||
corresponds to the central line of each muscle; and so these threads | ||||
will demonstrate the form of the leg and their distance in a plain | ||||
and clear manner. | ||||
I have removed the skin from a man who was so shrunk by illness that | ||||
the muscles were worn down and remained in a state like thin | ||||
membrane, in such a way that the sinews instead of merging in | ||||
muscles ended in wide membrane; and where the bones were covered by | ||||
the skin they had very little over their natural size. | ||||
[Footnote: The photograph No. 41 of Grosvenor Gallery Publications: | ||||
a drawing of the muscles of the foot, includes a complete facsimile | ||||
of the text of this passage.] | ||||
805. | ||||
Which nerve causes the motion of the eye so that the motion of one | ||||
eye moves the other? | ||||
Of frowning the brows, of raising the brows, of lowering the | ||||
brows,--of closing the eyes, of opening the eyes,--of raising the | ||||
nostrils, of opening the lips, with the teeth shut, of pouting with | ||||
the lips, of smiling, of astonishment.-- | ||||
Describe the beginning of man when it is caused in the womb and why | ||||
an eight months child does not live. What sneezing is. What yawning | ||||
is. Falling sickness, spasms, paralysis, shivering with cold, | ||||
sweating, fatigue, hunger, sleepiness, thirst, lust. | ||||
Of the nerve which is the cause of movement from the shoulder to the | ||||
elbow, of the movement from the elbow to the hand, from the joint of | ||||
the hand to the springing of the fingers. From the springing of the | ||||
fingers to the middle joints, and from the middle joints to the | ||||
last. | ||||
Of the nerve which causes the movement of the thigh, and from the | ||||
knee to the foot, and from the joint of the foot to the toes, and | ||||
then to the middle of the toes and of the rotary motion of the leg. | ||||
806. | ||||
ANATOMY. | ||||
Which nerves or sinews of the hand are those which close and part | ||||
the fingers and toes latteraly? | ||||
807. | ||||
Remove by degrees all the parts of the front of a man in making your | ||||
dissection, till you come to the bones. Description of the parts of | ||||
the bust and of their motions. | ||||
808. | ||||
Give the anatomy of the leg up to the hip, in all views and in every | ||||
action and in every state; veins, arteries, nerves, sinews and | ||||
muscles, skin and bones; then the bones in sections to show the | ||||
thickness of the bones. | ||||
[Footnote: A straightened leg in profile is sketched by the side of | ||||
this text.] | ||||
On corpulency and leanness (809-811). | ||||
809. | ||||
Make the rule and give the measurement of each muscle, and give the | ||||
reasons of all their functions, and in which way they work and what | ||||
makes them work &c. | ||||
[4] First draw the spine of the back; then clothe it by degrees, one | ||||
after the other, with each of its muscles and put in the nerves and | ||||
arteries and veins to each muscle by itself; and besides these note | ||||
the vertebrae to which they are attached; which of the intestines | ||||
come in contact with them; and which bones and other organs &c. | ||||
The most prominent parts of lean people are most prominent in the | ||||
muscular, and equally so in fat persons. But concerning the | ||||
difference in the forms of the muscles in fat persons as compared | ||||
with muscular persons, it shall be described below. | ||||
[Footnote: The two drawings given on Pl. CVIII no. 1 come between | ||||
lines 3 and 4. A good and very early copy of this drawing without | ||||
the written text exists in the collection of drawings belonging to | ||||
Christ's College Oxford, where it is attributed to Leonardo.] | ||||
810. | ||||
Describe which muscles disappear in growing fat, and which become | ||||
visible in growing lean. | ||||
And observe that that part which on the surface of a fat person is | ||||
most concave, when he grows lean becomes more prominent. | ||||
Where the muscles separate one from another you must give profiles | ||||
and where they coalesce ... | ||||
811. | ||||
OF THE HUMAN FIGURE. | ||||
Which is the part in man, which, as he grows fatter, never gains | ||||
flesh? | ||||
Or what part which as a man grows lean never falls away with a too | ||||
perceptible diminution? And among the parts which grow fat which is | ||||
that which grows fattest? | ||||
Among those which grow lean which is that which grows leanest? | ||||
In very strong men which are the muscles which are thickest and most | ||||
prominent? | ||||
In your anatomy you must represent all the stages of the limbs from | ||||
man's creation to his death, and then till the death of the bone; | ||||
and which part of him is first decayed and which is preserved the | ||||
longest. | ||||
And in the same way of extreme leanness and extreme fatness. | ||||
The divisions of the head (812. 813). | ||||
812. | ||||
ANATOMY. | ||||
There are eleven elementary tissues:-- Cartilage, bones, nerves, | ||||
veins, arteries, fascia, ligament and sinews, skin, muscle and fat. | ||||
OF THE HEAD. | ||||
The divisions of the head are 10, viz. 5 external and 5 internal, | ||||
the external are the hair, skin, muscle, fascia and the skull; the | ||||
internal are the dura mater, the pia mater, [which enclose] the | ||||
brain. The pia mater and the dura mater come again underneath and | ||||
enclose the brain; then the rete mirabile, and the occipital bone, | ||||
which supports the brain from which the nerves spring. | ||||
813. | ||||
_a_. hair | ||||
_n_. skin | ||||
_c_. muscle | ||||
_m_. fascia | ||||
_o_. skull _i.e._ bone | ||||
_b_. dura mater | ||||
_d_. pia mater | ||||
_f_. brain | ||||
_r_. pia mater, below | ||||
_t_. dura mater | ||||
_l_. rete mirablile | ||||
_s_. the occipitul bone. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CVIII, No. 3.] | ||||
Physiological problems (814. 815). | ||||
814. | ||||
Of the cause of breathing, of the cause of the motion of the heart, | ||||
of the cause of vomiting, of the cause of the descent of food from | ||||
the stomach, of the cause of emptying the intestines. | ||||
Of the cause of the movement of the superfluous matter through the | ||||
intestines. | ||||
Of the cause of swallowing, of the cause of coughing, of the cause | ||||
of yawning, of the cause of sneezing, of the cause of limbs getting | ||||
asleep. | ||||
Of the cause of losing sensibility in any limb. | ||||
Of the cause of tickling. | ||||
Of the cause of lust and other appetites of the body, of the cause | ||||
of urine and also of all the natural excretions of the body. | ||||
[Footnote: By the side of this text stands the pen and ink drawing | ||||
reproduced on Pl. CVIII, No. 4; a skull with indications of the | ||||
veins in the fleshy covering.] | ||||
815. | ||||
The tears come from the heart and not from the brain. | ||||
Define all the parts, of which the body is composed, beginning with | ||||
the skin with its outer cuticle which is often chapped by the | ||||
influence of the sun. | ||||
II. | ||||
ZOOLOGY AND COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. | ||||
The divisions of the animal kingdom (816. 817). | ||||
816. | ||||
_Man_. The description of man, which includes that of such creatures | ||||
as are of almost the same species, as Apes, Monkeys and the like, | ||||
which are many, | ||||
_The Lion_ and its kindred, as Panthers. [Footnote 3: _Leonza_--wild | ||||
cat? "_Secondo alcuni, lo stesso che Leonessa; e secondo altri con | ||||
piu certezza, lo stesso che Pantera_" FANFANI, _Vocabolario_ page | ||||
858.] Wildcats (?) Tigers, Leopards, Wolfs, Lynxes, Spanish cats, | ||||
common cats and the like. | ||||
_The Horse_ and its kindred, as Mule, Ass and the like, with incisor | ||||
teeth above and below. | ||||
_The Bull_ and its allies with horns and without upper incisors as | ||||
the Buffalo, Stag Fallow Deer, Wild Goat, Swine, Goat, wild Goats | ||||
Muskdeers, Chamois, Giraffe. | ||||
817. | ||||
Describe the various forms of the intestines of the human species, | ||||
of apes and such like. Then, in what way the leonine species differ, | ||||
and then the bovine, and finally birds; and arrange this description | ||||
after the manner of a disquisition. | ||||
Miscellaneous notes on the study of Zoology (818-821). | ||||
818. | ||||
Procure the placenta of a calf when it is born and observe the form | ||||
of the cotyledons, if their cotyledons are male or female. | ||||
819. | ||||
Describe the tongue of the woodpecker and the jaw of the crocodile. | ||||
820. | ||||
Of the flight of the 4th kind of butterflies that consume winged | ||||
ants. Of the three principal positions of the wings of birds in | ||||
downward flight. | ||||
[Footnote: A passing allusion is all I can here permit myself to | ||||
Leonardo's elaborate researches into the flight of birds. Compare | ||||
the observations on this subject in the Introduction to section | ||||
XVIII and in the Bibliography of Manuscripts at the end of the | ||||
work.] | ||||
821. | ||||
Of the way in which the tail of a fish acts in propelling the fish; | ||||
as in the eel, snake and leech. | ||||
[Footnote: A sketch of a fish, swimming upwards is in the original, | ||||
inserted above this text.--Compare No. 1114.] | ||||
Comparative study of the structure of bones and of the action of | ||||
muscles (822-826). | ||||
822. | ||||
OF THE PALM OF THE HAND. | ||||
Then I will discourse of the hands of each animal to show in what | ||||
they vary; as in the bear, which has the ligatures of the sinews of | ||||
the toes joined above the instep. | ||||
823. | ||||
A second demonstration inserted between anatomy and [the treatise | ||||
on] the living being. | ||||
You will represent here for a comparison, the legs of a frog, which | ||||
have a great resemblance to the legs of man, both in the bones and | ||||
in the muscles. Then, in continuation, the hind legs of the hare, | ||||
which are very muscular, with strong active muscles, because they | ||||
are not encumbered with fat. | ||||
[Footnote: This text is written by the side of a drawing in black | ||||
chalk of a nude male figure, but there is no connection between the | ||||
sketch and the text.] | ||||
824. | ||||
Here I make a note to demonstrate the difference there is between | ||||
man and the horse and in the same way with other animals. And first | ||||
I will begin with the bones, and then will go on to all the muscles | ||||
which spring from the bones without tendons and end in them in the | ||||
same way, and then go on to those which start with a single tendon | ||||
at one end. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CVIII, No. 2.] | ||||
825. | ||||
Note on the bendings of joints and in what way the flesh grows upon | ||||
them in their flexions or extensions; and of this most important | ||||
study write a separate treatise: in the description of the movements | ||||
of animals with four feet; among which is man, who likewise in his | ||||
infancy crawls on all fours. | ||||
826. | ||||
OF THE WAY OF WALKING IN MAN. | ||||
The walking of man is always after the universal manner of walking | ||||
in animals with 4 legs, inasmuch as just as they move their feet | ||||
crosswise after the manner of a horse in trotting, so man moves his | ||||
4 limbs crosswise; that is, if he puts forward his right foot in | ||||
walking he puts forward, with it, his left arm and vice versa, | ||||
invariably. | ||||
III. | ||||
PHYSIOLOGY. | ||||
Comparative study of the organs of sense in men and animals. | ||||
827. | ||||
I have found that in the composition of the human body as compared | ||||
with the bodies of animals the organs of sense are duller and | ||||
coarser. Thus it is composed of less ingenious instruments, and of | ||||
spaces less capacious for receiving the faculties of sense. I have | ||||
seen in the Lion tribe that the sense of smell is connected with | ||||
part of the substance of the brain which comes down the nostrils, | ||||
which form a spacious receptacle for the sense of smell, which | ||||
enters by a great number of cartilaginous vesicles with several | ||||
passages leading up to where the brain, as before said, comes down. | ||||
The eyes in the Lion tribe have a large part of the head for their | ||||
sockets and the optic nerves communicate at once with the brain; but | ||||
the contrary is to be seen in man, for the sockets of the eyes are | ||||
but a small part of the head, and the optic nerves are very fine and | ||||
long and weak, and by the weakness of their action we see by day but | ||||
badly at night, while these animals can see as well at night as by | ||||
day. The proof that they can see is that they prowl for prey at | ||||
night and sleep by day, as nocturnal birds do also. | ||||
Advantages in the structure of the eye in certain animals (828-831). | ||||
828. | ||||
Every object we see will appear larger at midnight than at midday, | ||||
and larger in the morning than at midday. | ||||
This happens because the pupil of the eye is much smaller at midday | ||||
than at any other time. | ||||
In proportion as the eye or the pupil of the owl is larger in | ||||
proportion to the animal than that of man, so much the more light | ||||
can it see at night than man can; hence at midday it can see nothing | ||||
if its pupil does not diminish; and, in the same way, at night | ||||
things look larger to it than by day. | ||||
829. | ||||
OF THE EYES IN ANIMALS. | ||||
The eyes of all animals have their pupils adapted to dilate and | ||||
diminish of their own accord in proportion to the greater or less | ||||
light of the sun or other luminary. But in birds the variation is | ||||
much greater; and particularly in nocturnal birds, such as horned | ||||
owls, and in the eyes of one species of owl; in these the pupil | ||||
dilates in such away as to occupy nearly the whole eye, or | ||||
diminishes to the size of a grain of millet, and always preserves | ||||
the circular form. But in the Lion tribe, as panthers, pards, | ||||
ounces, tigers, lynxes, Spanish cats and other similar animals the | ||||
pupil diminishes from the perfect circle to the figure of a pointed | ||||
oval such as is shown in the margin. But man having a weaker sight | ||||
than any other animal is less hurt by a very strong light and his | ||||
pupil increases but little in dark places; but in the eyes of these | ||||
nocturnal animals, the horned owl--a bird which is the largest of | ||||
all nocturnal birds--the power of vision increases so much that in | ||||
the faintest nocturnal light (which we call darkness) it sees with | ||||
much more distinctness than we do in the splendour of noon day, at | ||||
which time these birds remain hidden in dark holes; or if indeed | ||||
they are compelled to come out into the open air lighted up by the | ||||
sun, they contract their pupils so much that their power of sight | ||||
diminishes together with the quantity of light admitted. | ||||
Study the anatomy of various eyes and see which are the muscles | ||||
which open and close the said pupils of the eyes of animals. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare No. 24, lines 8 and fol.] | ||||
830. | ||||
_a b n_ is the membrane which closes the eye from below, upwards, | ||||
with an opaque film, _c n b_ encloses the eye in front and behind | ||||
with a transparent membrane. | ||||
It closes from below, upwards, because it [the eye] comes downwards. | ||||
When the eye of a bird closes with its two lids, the first to close | ||||
is the nictitating membrane which closes from the lacrymal duct over | ||||
to the outer corner of the eye; and the outer lid closes from below | ||||
upwards, and these two intersecting motions begin first from the | ||||
lacrymatory duct, because we have already seen that in front and | ||||
below birds are protected and use only the upper portion of the eye | ||||
from fear of birds of prey which come down from above and behind; | ||||
and they uncover first the membrane from the outer corner, because | ||||
if the enemy comes from behind, they have the power of escaping to | ||||
the front; and again the muscle called the nictitating membrane is | ||||
transparent, because, if the eye had not such a screen, they could | ||||
not keep it open against the wind which strikes against the eye in | ||||
the rush of their rapid flight. And the pupil of the eye dilates and | ||||
contracts as it sees a less or greater light, that is to say intense | ||||
brilliancy. | ||||
831. | ||||
If at night your eye is placed between the light and the eye of a | ||||
cat, it will see the eye look like fire. | ||||
Remarks on the organs of speech | ||||
(832. 833). | ||||
832. | ||||
_a e i o u | ||||
ba be bi bo bu | ||||
ca ce ci co cu | ||||
da de di do du | ||||
fa fe fi fo fu | ||||
ga ge gi go gu | ||||
la le li lo lu | ||||
ma me mi mo mu | ||||
na ne ni no nu | ||||
pa pe pi po pu | ||||
qa qe qi qo qu | ||||
ra re ri ro ru | ||||
sa se si so su | ||||
ta te ti to tu_ | ||||
The tongue is found to have 24 muscles which correspond to the six | ||||
muscles which compose the portion of the tongue which moves in the | ||||
mouth. | ||||
And when _a o u_ are spoken with a clear and rapid pronunciation, it | ||||
is necessary, in order to pronounce continuously, without any pause | ||||
between, that the opening of the lips should close by degrees; that | ||||
is, they are wide apart in saying _a_, closer in saying _o_, and | ||||
much closer still to pronounce _u_. | ||||
It may be shown how all the vowels are pronounced with the farthest | ||||
portion of the false palate which is above the epiglottis. | ||||
833. | ||||
If you draw in breath by the nose and send it out by the mouth you | ||||
will hear the sound made by the division that is the membrane in | ||||
[Footnote 5: The text here breaks off.]... | ||||
On the conditions of sight (834. 835). | ||||
834. | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF SIGHT. | ||||
I say that sight is exercised by all animals, by the medium of | ||||
light; and if any one adduces, as against this, the sight of | ||||
nocturnal animals, I must say that this in the same way is subject | ||||
to the very same natural laws. For it will easily be understood that | ||||
the senses which receive the images of things do not project from | ||||
themselves any visual virtue [Footnote 4: Compare No. 68.]. On the | ||||
contrary the atmospheric medium which exists between the object and | ||||
the sense incorporates in itself the figure of things, and by its | ||||
contact with the sense transmits the object to it. If the | ||||
object--whether by sound or by odour--presents its spiritual force | ||||
to the ear or the nose, then light is not required and does not act. | ||||
The forms of objects do not send their images into the air if they | ||||
are not illuminated [8]; and the eye being thus constituted cannot | ||||
receive that from the air, which the air does not possess, although | ||||
it touches its surface. If you choose to say that there are many | ||||
animals that prey at night, I answer that when the little light | ||||
which suffices the nature of their eyes is wanting, they direct | ||||
themselves by their strong sense of hearing and of smell, which are | ||||
not impeded by the darkness, and in which they are very far superior | ||||
to man. If you make a cat leap, by daylight, among a quantity of | ||||
jars and crocks you will see them remain unbroken, but if you do the | ||||
same at night, many will be broken. Night birds do not fly about | ||||
unless the moon shines full or in part; rather do they feed between | ||||
sun-down and the total darkness of the night. | ||||
[Footnote 8: See No. 58-67.] | ||||
No body can be apprehended without light and shade, and light and | ||||
shade are caused by light. | ||||
835. | ||||
WHY MEN ADVANCED IN AGE SEE BETTER AT A DISTANCE. | ||||
Sight is better from a distance than near in those men who are | ||||
advancing in age, because the same object transmits a smaller | ||||
impression of itself to the eye when it is distant than when it is | ||||
near. | ||||
The seat of the common sense. | ||||
836. | ||||
The Common Sense, is that which judges of things offered to it by | ||||
the other senses. The ancient speculators have concluded that that | ||||
part of man which constitutes his judgment is caused by a central | ||||
organ to which the other five senses refer everything by means of | ||||
impressibility; and to this centre they have given the name Common | ||||
Sense. And they say that this Sense is situated in the centre of the | ||||
head between Sensation and Memory. And this name of Common Sense is | ||||
given to it solely because it is the common judge of all the other | ||||
five senses _i.e._ Seeing, Hearing, Touch, Taste and Smell. This | ||||
Common Sense is acted upon by means of Sensation which is placed as | ||||
a medium between it and the senses. Sensation is acted upon by means | ||||
of the images of things presented to it by the external instruments, | ||||
that is to say the senses which are the medium between external | ||||
things and Sensation. In the same way the senses are acted upon by | ||||
objects. Surrounding things transmit their images to the senses and | ||||
the senses transfer them to the Sensation. Sensation sends them to | ||||
the Common Sense, and by it they are stamped upon the memory and are | ||||
there more or less retained according to the importance or force of | ||||
the impression. That sense is most rapid in its function which is | ||||
nearest to the sensitive medium and the eye, being the highest is | ||||
the chief of the others. Of this then only we will speak, and the | ||||
others we will leave in order not to make our matter too long. | ||||
Experience tells us that the eye apprehends ten different natures of | ||||
things, that is: Light and Darkness, one being the cause of the | ||||
perception of the nine others, and the other its absence:-- Colour | ||||
and substance, form and place, distance and nearness, motion and | ||||
stillness [Footnote 15: Compare No. 23.]. | ||||
On the origin of the soul. | ||||
837. | ||||
Though human ingenuity may make various inventions which, by the | ||||
help of various machines answering the same end, it will never | ||||
devise any inventions more beautiful, nor more simple, nor more to | ||||
the purpose than Nature does; because in her inventions nothing is | ||||
wanting, and nothing is superfluous, and she needs no counterpoise | ||||
when she makes limbs proper for motion in the bodies of animals. But | ||||
she puts into them the soul of the body, which forms them that is | ||||
the soul of the mother which first constructs in the womb the form | ||||
of the man and in due time awakens the soul that is to inhabit it. | ||||
And this at first lies dormant and under the tutelage of the soul of | ||||
the mother, who nourishes and vivifies it by the umbilical vein, | ||||
with all its spiritual parts, and this happens because this | ||||
umbilicus is joined to the placenta and the cotyledons, by which the | ||||
child is attached to the mother. And these are the reason why a | ||||
wish, a strong craving or a fright or any other mental suffering in | ||||
the mother, has more influence on the child than on the mother; for | ||||
there are many cases when the child loses its life from them, &c. | ||||
This discourse is not in its place here, but will be wanted for the | ||||
one on the composition of animated bodies--and the rest of the | ||||
definition of the soul I leave to the imaginations of friars, those | ||||
fathers of the people who know all secrets by inspiration. | ||||
[Footnote 57: _lettere incoronate_. By this term Leonardo probably | ||||
understands not the Bible only, but the works of the early Fathers, | ||||
and all the books recognised as sacred by the Roman Church.] I leave | ||||
alone the sacred books; for they are supreme truth. | ||||
On the relations of the soul to the organs of sense. | ||||
838. | ||||
HOW THE FIVE SENSES ARE THE MINISTERS OF THE SOUL. | ||||
The soul seems to reside in the judgment, and the judgment would | ||||
seem to be seated in that part where all the senses meet; and this | ||||
is called the Common Sense and is not all-pervading throughout the | ||||
body, as many have thought. Rather is it entirely in one part. | ||||
Because, if it were all-pervading and the same in every part, there | ||||
would have been no need to make the instruments of the senses meet | ||||
in one centre and in one single spot; on the contrary it would have | ||||
sufficed that the eye should fulfil the function of its sensation on | ||||
its surface only, and not transmit the image of the things seen, to | ||||
the sense, by means of the optic nerves, so that the soul--for the | ||||
reason given above-- may perceive it in the surface of the eye. In | ||||
the same way as to the sense of hearing, it would have sufficed if | ||||
the voice had merely sounded in the porous cavity of the indurated | ||||
portion of the temporal bone which lies within the ear, without | ||||
making any farther transit from this bone to the common sense, where | ||||
the voice confers with and discourses to the common judgment. The | ||||
sense of smell, again, is compelled by necessity to refer itself to | ||||
that same judgment. Feeling passes through the perforated cords and | ||||
is conveyed to this common sense. These cords diverge with infinite | ||||
ramifications into the skin which encloses the members of the body | ||||
and the viscera. The perforated cords convey volition and sensation | ||||
to the subordinate limbs. These cords and the nerves direct the | ||||
motions of the muscles and sinews, between which they are placed; | ||||
these obey, and this obedience takes effect by reducing their | ||||
thickness; for in swelling, their length is reduced, and the nerves | ||||
shrink which are interwoven among the particles of the limbs; being | ||||
extended to the tips of the fingers, they transmit to the sense the | ||||
object which they touch. | ||||
The nerves with their muscles obey the tendons as soldiers obey the | ||||
officers, and the tendons obey the Common [central] Sense as the | ||||
officers obey the general. [27] Thus the joint of the bones obeys | ||||
the nerve, and the nerve the muscle, and the muscle the tendon and | ||||
the tendon the Common Sense. And the Common Sense is the seat of the | ||||
soul [28], and memory is its ammunition, and the impressibility is | ||||
its referendary since the sense waits on the soul and not the soul | ||||
on the sense. And where the sense that ministers to the soul is not | ||||
at the service of the soul, all the functions of that sense are also | ||||
wanting in that man's life, as is seen in those born mute and blind. | ||||
[Footnote: The peculiar use of the words _nervo_, _muscolo_, | ||||
_corda_, _senso comune_, which are here literally rendered by nerve, | ||||
muscle cord or tendon and Common Sense may be understood from lines | ||||
27 and 28.] | ||||
On involuntary muscular action. | ||||
839. | ||||
HOW THE NERVES SOMETIMES ACT OF THEMSELVES WITHOUT ANY COMMANDS FROM | ||||
THE OTHER FUNCTIONS OF THE SOUL. | ||||
This is most plainly seen; for you will see palsied and shivering | ||||
persons move, and their trembling limbs, as their head and hands, | ||||
quake without leave from their soul and their soul with all its | ||||
power cannot prevent their members from trembling. The same thing | ||||
happens in falling sickness, or in parts that have been cut off, as | ||||
in the tails of lizards. The idea or imagination is the helm and | ||||
guiding-rein of the senses, because the thing conceived of moves the | ||||
sense. Pre-imagining, is imagining the things that are to be. | ||||
Post-imagining, is imagining the things that are past. | ||||
Miscellaneous physiological observations (840-842). | ||||
840. | ||||
There are four Powers: memory and intellect, desire and | ||||
covetousness. The two first are mental and the others sensual. The | ||||
three senses: sight, hearing and smell cannot well be prevented; | ||||
touch and taste not at all. Smell is connected with taste in dogs | ||||
and other gluttonous animals. | ||||
841. | ||||
I reveal to men the origin of the first, or perhaps second cause of | ||||
their existence. | ||||
842. | ||||
Lust is the cause of generation. | ||||
Appetite is the support of life. Fear or timidity is the | ||||
prolongation of life and preservation of its instruments. | ||||
The laws of nutrition and the support of life (843-848). | ||||
843. | ||||
HOW THE BODY OF ANIMALS IS CONSTANTLY DYING AND BEING RENEWED. | ||||
The body of any thing whatever that takes nourishment constantly | ||||
dies and is constantly renewed; because nourishment can only enter | ||||
into places where the former nourishment has expired, and if it has | ||||
expired it no longer has life. And if you do not supply nourishment | ||||
equal to the nourishment which is gone, life will fail in vigour, | ||||
and if you take away this nourishment, the life is entirely | ||||
destroyed. But if you restore as much is destroyed day by day, then | ||||
as much of the life is renewed as is consumed, just as the flame of | ||||
the candle is fed by the nourishment afforded by the liquid of this | ||||
candle, which flame continually with a rapid supply restores to it | ||||
from below as much as is consumed in dying above: and from a | ||||
brilliant light is converted in dying into murky smoke; and this | ||||
death is continuous, as the smoke is continuous; and the continuance | ||||
of the smoke is equal to the continuance of the nourishment, and in | ||||
the same instant all the flame is dead and all regenerated, | ||||
simultaneously with the movement of its own nourishment. | ||||
844. | ||||
King of the animals--as thou hast described him--I should rather say | ||||
king of the beasts, thou being the greatest--because thou hast | ||||
spared slaying them, in order that they may give thee their children | ||||
for the benefit of the gullet, of which thou hast attempted to make | ||||
a sepulchre for all animals; and I would say still more, if it were | ||||
allowed me to speak the entire truth [5]. But we do not go outside | ||||
human matters in telling of one supreme wickedness, which does not | ||||
happen among the animals of the earth, inasmuch as among them are | ||||
found none who eat their own kind, unless through want of sense (few | ||||
indeed among them, and those being mothers, as with men, albeit they | ||||
be not many in number); and this happens only among the rapacious | ||||
animals, as with the leonine species, and leopards, panthers lynxes, | ||||
cats and the like, who sometimes eat their children; but thou, | ||||
besides thy children devourest father, mother, brothers and friends; | ||||
nor is this enough for thee, but thou goest to the chase on the | ||||
islands of others, taking other men and these half-naked, the ... | ||||
and the ... thou fattenest, and chasest them down thy own | ||||
throat[18]; now does not nature produce enough simples, for thee to | ||||
satisfy thyself? and if thou art not content with simples, canst | ||||
thou not by the mixture of them make infinite compounds, as Platina | ||||
wrote[Footnote 21: _Come scrisse il Platina_ (Bartolomeo Sacchi, a | ||||
famous humanist). The Italian edition of his treatise _De arte | ||||
coquinaria_, was published under the title _De la honestra | ||||
voluptate, e valetudine, Venezia_ 1487.], and other authors on | ||||
feeding? | ||||
[Footnote: We are led to believe that Leonardo himself was a | ||||
vegetarian from the following interesting passage in the first of | ||||
Andrea Corsali's letters to Giuliano de'Medici: _Alcuni gentili | ||||
chiamati Guzzarati non si cibano di cosa, alcuna che tenga sangue, | ||||
ne fra essi loro consentono che si noccia ad alcuna cosa animata, | ||||
come il nostro Leonardo da Vinci_. | ||||
5-18. Amerigo Vespucci, with whom Leonardo was personally | ||||
acquainted, writes in his second letter to Pietro Soderini, about | ||||
the inhabitants of the Canary Islands after having stayed there in | ||||
1503: "_Hanno una scelerata liberta di viuere; ... si cibano di | ||||
carne humana, di maniera che il padre magia il figliuolo, et | ||||
all'incontro il figliuolo il padre secondo che a caso e per sorte | ||||
auiene. Io viddi un certo huomo sceleratissimo che si vantaua, et si | ||||
teneua a non piccola gloria di hauer mangiato piu di trecento | ||||
huomini. Viddi anche vna certa citta, nella quale io dimorai forse | ||||
ventisette giorni, doue le carni humane, hauendole salate, eran | ||||
appicate alli traui, si come noi alli traui di cucina_ _appicchiamo | ||||
le carni di cinghali secche al sole o al fumo, et massimamente | ||||
salsiccie, et altre simil cose: anzi si marauigliauano gradem ete | ||||
che noi non magiaissimo della carne de nemici, le quali dicono | ||||
muouere appetito, et essere di marauiglioso sapore, et le lodano | ||||
come cibi soaui et delicati (Lettere due di Amerigo Vespucci | ||||
Fiorentino drizzate al magnifico Pietro Soderini, Gonfaloniere della | ||||
eccelsa Republica di Firenze_; various editions).] | ||||
845. | ||||
Our life is made by the death of others. | ||||
In dead matter insensible life remains, which, reunited to the | ||||
stomachs of living beings, resumes life, both sensual and | ||||
intellectual. | ||||
846. | ||||
Here nature appears with many animals to have been rather a cruel | ||||
stepmother than a mother, and with others not a stepmother, but a | ||||
most tender mother. | ||||
847. | ||||
Man and animals are really the passage and the conduit of food, the | ||||
sepulchre of animals and resting place of the dead, one causing the | ||||
death of the other, making themselves the covering for the | ||||
corruption of other dead [bodies]. | ||||
On the circulation of the blood (848-850). | ||||
848. | ||||
Death in old men, when not from fever, is caused by the veins which | ||||
go from the spleen to the valve of the liver, and which thicken so | ||||
much in the walls that they become closed up and leave no passage | ||||
for the blood that nourishes it. | ||||
[6]The incessant current of the blood through the veins makes these | ||||
veins thicken and become callous, so that at last they close up and | ||||
prevent the passage of the blood. | ||||
849. | ||||
The waters return with constant motion from the lowest depths of the | ||||
sea to the utmost height of the mountains, not obeying the nature of | ||||
heavier bodies; and in this they resemble the blood of animated | ||||
beings which always moves from the sea of the heart and flows | ||||
towards the top of the head; and here it may burst a vein, as may be | ||||
seen when a vein bursts in the nose; all the blood rises from below | ||||
to the level of the burst vein. When the water rushes out from the | ||||
burst vein in the earth, it obeys the law of other bodies that are | ||||
heavier than the air since it always seeks low places. | ||||
[Footnote: From this passage it is quite plain that Leonardo had not | ||||
merely a general suspicion of the circulation of the blood but a | ||||
very clear conception of it. Leonardo's studies on the muscles of | ||||
the heart are to be found in the MS. W. An. III. but no information | ||||
about them has hitherto been made public. The limits of my plan in | ||||
this work exclude all purely anatomical writings, therefore only a | ||||
very brief excerpt from this note book can be given here. WILLIAM | ||||
HARVEY (born 1578 and Professor of Anatomy at Cambridge from 1615) | ||||
is always considered to have been the discoverer of the circulation | ||||
of the blood. He studied medicine at Padua in 1598, and in 1628 | ||||
brought out his memorable and important work: _De motu cordis et | ||||
sanguinis_.] | ||||
850. | ||||
That the blood which returns when the heart opens again is not the | ||||
same as that which closes the valves of the heart. | ||||
Some notes on medicine (851-855). | ||||
851. | ||||
Make them give you the definition and remedies for the case ... and | ||||
you will see that men are selected to be doctors for diseases they | ||||
do not know. | ||||
852. | ||||
A remedy for scratches taught me by the Herald to the King of | ||||
France. 4 ounces of virgin wax, 4 ounces of colophony, 2 ounces of | ||||
incense. Keep each thing separate; and melt the wax, and then put in | ||||
the incense and then the colophony, make a mixture of it and put it | ||||
on the sore place. | ||||
853. | ||||
Medicine is the restoration of discordant elements; sickness is the | ||||
discord of the elements infused into the living body. | ||||
854. | ||||
Those who are annoyed by sickness at sea should drink extract of | ||||
wormwood. | ||||
855. | ||||
To keep in health, this rule is wise: Eat only when you want and | ||||
relish food. Chew thoroughly that it may do you good. Have it well | ||||
cooked, unspiced and undisguised. He who takes medicine is ill | ||||
advised. | ||||
[Footnote: This appears to be a sketch for a poem.] | ||||
856. | ||||
I teach you to preserve your health; and in this you will succed | ||||
better in proportion as you shun physicians, because their medicines | ||||
are the work of alchemists. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage is written on the back of the drawing Pl. | ||||
CVIII. Compare also No. 1184.] | ||||
_XV_. | ||||
_Astronomy_. | ||||
_Ever since the publication by Venturi in_ 1797 _and Libri in_ 1840 | ||||
_of some few passages of Leonardo's astronomical notes, scientific | ||||
astronomers have frequently expressed the opinion, that they must | ||||
have been based on very important discoveries, and that the great | ||||
painter also deserved a conspicuous place in the history of this | ||||
science. In the passages here printed, a connected view is given of | ||||
his astronomical studies as they lie scattered through the | ||||
manuscripts, which have come down to us. Unlike his other purely | ||||
scientific labours, Leonardo devotes here a good deal of attention | ||||
to the opinions of the ancients, though he does not follow the | ||||
practice universal in his day of relying on them as authorities; he | ||||
only quotes them, as we shall see, in order to refute their | ||||
arguments. His researches throughout have the stamp of independent | ||||
thought. There is nothing in these writings to lead us to suppose | ||||
that they were merely an epitome of the general learning common to | ||||
the astronomers of the period. As early as in the XIVth century | ||||
there were chairs of astronomy in the universities of Padua and | ||||
Bologna, but so late as during the entire XVIth century Astronomy | ||||
and Astrology were still closely allied._ | ||||
_It is impossible now to decide whether Leonardo, when living in | ||||
Florence, became acquainted in his youth with the doctrines of Paolo | ||||
Toscanelli the great astronomer and mathematician (died_ 1482_), of | ||||
whose influence and teaching but little is now known, beyond the | ||||
fact that he advised and encouraged Columbus to carry out his | ||||
project of sailing round the world. His name is nowhere mentioned by | ||||
Leonardo, and from the dates of the manuscripts from which the texts | ||||
on astronomy are taken, it seems highly probable that Leonardo | ||||
devoted his attention to astronomical studies less in his youth than | ||||
in his later years. It was evidently his purpose to treat of | ||||
Astronomy in a connected form and in a separate work (see the | ||||
beginning of Nos._ 866 _and_ 892_; compare also No._ 1167_). It is | ||||
quite in accordance with his general scientific thoroughness that he | ||||
should propose to write a special treatise on Optics as an | ||||
introduction to Astronomy (see Nos._ 867 _and_ 877_). Some of the | ||||
chapters belonging to this Section bear the title "Prospettiva" | ||||
_(see Nos._ 869 _and_ 870_), this being the term universally applied | ||||
at the time to Optics as well as Perspective (see Vol. I, p._ 10, | ||||
_note to No._ 13, _l._ 10_)_. | ||||
_At the beginning of the XVIth century the Ptolemaic theory of the | ||||
universe was still universally accepted as the true one, and | ||||
Leonardo conceives of the earth as fixed, with the moon and sun | ||||
revolving round it, as they are represented in the diagram to No._ | ||||
897. _He does not go into any theory of the motions of the planets; | ||||
with regard to these and the fixed stars he only investigates the | ||||
phenomena of their luminosity. The spherical form of the earth he | ||||
takes for granted as an axiom from the first, and he anticipates | ||||
Newton by pointing out the universality of Gravitation not merely in | ||||
the earth, but even in the moon. Although his acute research into | ||||
the nature of the moon's light and the spots on the moon did not | ||||
bring to light many results of lasting importance beyond making it | ||||
evident that they were a refutation of the errors of his | ||||
contemporaries, they contain various explanations of facts which | ||||
modern science need not modify in any essential point, and | ||||
discoveries which history has hitherto assigned to a very much later | ||||
date_. | ||||
_The ingenious theory by which he tries to explain the nature of | ||||
what is known as earth shine, the reflection of the sun's rays by | ||||
the earth towards the moon, saying that it is a peculiar refraction, | ||||
originating in the innumerable curved surfaces of the waves of the | ||||
sea may be regarded as absurd; but it must not be forgotten that he | ||||
had no means of detecting the fundamental error on which he based | ||||
it, namely: the assumption that the moon was at a relatively short | ||||
distance from the earth. So long as the motion of the earth round | ||||
the sun remained unknown, it was of course impossible to form any | ||||
estimate of the moon's distance from the earth by a calculation of | ||||
its parallax_. | ||||
_Before the discovery of the telescope accurate astronomical | ||||
observations were only possible to a very limited extent. It would | ||||
appear however from certain passages in the notes here printed for | ||||
the first time, that Leonardo was in a position to study the spots | ||||
in the moon more closely than he could have done with the unaided | ||||
eye. So far as can be gathered from the mysterious language in which | ||||
the description of his instrument is wrapped, he made use of | ||||
magnifying glasses; these do not however seem to have been | ||||
constructed like a telescope--telescopes were first made about_ | ||||
1600. _As LIBRI pointed out_ (Histoire des Sciences mathematiques | ||||
III, 101) _Fracastoro of Verona_ (1473-1553) _succeeded in | ||||
magnifying the moon's face by an arrangement of lenses (compare No._ | ||||
910, _note), and this gives probability to Leonardo's invention at a | ||||
not much earlier date._ | ||||
I. | ||||
THE EARTH AS A PLANET. | ||||
The earth's place in the universe (857. 858). | ||||
857. | ||||
The equator, the line of the horizon, the ecliptic, the meridian: | ||||
These lines are those which in all their parts are equidistant from | ||||
the centre of the globe. | ||||
858. | ||||
The earth is not in the centre of the Sun's orbit nor at the centre | ||||
of the universe, but in the centre of its companion elements, and | ||||
united with them. And any one standing on the moon, when it and the | ||||
sun are both beneath us, would see this our earth and the element of | ||||
water upon it just as we see the moon, and the earth would light it | ||||
as it lights us. | ||||
The fundamental laws of the solar system (859-864). | ||||
859. | ||||
Force arises from dearth or abundance; it is the child of physical | ||||
motion, and the grand-child of spiritual motion, and the mother and | ||||
origin of gravity. Gravity is limited to the elements of water and | ||||
earth; but this force is unlimited, and by it infinite worlds might | ||||
be moved if instruments could be made by which the force could be | ||||
generated. | ||||
Force, with physical motion, and gravity, with resistance are the | ||||
four external powers on which all actions of mortals depend. | ||||
Force has its origin in spiritual motion; and this motion, flowing | ||||
through the limbs of sentient animals, enlarges their muscles. Being | ||||
enlarged by this current the muscles are shrunk in length and | ||||
contract the tendons which are connected with them, and this is the | ||||
cause of the force of the limbs in man. | ||||
The quality and quantity of the force of a man are able to give | ||||
birth to other forces, which will be proportionally greater as the | ||||
motions produced by them last longer. | ||||
[Footnote: Only part of this passage belongs, strictly speaking, to | ||||
this section. The principle laid down in the second paragraph is | ||||
more directly connected with the notes given in the preceding | ||||
section on Physiology.] | ||||
860. | ||||
Why does not the weight _o_ remain in its place? It does not remain | ||||
because it has no resistance. Where will it move to? It will move | ||||
towards the centre [of gravity]. And why by no other line? Because a | ||||
weight which has no support falls by the shortest road to the lowest | ||||
point which is the centre of the world. And why does the weight know | ||||
how to find it by so short a line? Because it is not independant and | ||||
does not move about in various directions. | ||||
[Footnote: This text and the sketch belonging to it, are reproduced | ||||
on Pl. CXXI.] | ||||
861. | ||||
Let the earth turn on which side it may the surface of the waters | ||||
will never move from its spherical form, but will always remain | ||||
equidistant from the centre of the globe. | ||||
Granting that the earth might be removed from the centre of the | ||||
globe, what would happen to the water? | ||||
It would remain in a sphere round that centre equally thick, but the | ||||
sphere would have a smaller diameter than when it enclosed the | ||||
earth. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare No. 896, lines 48-64; and No. 936.] | ||||
862. | ||||
Supposing the earth at our antipodes which supports the ocean were | ||||
to rise and stand uncovered, far out of the sea, but remaining | ||||
almost level, by what means afterwards, in the course of time, would | ||||
mountains and vallies be formed? | ||||
And the rocks with their various strata? | ||||
863. | ||||
Each man is always in the middle of the surface of the earth and | ||||
under the zenith of his own hemisphere, and over the centre of the | ||||
earth. | ||||
864. | ||||
Mem.: That I must first show the distance of the sun from the earth; | ||||
and, by means of a ray passing through a small hole into a dark | ||||
chamber, detect its real size; and besides this, by means of the | ||||
aqueous sphere calculate the size of the globe ... | ||||
Here it will be shown, that when the sun is in the meridian of our | ||||
hemisphere [Footnote 10: _Antipodi orientali cogli occidentali_. The | ||||
word _Antipodes_ does not here bear its literal sense, but--as we | ||||
may infer from the simultaneous reference to inhabitants of the | ||||
North and South-- is used as meaning men living at a distance of 90 | ||||
degrees from the zenith of the rational horizon of each observer.], | ||||
the antipodes to the East and to the West, alike, and at the same | ||||
time, see the sun mirrored in their waters; and the same is equally | ||||
true of the arctic and antarctic poles, if indeed they are | ||||
inhabited. | ||||
How to prove that the earth is a planet (865-867). | ||||
865. | ||||
That the earth is a star. | ||||
866. | ||||
In your discourse you must prove that the earth is a star much like | ||||
the moon, and the glory of our universe; and then you must treat of | ||||
the size of various stars, according to the authors. | ||||
867. | ||||
THE METHOD OF PROVING THAT THE EARTH IS A STAR. | ||||
First describe the eye; then show how the twinkling of a star is | ||||
really in the eye and why one star should twinkle more than another, | ||||
and how the rays from the stars originate in the eye; and add, that | ||||
if the twinkling of the stars were really in the stars --as it seems | ||||
to be--that this twinkling appears to be an extension as great as | ||||
the diameter of the body of the star; therefore, the star being | ||||
larger than the earth, this motion effected in an instant would be a | ||||
rapid doubling of the size of the star. Then prove that the surface | ||||
of the air where it lies contiguous to fire, and the surface of the | ||||
fire where it ends are those into which the solar rays penetrate, | ||||
and transmit the images of the heavenly bodies, large when they | ||||
rise, and small, when they are on the meridian. Let _a_ be the earth | ||||
and _n d m_ the surface of the air in contact with the sphere of | ||||
fire; _h f g_ is the orbit of the moon or, if you please, of the | ||||
sun; then I say that when the sun appears on the horizon _g_, its | ||||
rays are seen passing through the surface of the air at a slanting | ||||
angle, that is _o m_; this is not the case at _d k_. And so it | ||||
passes through a greater mass of air; all of _e m_ is a denser | ||||
atmosphere. | ||||
868. | ||||
Beyond the sun and us there is darkness and so the air appears blue. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare Vol. I, No. 301.] | ||||
869. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
It is possible to find means by which the eye shall not see remote | ||||
objects as much diminished as in natural perspective, which | ||||
diminishes them by reason of the convexity of the eye which | ||||
necessarily intersects, at its surface, the pyramid of every image | ||||
conveyed to the eye at a right angle on its spherical surface. But | ||||
by the method I here teach in the margin [9] these pyramids are | ||||
intersected at right angles close to the surface of the pupil. The | ||||
convex pupil of the eye can take in the whole of our hemisphere, | ||||
while this will show only a single star; but where many small stars | ||||
transmit their images to the surface of the pupil those stars are | ||||
extremely small; here only one star is seen but it will be large. | ||||
And so the moon will be seen larger and its spots of a more defined | ||||
form [Footnote 20 and fol.: Telescopes were not in use till a century | ||||
later. Compare No. 910 and page 136.]. You must place close to the | ||||
eye a glass filled with the water of which mention is made in number | ||||
4 of Book 113 "On natural substances" [Footnote 23: _libro_ 113. | ||||
This is perhaps the number of a book in some library catalogue. But | ||||
it may refer, on the other hand, to one of the 120 Books mentioned | ||||
in No. 796. l. 84.]; for this water makes objects which are enclosed | ||||
in balls of crystalline glass appear free from the glass. | ||||
OF THE EYE. | ||||
Among the smaller objects presented to the pupil of the eye, that | ||||
which is closest to it, will be least appreciable to the eye. And at | ||||
the same time, the experiments here made with the power of sight, | ||||
show that it is not reduced to speck if the &c. [32][Footnote 32: | ||||
Compare with this the passage in Vol. I, No. 52, written about | ||||
twenty years earlier.]. | ||||
Read in the margin. | ||||
[34]Those objects are seen largest which come to the eye at the | ||||
largest angles. | ||||
But the images of the objects conveyed to the pupil of the eye are | ||||
distributed to the pupil exactly as they are distributed in the air: | ||||
and the proof of this is in what follows; that when we look at the | ||||
starry sky, without gazing more fixedly at one star than another, | ||||
the sky appears all strewn with stars; and their proportions to the | ||||
eye are the same as in the sky and likewise the spaces between them | ||||
[61]. | ||||
[Footnote: 9. 32. _in margine:_ lines 34-61 are, in the original, | ||||
written on the margin and above them is the diagram to which | ||||
Leonardo seems to refer here.] | ||||
870. | ||||
PERSPECTIVE. | ||||
Among objects moved from the eye at equal distance, that undergoes | ||||
least diminution which at first was most remote. | ||||
When various objects are removed at equal distances farther from | ||||
their original position, that which was at first the farthest from | ||||
the eye will diminish least. And the proportion of the diminution | ||||
will be in proportion to the relative distance of the objects from | ||||
the eye before they were removed. | ||||
That is to say in the object _t_ and the object _e_ the proportion | ||||
of their distances from the eye _a_ is quintuple. I remove each from | ||||
its place and set it farther from the eye by one of the 5 parts into | ||||
which the proposition is divided. Hence it happens that the nearest | ||||
to the eye has doubled the distance and according to the last | ||||
proposition but one of this, is diminished by the half of its whole | ||||
size; and the body _e_, by the same motion, is diminished 1/5 of its | ||||
whole size. Therefore, by that same last proposition but one, that | ||||
which is said in this last proposition is true; and this I say of | ||||
the motions of the celestial bodies which are more distant by 3500 | ||||
miles when setting than when overhead, and yet do not increase or | ||||
diminish in any sensible degree. | ||||
871. | ||||
_a b_ is the aperture through which the sun passes, and if you could | ||||
measure the size of the solar rays at _n m_, you could accurately | ||||
trace the real lines of the convergence of the solar rays, the | ||||
mirror being at _a b_, and then show the reflected rays at equal | ||||
angles to _n m_; but, as you want to have them at _n m_, take them | ||||
at the. inner side of the aperture at cd, where they maybe measured | ||||
at the spot where the solar rays fall. Then place your mirror at the | ||||
distance _a b_, making the rays _d b_, _c a_ fall and then be | ||||
reflected at equal angles towards _c d_; and this is the best | ||||
method, but you must use this mirror always in the same month, and | ||||
the same day, and hour and instant, and this will be better than at | ||||
no fixed time because when the sun is at a certain distance it | ||||
produces a certain pyramid of rays. | ||||
872. | ||||
_a_, the side of the body in light and shade _b_, faces the whole | ||||
portion of the hemisphere bed _e f_, and does not face any part of | ||||
the darkness of the earth. And the same occurs at the point _o_; | ||||
therefore the space a _o_ is throughout of one and the same | ||||
brightness, and s faces only four degrees of the hemisphere _d e f g | ||||
h_, and also the whole of the earth _s h_, which will render it | ||||
darker; and how much must be demonstrated by calculation. [Footnote: | ||||
This passage, which has perhaps a doubtful right to its place in | ||||
this connection, stands in the Manuscript between those given in | ||||
Vol. I as No. 117 and No. 427.] | ||||
873. | ||||
THE REASON OF THE INCREASED SIZE OF THE SUN IN THE WEST. | ||||
Some mathematicians explain that the sun looks larger as it sets, | ||||
because the eye always sees it through a denser atmosphere, alleging | ||||
that objects seen through mist or through water appear larger. To | ||||
these I reply: No; because objects seen through a mist are similar | ||||
in colour to those at a distance; but not being similarly diminished | ||||
they appear larger. Again, nothing increases in size in smooth | ||||
water; and the proof of this may be seen by throwing a light on a | ||||
board placed half under water. But the reason why the sun looks | ||||
larger is that every luminous body appears larger in proportion as | ||||
it is more remote. [Footnote: Lines 5 and 6 are thus rendered by M. | ||||
RAVAISSON in his edition of MS. A. "_De meme, aucune chose ne croit | ||||
dans l'eau plane, et tu en feras l'experience_ en calquant un ais | ||||
sous l'eau."--Compare the diagrams in Vol. I, p. 114.] | ||||
On the luminosity of the Earth in the universal space (874-878). | ||||
874. | ||||
In my book I propose to show, how the ocean and the other seas must, | ||||
by means of the sun, make our world shine with the appearance of a | ||||
moon, and to the remoter worlds it looks like a star; and this I | ||||
shall prove. | ||||
Show, first that every light at a distance from the eye throws out | ||||
rays which appear to increase the size of the luminous body; and | ||||
from this it follows that 2 ...[Footnote 10: Here the text breaks | ||||
off; lines 11 and fol. are written in the margin.]. | ||||
[11]The moon is cold and moist. Water is cold and moist. Thus our | ||||
seas must appear to the moon as the moon does to us. | ||||
875. | ||||
The waves in water magnify the image of an object reflected in it. | ||||
Let _a_ be the sun, and _n m_ the ruffled water, _b_ the image of | ||||
the sun when the water is smooth. Let _f_ be the eye which sees the | ||||
image in all the waves included within the base of the triangle _c e | ||||
f_. Now the sun reflected in the unruffled surface occupied the | ||||
space _c d_, while in the ruffled surface it covers all the watery | ||||
space _c e_ (as is proved in the 4th of my "Perspective") [Footnote | ||||
9: _Nel quarto della mia prospettiva_. If this reference is to the | ||||
diagrams accompanying the text--as is usual with Leonardo--and not | ||||
to some particular work, the largest of the diagrams here given must | ||||
be meant. It is the lowest and actually the fifth, but he would have | ||||
called it the fourth, for the text here given is preceded on the | ||||
same page of the manuscript by a passage on whirlpools, with the | ||||
diagram belonging to it also reproduced here. The words _della mia | ||||
prospettiva_ may therefore indicate that the diagram to the | ||||
preceding chapter treating on a heterogeneal subject is to be | ||||
excluded. It is a further difficulty that this diagram belongs | ||||
properly to lines 9-10 and not to the preceding sentence. The | ||||
reflection of the sun in water is also discussed in the Theoretical | ||||
part of the Book on Painting; see Vol. I, No. 206, 207.] and it will | ||||
cover more of the water in proportion as the reflected image is | ||||
remote from the eye [10]. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original sketch, inside the circle in the first | ||||
diagram, is written _Sole_ (sun), and to the right of it _luna_ | ||||
(moon). Thus either of these heavenly bodies may be supposed to fill | ||||
that space. Within the lower circle is written _simulacro_ (image). | ||||
In the two next diagrams at the spot here marked _L_ the word _Luna_ | ||||
is written, and in the last _sole_ is written in the top circle at | ||||
_a_.] | ||||
The image of the sun will be more brightly shown in small waves than | ||||
in large ones--and this is because the reflections or images of the | ||||
sun are more numerous in the small waves than in large ones, and the | ||||
more numerous reflections of its radiance give a larger light than | ||||
the fewer. | ||||
Waves which intersect like the scales of a fir cone reflect the | ||||
image of the sun with the greatest splendour; and this is the case | ||||
because the images are as many as the ridges of the waves on which | ||||
the sun shines, and the shadows between these waves are small and | ||||
not very dark; and the radiance of so many reflections together | ||||
becomes united in the image which is transmitted to the eye, so that | ||||
these shadows are imperceptible. | ||||
That reflection of the sun will cover most space on the surface of | ||||
the water which is most remote from the eye which sees it. | ||||
Let _a_ be the sun, _p q_ the reflection of the sun; _a b_ is the | ||||
surface of the water, in which the sun is mirrored, and _r_ the eye | ||||
which sees this reflection on the surface of the water occupying the | ||||
space _o m_. _c_ is the eye at a greater distance from the surface | ||||
of the water and also from the reflection; hence this reflection | ||||
covers a larger space of water, by the distance between _n_ and _o_. | ||||
876. | ||||
It is impossible that the side of a spherical mirror, illuminated by | ||||
the sun, should reflect its radiance unless this mirror were | ||||
undulating or filled with bubbles. | ||||
You see here the sun which lights up the moon, a spherical mirror, | ||||
and all of its surface, which faces the sun is rendered radiant. | ||||
Whence it may be concluded that what shines in the moon is water | ||||
like that of our seas, and in waves as that is; and that portion | ||||
which does not shine consists of islands and terra firma. | ||||
This diagram, of several spherical bodies interposed between the eye | ||||
and the sun, is given to show that, just as the reflection of the | ||||
sun is seen in each of these bodies, in the same way that image may | ||||
be seen in each curve of the waves of the sea; and as in these many | ||||
spheres many reflections of the sun are seen, so in many waves there | ||||
are many images, each of which at a great distance is much magnified | ||||
to the eye. And, as this happens with each wave, the spaces | ||||
interposed between the waves are concealed; and, for this reason, it | ||||
looks as though the many suns mirrored in the many waves were but | ||||
one continuous sun; and the shadows,, mixed up with the luminous | ||||
images, render this radiance less brilliant than that of the sun | ||||
mirrored in these waves. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original, at letter _A_ in the diagram "_Sole_" | ||||
(the sun) is written, and at _o_ "_occhio_" (the eye).] | ||||
877. | ||||
This will have before it the treatise on light and shade. | ||||
The edges in the moon will be most strongly lighted and reflect most | ||||
light, because, there, nothing will be visible but the tops of the | ||||
waves of the water [Footnote 5: I have thought it unnecessary to | ||||
reproduce the detailed explanation of the theory of reflection on | ||||
waves contained in the passage which follows this.]. | ||||
878. | ||||
The sun will appear larger in moving water or on waves than in still | ||||
water; an example is the light reflected on the strings of a | ||||
monochord. | ||||
II. | ||||
THE SUN. | ||||
The question of the true and of the apparent size of the sun | ||||
(879-884). | ||||
879. | ||||
IN PRAISE OF THE SUN. | ||||
If you look at the stars, cutting off the rays (as may be done by | ||||
looking through a very small hole made with the extreme point of a | ||||
very fine needle, placed so as almost to touch the eye), you will | ||||
see those stars so minute that it would seem as though nothing could | ||||
be smaller; it is in fact their great distance which is the reason | ||||
of their diminution, for many of them are very many times larger | ||||
than the star which is the earth with water. Now reflect what this | ||||
our star must look like at such a distance, and then consider how | ||||
many stars might be added--both in longitude and latitude--between | ||||
those stars which are scattered over the darkened sky. But I cannot | ||||
forbear to condemn many of the ancients, who said that the sun was | ||||
no larger than it appears; among these was Epicurus, and I believe | ||||
that he founded his reason on the effects of a light placed in our | ||||
atmosphere equidistant from the centre of the earth. Any one looking | ||||
at it never sees it diminished in size at whatever distance; and the | ||||
rea- | ||||
[Footnote 879-882: What Leonardo says of Epicurus-- who according to | ||||
LEWIS, _The Astronomy of the ancients_, and MADLER, _Geschichte der | ||||
Himmelskunde_, did not devote much attention to the study of | ||||
celestial phenomena--, he probably derived from Book X of Diogenes | ||||
Laertius, whose _Vitae Philosophorum_ was not printed in Greek till | ||||
1533, but the Latin translation appeared in 1475.] | ||||
880. | ||||
sons of its size and power I shall reserve for Book 4. But I wonder | ||||
greatly that Socrates | ||||
[Footnote 2: _Socrates;_ I have little light to throw on this | ||||
reference. Plato's Socrates himself declares on more than one | ||||
occasion that in his youth he had turned his mind to the study of | ||||
celestial phenomena (METEWPA) but not in his later years (see G. C. | ||||
LEWIS, _The Astronomy of the ancients_, page 109; MADLER, | ||||
_Geschichte der Himmelskunde_, page 41). Here and there in Plato's | ||||
writings we find incidental notes on the sun and other heavenly | ||||
bodies. Leonardo may very well have known of these, since the Latin | ||||
version by Ficinus was printed as early as 1491; indeed an undated | ||||
edition exists which may very likely have appeared between 1480--90. | ||||
There is but one passage in Plato, Epinomis (p. 983) where he speaks | ||||
of the physical properties of the sun and says that it is larger | ||||
than the earth. | ||||
Aristotle who goes very fully into the subject says the same. A | ||||
complete edition of Aristotele's works was first printed in Venice | ||||
1495-98, but a Latin version of the Books _De Coelo et Mundo_ and | ||||
_De Physica_ had been printed in Venice as early as in 1483 (H. | ||||
MULLER-STRUBING).] | ||||
should have depreciated that solar body, saying that it was of the | ||||
nature of incandescent stone, and the one who opposed him as to that | ||||
error was not far wrong. But I only wish I had words to serve me to | ||||
blame those who are fain to extol the worship of men more than that | ||||
of the sun; for in the whole universe there is nowhere to be seen a | ||||
body of greater magnitude and power than the sun. Its light gives | ||||
light to all the celestial bodies which are distributed throughout | ||||
the universe; and from it descends all vital force, for the heat | ||||
that is in living beings comes from the soul [vital spark]; and | ||||
there is no other centre of heat and light in the universe as will | ||||
be shown in Book 4; and certainly those who have chosen to worship | ||||
men as gods--as Jove, Saturn, Mars and the like--have fallen into | ||||
the gravest error, seeing that even if a man were as large as our | ||||
earth, he would look no bigger than a little star which appears but | ||||
as a speck in the universe; and seeing again that these men are | ||||
mortal, and putrid and corrupt in their sepulchres. | ||||
Marcellus [Footnote 23: I have no means of identifying _Marcello_ | ||||
who is named in the margin. It may be Nonius Marcellus, an obscure | ||||
Roman Grammarian of uncertain date (between the IInd and Vth | ||||
centuries A. C.) the author of the treatise _De compendiosa doctrina | ||||
per litteras ad filium_ in which he treats _de rebus omnibus et | ||||
quibusdam aliis_. This was much read in the middle ages. The _editto | ||||
princeps_ is dated 1470 (H. MULLER-STRUBING).] and many others | ||||
praise the sun. | ||||
881. | ||||
Epicurus perhaps saw the shadows cast by columns on the walls in | ||||
front of them equal in diameter to the columns from which the | ||||
shadows were cast; and the breadth of the shadows being parallel | ||||
from beginning to end, he thought he might infer that the sun also | ||||
was directly opposite to this parallel and that consequently its | ||||
breadth was not greater than that of the column; not perceiving that | ||||
the diminution in the shadow was insensibly slight by reason of the | ||||
remoteness of the sun. If the sun were smaller than the earth, the | ||||
stars on a great portion of our hemisphere would have no light, | ||||
which is evidence against Epicurus who says the sun is only as large | ||||
as it appears. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original the writing is across the diagram.] | ||||
882. | ||||
Epicurus says the sun is the size it looks. Hence as it looks about | ||||
a foot across we must consider that to be its size; it would follow | ||||
that when the moon eclipses the sun, the sun ought not to appear the | ||||
larger, as it does. Then, the moon being smaller than the sun, the | ||||
moon must be less than a foot, and consequently when our world | ||||
eclipses the moon, it must be less than a foot by a finger's | ||||
breadth; inasmuch as if the sun is a foot across, and our earth | ||||
casts a conical shadow on the moon, it is inevitable that the | ||||
luminous cause of the cone of shadow must be larger than the opaque | ||||
body which casts the cone of shadow. | ||||
883. | ||||
To measure how many times the diameter of the sun will go into its | ||||
course in 24 hours. | ||||
Make a circle and place it to face the south, after the manner of a | ||||
sundial, and place a rod in the middle in such a way as that its | ||||
length points to the centre of this circle, and mark the shadow cast | ||||
in the sunshine by this rod on the circumference of the circle, and | ||||
this shadow will be--let us say-- as broad as from _a_ to _n_. Now | ||||
measure how many times this shadow will go into this circumference | ||||
of a circle, and that will give you the number of times that the | ||||
solar body will go into its orbit in 24 hours. Thus you may see | ||||
whether Epicurus was [right in] saying that the sun was only as | ||||
large as it looked; for, as the apparent diameter of the sun is | ||||
about a foot, and as that sun would go a thousand times into the | ||||
length of its course in 24 hours, it would have gone a thousand | ||||
feet, that is 300 braccia, which is the sixth of a mile. Whence it | ||||
would follow that the course of the sun during the day would be the | ||||
sixth part of a mile and that this venerable snail, the sun will | ||||
have travelled 25 braccia an hour. | ||||
884. | ||||
Posidonius composed books on the size of the sun. [Footnote: | ||||
Poseidonius of Apamea, commonly called the Rhodian, because he | ||||
taught in Rhodes, was a Stoic philosopher, a contemporary and friend | ||||
of Cicero's, and the author of numerous works on natural science, | ||||
among them. | ||||
Strabo quotes no doubt from one of his works, when he says that | ||||
Poseidonius explained how it was that the sun looked larger when it | ||||
was rising or setting than during the rest of its course (III, p. | ||||
135). Kleomedes, a later Greek Naturalist also mentions this | ||||
observation of Poseidonius' without naming the title of his work; | ||||
however, as Kleomedes' Cyclia Theorica was not printed till 1535, | ||||
Leonardo must have derived his quotation from Strabo. He probably | ||||
wrote this note in 1508, and as the original Greek was first printed | ||||
in Venice in 1516, we must suppose him to quote here from the | ||||
translation by Guarinus Veronensis, which was printed as early as | ||||
1471, also at Venice (H. MULLER-STRUBING).] | ||||
Of the nature of Sunlight. | ||||
885. | ||||
OF THE PROOF THAT THE SUN IS HOT BY NATURE AND NOT BY VIRTUE. | ||||
Of the nature of Sunlight. | ||||
That the heat of the sun resides in its nature and not in its virtue | ||||
[or mode of action] is abundantly proved by the radiance of the | ||||
solar body on which the human eye cannot dwell and besides this no | ||||
less manifestly by the rays reflected from a concave mirror, | ||||
which--when they strike the eye with such splendour that the eye | ||||
cannot bear them--have a brilliancy equal to the sun in its own | ||||
place. And that this is true I prove by the fact that if the mirror | ||||
has its concavity formed exactly as is requisite for the collecting | ||||
and reflecting of these rays, no created being could endure the | ||||
heat that strikes from the reflected rays of such a mirror. And if | ||||
you argue that the mirror itself is cold and yet send forth hot | ||||
rays, I should reply that those rays come really from the sun and | ||||
that it is the ray of the concave mirror after having passed through | ||||
the window. | ||||
Considerations as to the size of the sun (886-891). | ||||
886. | ||||
The sun does not move. [Footnote: This sentence occurs incidentally | ||||
among mathematical notes, and is written in unusually large | ||||
letters.] | ||||
887. | ||||
PROOF THAT THE NEARER YOU ARE TO THE SOURCE OF THE SOLAR RAYS, THE | ||||
LARGER WILL THE REFLECTION OF THE SUN FROM THE SEA APPEAR TO YOU. | ||||
[Footnote: Lines 4 and fol. Compare Vol. I, Nos. 130, 131.] If it is | ||||
from the centre that the sun employs its radiance to intensify the | ||||
power of its whole mass, it is evident that the farther its rays | ||||
extend, the more widely they will be divided; and this being so, | ||||
you, whose eye is near the water that mirrors the sun, see but a | ||||
small portion of the rays of the sun strike the surface of the | ||||
water, and reflecting the form of the sun. But if you were near to | ||||
the sun--as would be the case when the sun is on the meridian and | ||||
the sea to the westward--you would see the sun, mirrored in the sea, | ||||
of a very great size; because, as you are nearer to the sun, your | ||||
eye taking in the rays nearer to the point of radiation takes more | ||||
of them in, and a great splendour is the result. And in this way it | ||||
can be proved that the moon must have seas which reflect the sun, | ||||
and that the parts which do not shine are land. | ||||
888. | ||||
Take the measure of the sun at the solstice in mid-June. | ||||
889. | ||||
WHY THE SUN APPEARS LARGER WHEN SETTING THAN AT NOON, WHEN IT IS | ||||
NEAR TO US. | ||||
Every object seen through a curved medium seems to be of larger size | ||||
than it is. | ||||
[Footnote: At A is written _sole_ (the sun), at B _terra_ (the | ||||
earth).] | ||||
890. | ||||
Because the eye is small it can only see the image of the sun as of | ||||
a small size. If the eye were as large as the sun it would see the | ||||
image of the sun in water of the same size as the real body of the | ||||
sun, so long as the water is smooth. | ||||
891. | ||||
A METHOD OF SEEING THE SUN ECLIPSED WITHOUT PAIN TO THE EYE. | ||||
Take a piece of paper and pierce holes in it with a needle, and look | ||||
at the sun through these holes. | ||||
III. | ||||
THE MOON. | ||||
On the luminousity of the moon (892-901). | ||||
892. | ||||
OF THE MOON. | ||||
As I propose to treat of the nature of the moon, it is necessary | ||||
that first I should describe the perspective of mirrors, whether | ||||
plane, concave or convex; and first what is meant by a luminous ray, | ||||
and how it is refracted by various kinds of media; then, when a | ||||
reflected ray is most powerful, whether when the angle of incidence | ||||
is acute, right, or obtuse, or from a convex, a plane, or a concave | ||||
surface; or from an opaque or a transparent body. Besides this, how | ||||
it is that the solar rays which fall on the waves of the sea, are | ||||
seen by the eye of the same width at the angle nearest to the eye, | ||||
as at the highest line of the waves on the horizon; but | ||||
notwithstanding this the solar rays reflected from the waves of the | ||||
sea assume the pyramidal form and consequently, at each degree of | ||||
distance increase proportionally in size, although to our sight, | ||||
they appear as parallel. | ||||
1st. Nothing that has very little weight is opaque. | ||||
2dly. Nothing that is excessively weighty can remain beneath that | ||||
which is heavier. | ||||
3dly. As to whether the moon is situated in the centre of its | ||||
elements or not. | ||||
And, if it has no proper place of its own, like the earth, in the | ||||
midst of its elements, why does it not fall to the centre of our | ||||
elements? [Footnote 26: The problem here propounded by Leonardo was | ||||
not satisfactorily answered till Newton in 1682 formulated the law | ||||
of universal attraction and gravitation. Compare No. 902, lines | ||||
5-15.] | ||||
And, if the moon is not in the centre of its own elements and yet | ||||
does not fall, it must then be lighter than any other element. | ||||
And, if the moon is lighter than the other elements why is it opaque | ||||
and not transparent? | ||||
When objects of various sizes, being placed at various distances, | ||||
look of equal size, there must be the same relative proportion in | ||||
the distances as in the magnitudes of the objects. | ||||
[Footnote: In the diagram Leonardo wrote _sole_ at the place marked | ||||
_A_.] | ||||
893. | ||||
OF THE MOON AND WHETHER IT IS POLISHED AND SPHERICAL. | ||||
The image of the sun in the moon is powerfully luminous, and is only | ||||
on a small portion of its surface. And the proof may be seen by | ||||
taking a ball of burnished gold and placing it in the dark with a | ||||
light at some distance from it; and then, although it will | ||||
illuminate about half of the ball, the eye will perceive its | ||||
reflection only in a small part of its surface, and all the rest of | ||||
the surface reflects the darkness which surrounds it; so that it is | ||||
only in that spot that the image of the light is seen, and all the | ||||
rest remains invisible, the eye being at a distance from the ball. | ||||
The same thing would happen on the surface of the moon if it were | ||||
polished, lustrous and opaque, like all bodies with a reflecting | ||||
surface. | ||||
Show how, if you were standing on the moon or on a star, our earth | ||||
would seem to reflect the sun as the moon does. | ||||
And show that the image of the sun in the sea cannot appear one and | ||||
undivided, as it appears in a perfectly plane mirror. | ||||
894. | ||||
How shadows are lost at great distances, as is shown by the shadow | ||||
side of the moon which is never seen. [Footnote: Compare also Vol. | ||||
I, Nos. 175-179.] | ||||
895. | ||||
Either the moon has intrinsic luminosity or not. If it has, why does | ||||
it not shine without the aid of the sun? But if it has not any light | ||||
in itself it must of necessity be a spherical mirror; and if it is a | ||||
mirror, is it not proved in Perspective that the image of a luminous | ||||
object will never be equal to the extent of surface of the | ||||
reflecting body that it illuminates? And if it be thus [Footnote 13: | ||||
At A, in the diagram, Leonardo wrote "_sole_" (the sun), and at B | ||||
"_luna o noi terra_" (the moon or our earth). Compare also the text | ||||
of No. 876.], as is here shown at _r s_ in the figure, whence comes | ||||
so great an extent of radiance as that of the full moon as we see | ||||
it, at the fifteenth day of the moon? | ||||
896. | ||||
OF THE MOON. | ||||
The moon has no light in itself; but so much of it as faces the sun | ||||
is illuminated, and of that illumined portion we see so much as | ||||
faces the earth. And the moon's night receives just as much light as | ||||
is lent it by our waters as they reflect the image of the sun, which | ||||
is mirrored in all those waters which are on the side towards the | ||||
sun. The outside or surface of the waters forming the seas of the | ||||
moon and of the seas of our globe is always ruffled little or much, | ||||
or more or less--and this roughness causes an extension of the | ||||
numberless images of the sun which are repeated in the ridges and | ||||
hollows, the sides and fronts of the innumerable waves; that is to | ||||
say in as many different spots on each wave as our eyes find | ||||
different positions to view them from. This could not happen, if the | ||||
aqueous sphere which covers a great part of the moon were uniformly | ||||
spherical, for then the images of the sun would be one to each | ||||
spectator, and its reflections would be separate and independent and | ||||
its radiance would always appear circular; as is plainly to be seen | ||||
in the gilt balls placed on the tops of high buildings. But if those | ||||
gilt balls were rugged or composed of several little balls, like | ||||
mulberries, which are a black fruit composed of minute round | ||||
globules, then each portion of these little balls, when seen in the | ||||
sun, would display to the eye the lustre resulting from the | ||||
reflection of the sun, and thus, in one and the same body many tiny | ||||
suns would be seen; and these often combine at a long distance and | ||||
appear as one. The lustre of the new moon is brighter and stronger, | ||||
than when the moon is full; and the reason of this is that the angle | ||||
of incidence is more obtuse in the new than in the full moon, in | ||||
which the angles [of incidence and reflection] are highly acute. The | ||||
waves of the moon therefore mirror the sun in the hollows of the | ||||
waves as well as on the ridges, and the sides remain in shadow. But | ||||
at the sides of the moon the hollows of the waves do not catch the | ||||
sunlight, but only their crests; and thus the images are fewer and | ||||
more mixed up with the shadows in the hollows; and this | ||||
intermingling of the shaded and illuminated spots comes to the eye | ||||
with a mitigated splendour, so that the edges will be darker, | ||||
because the curves of the sides of the waves are insufficient to | ||||
reflect to the eye the rays that fall upon them. Now the new moon | ||||
naturally reflects the solar rays more directly towards the eye from | ||||
the crests of the waves than from any other part, as is shown by the | ||||
form of the moon, whose rays a strike the waves _b_ and are | ||||
reflected in the line _b d_, the eye being situated at _d_. This | ||||
cannot happen at the full moon, when the solar rays, being in the | ||||
west, fall on the extreme waters of the moon to the East from _n_ to | ||||
_m_, and are not reflected to the eye in the West, but are thrown | ||||
back eastwards, with but slight deflection from the straight course | ||||
of the solar ray; and thus the angle of incidence is very wide | ||||
indeed. | ||||
The moon is an opaque and solid body and if, on the contrary, it | ||||
were transparent, it would not receive the light of the sun. | ||||
The yellow or yolk of an egg remains in the middle of the albumen, | ||||
without moving on either side; now it is either lighter or heavier | ||||
than this albumen, or equal to it; if it is lighter, it ought to | ||||
rise above all the albumen and stop in contact with the shell of the | ||||
egg; and if it is heavier, it ought to sink, and if it is equal, it | ||||
might just as well be at one of the ends, as in the middle or below | ||||
[54]. | ||||
[Footnote 48-64: Compare No. 861.] | ||||
The innumerable images of the solar rays reflected from the | ||||
innumerable waves of the sea, as they fall upon those waves, are | ||||
what cause us to see the very broad and continuous radiance on the | ||||
surface of the sea. | ||||
897. | ||||
That the sun could not be mirrored in the body of the moon, which is | ||||
a convex mirror, in such a way as that so much of its surface as is | ||||
illuminated by the sun, should reflect the sun unless the moon had a | ||||
surface adapted to reflect it--in waves and ridges, like the surface | ||||
of the sea when its surface is moved by the wind. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original diagrams _sole_ is written at the place | ||||
marked _A; luna_ at _C,_ and _terra_ at the two spots marked _B_.] | ||||
The waves in water multiply the image of the object reflected in it. | ||||
These waves reflect light, each by its own line, as the surface of | ||||
the fir cone does [Footnote 14: See the diagram p. 145.] | ||||
These are 2 figures one different from the other; one with | ||||
undulating water and the other with smooth water. | ||||
It is impossible that at any distance the image of the sun cast on | ||||
the surface of a spherical body should occupy the half of the | ||||
sphere. | ||||
Here you must prove that the earth produces all the same effects | ||||
with regard to the moon, as the moon with regard to the earth. | ||||
The moon, with its reflected light, does not shine like the sun, | ||||
because the light of the moon is not a continuous reflection of that | ||||
of the sun on its whole surface, but only on the crests and hollows | ||||
of the waves of its waters; and thus the sun being confusedly | ||||
reflected, from the admixture of the shadows that lie between the | ||||
lustrous waves, its light is not pure and clear as the sun is. | ||||
[Footnote 38: This refers to the small diagram placed between _B_ | ||||
and _B_.--]. The earth between the moon on the fifteenth day and the | ||||
sun. [Footnote 39: See the diagram below the one referred to in the | ||||
preceding note.] Here the sun is in the East and the moon on the | ||||
fifteenth day in the West. [Footnote 40.41: Refers to the diagram | ||||
below the others.] The moon on the fifteenth [day] between the earth | ||||
and the sun. [41]Here it is the moon which has the sun to the West | ||||
and the earth to the East. | ||||
898. | ||||
WHAT SORT OF THING THE MOON IS. | ||||
The moon is not of itself luminous, but is highly fitted to | ||||
assimilate the character of light after the manner of a mirror, or | ||||
of water, or of any other reflecting body; and it grows larger in | ||||
the East and in the West, like the sun and the other planets. And | ||||
the reason is that every luminous body looks larger in proportion as | ||||
it is remote. It is easy to understand that every planet and star is | ||||
farther from us when in the West than when it is overhead, by about | ||||
3500 miles, as is proved on the margin [Footnote 7: refers to the | ||||
first diagram.--A = _sole_ (the sun), B = _terra_ (the earth), C = | ||||
_luna_ (the moon).], and if you see the sun or moon mirrored in the | ||||
water near to you, it looks to you of the same size in the water as | ||||
in the sky. But if you recede to the distance of a mile, it will | ||||
look 100 times larger; and if you see the sun reflected in the sea | ||||
at sunset, its image would look to you more than 10 miles long; | ||||
because that reflected image extends over more than 10 miles of sea. | ||||
And if you could stand where the moon is, the sun would look to you, | ||||
as if it were reflected from all the sea that it illuminates by day; | ||||
and the land amid the water would appear just like the dark spots | ||||
that are on the moon, which, when looked at from our earth, appears | ||||
to men the same as our earth would appear to any men who might dwell | ||||
in the moon. | ||||
[Footnote: This text has already been published by LIBRI: _Histoire | ||||
des Sciences,_ III, pp. 224, 225.] | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF THE MOON. | ||||
When the moon is entirely lighted up to our sight, we see its full | ||||
daylight; and at that time, owing to the reflection of the solar | ||||
rays which fall on it and are thrown off towards us, its ocean casts | ||||
off less moisture towards us; and the less light it gives the more | ||||
injurious it is. | ||||
899. | ||||
OF THE MOON. | ||||
I say that as the moon has no light in itself and yet is luminous, | ||||
it is inevitable but that its light is caused by some other body. | ||||
900. | ||||
OF THE MOON. | ||||
All my opponent's arguments to say that there is no water in the | ||||
moon. [Footnote: The objections are very minutely noted down in the | ||||
manuscript, but they hardly seem to have a place here.] | ||||
901. | ||||
Answer to Maestro Andrea da Imola, who said that the solar rays | ||||
reflected from a convex mirror are mingled and lost at a short | ||||
distance; whereby it is altogether denied that the luminous side of | ||||
the moon is of the nature of a mirror, and that consequently the | ||||
light is not produced by the innumerable multitude of the waves of | ||||
that sea, which I declared to be the portion of the moon which is | ||||
illuminated by the solar rays. | ||||
Let _o p_ be the body of the sun, _c n s_ the moon, and _b_ the eye | ||||
which, above the base _c n_ of the cathetus _c n m_, sees the body | ||||
of the sun reflected at equal angles _c n_; and the same again on | ||||
moving the eye from _b_ to _a_. [Footnote: The large diagram on the | ||||
margin of page 161 belongs to this chapter.] | ||||
Explanation of the lumen cinereum in the moon. | ||||
902. | ||||
OF THE MOON. | ||||
No solid body is less heavy than the atmosphere. | ||||
[Footnote: 1. On the margin are the words _tola romantina, | ||||
tola--ferro stagnato_ (tinned iron); _romantina_ is some special | ||||
kind of sheet-iron no longer known by that name.] | ||||
Having proved that the part of the moon that shines consists of | ||||
water, which mirrors the body of the sun and reflects the radiance | ||||
it receives from it; and that, if these waters were devoid of waves, | ||||
it would appear small, but of a radiance almost like the sun; --[5] | ||||
It must now be shown whether the moon is a heavy or a light body: | ||||
for, if it were a heavy body--admitting that at every grade of | ||||
distance from the earth greater levity must prevail, so that water | ||||
is lighter than the earth, and air than water, and fire than air and | ||||
so on successively--it would seem that if the moon had density as it | ||||
really has, it would have weight, and having weight, that it could | ||||
not be sustained in the space where it is, and consequently that it | ||||
would fall towards the centre of the universe and become united to | ||||
the earth; or if not the moon itself, at least its waters would fall | ||||
away and be lost from it, and descend towards the centre, leaving | ||||
the moon without any and so devoid of lustre. But as this does not | ||||
happen, as might in reason be expected, it is a manifest sign that | ||||
the moon is surrounded by its own elements: that is to say water, | ||||
air and fire; and thus is, of itself and by itself, suspended in | ||||
that part of space, as our earth with its element is in this part of | ||||
space; and that heavy bodies act in the midst of its elements just | ||||
as other heavy bodies do in ours [Footnote 15: This passage would | ||||
certainly seem to establish Leonardo's claim to be regarded as the | ||||
original discoverer of the cause of the ashy colour of the new moon | ||||
(_lumen cinereum_). His observations however, having hitherto | ||||
remained unknown to astronomers, Moestlin and Kepler have been | ||||
credited with the discoveries which they made independently a | ||||
century later. | ||||
Some disconnected notes treat of the same subject in MS. C. A. 239b; | ||||
718b and 719b; "_Perche la luna cinta della parte alluminata dal | ||||
sole in ponente, tra maggior splendore in mezzo a tal cerchio, che | ||||
quando essa eclissava il sole. Questo accade perche nell' eclissare | ||||
il sole ella ombrava il nostro oceano, il qual caso non accade | ||||
essendo in ponente, quando il sole alluma esso oceano_." The editors | ||||
of the "_Saggio_" who first published this passage (page 12) add | ||||
another short one about the seasons in the moon which I confess not | ||||
to have seen in the original manuscript: "_La luna ha ogni mese un | ||||
verno e una state, e ha maggiori freddi e maggiori caldi, e i suoi | ||||
equinozii son piu freddi de' nostri._"] | ||||
When the eye is in the East and sees the moon in the West near to | ||||
the setting sun, it sees it with its shaded portion surrounded by | ||||
luminous portions; and the lateral and upper portion of this light | ||||
is derived from the sun, and the lower portion from the ocean in the | ||||
West, which receives the solar rays and reflects them on the lower | ||||
waters of the moon, and indeed affords the part of the moon that is | ||||
in shadow as much radiance as the moon gives the earth at midnight. | ||||
Therefore it is not totally dark, and hence some have believed that | ||||
the moon must in parts have a light of its own besides that which is | ||||
given it by the sun; and this light is due, as has been said, to the | ||||
above- mentioned cause,--that our seas are illuminated by the sun. | ||||
Again, it might be said that the circle of radiance shown by the | ||||
moon when it and the sun are both in the West is wholly borrowed | ||||
from the sun, when it, and the sun, and the eye are situated as is | ||||
shown above. | ||||
[Footnote 23. 24: The larger of the two diagrams reproduced above | ||||
stands between these two lines, and the smaller one is sketched in | ||||
the margin. At the spot marked _A_ Leonardo wrote _corpo solare_ | ||||
(solar body) in the larger diagram and _Sole_ (sun) in the smaller | ||||
one. At _C luna_ (moon) is written and at _B terra_ (the earth).] | ||||
Some might say that the air surrounding the moon as an element, | ||||
catches the light of the sun as our atmosphere does, and that it is | ||||
this which completes the luminous circle on the body of the moon. | ||||
Some have thought that the moon has a light of its own, but this | ||||
opinion is false, because they have founded it on that dim light | ||||
seen between the hornes of the new moon, which looks dark where it | ||||
is close to the bright part, while against the darkness of the | ||||
background it looks so light that many have taken it to be a ring of | ||||
new radiance completing the circle where the tips of the horns | ||||
illuminated by the sun cease to shine [Footnote 34: See Pl. CVIII, | ||||
No. 5.]. And this difference of background arises from the fact that | ||||
the portion of that background which is conterminous with the bright | ||||
part of the moon, by comparison with that brightness looks darker | ||||
than it is; while at the upper part, where a portion of the luminous | ||||
circle is to be seen of uniform width, the result is that the moon, | ||||
being brighter there than the medium or background on which it is | ||||
seen by comparison with that darkness it looks more luminous at that | ||||
edge than it is. And that brightness at such a time itself is | ||||
derived from our ocean and other inland-seas. These are, at that | ||||
time, illuminated by the sun which is already setting in such a way | ||||
as that the sea then fulfils the same function to the dark side of | ||||
the moon as the moon at its fifteenth day does to us when the sun is | ||||
set. And the small amount of light which the dark side of the moon | ||||
receives bears the same proportion to the light of that side which | ||||
is illuminated, as that... [Footnote 42: Here the text breaks off; | ||||
lines 43-52 are written on the margin.]. | ||||
If you want to see how much brighter the shaded portion of the moon | ||||
is than the background on which it is seen, conceal the luminous | ||||
portion of the moon with your hand or with some other more distant | ||||
object. | ||||
On the spots in the moon (903-907). | ||||
903. | ||||
THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. | ||||
Some have said that vapours rise from the moon, after the manner of | ||||
clouds and are interposed between the moon and our eyes. But, if | ||||
this were the case, these spots would never be permanent, either as | ||||
to position or form; and, seeing the moon from various aspects, even | ||||
if these spots did not move they would change in form, as objects do | ||||
which are seen from different sides. | ||||
904. | ||||
OF THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. | ||||
Others say that the moon is composed of more or less transparent | ||||
parts; as though one part were something like alabaster and others | ||||
like crystal or glass. It would follow from this that the sun | ||||
casting its rays on the less transparent portions, the light would | ||||
remain on the surface, and so the denser part would be illuminated, | ||||
and the transparent portions would display the shadow of their | ||||
darker depths; and this is their account of the structure and nature | ||||
of the moon. And this opinion has found favour with many | ||||
philosophers, and particularly with Aristotle, and yet it is a false | ||||
view--for, in the various phases and frequent changes of the moon | ||||
and sun to our eyes, we should see these spots vary, at one time | ||||
looking dark and at another light: they would be dark when the sun | ||||
is in the West and the moon in the middle of the sky; for then the | ||||
transparent hollows would be in shadow as far as the tops of the | ||||
edges of those transparent hollows, because the sun could not then | ||||
fling his rays into the mouth of the hollows, which however, at full | ||||
moon, would be seen in bright light, at which time the moon is in | ||||
the East and faces the sun in the West; then the sun would | ||||
illuminate even the lowest depths of these transparent places and | ||||
thus, as there would be no shadows cast, the moon at these times | ||||
would not show us the spots in question; and so it would be, now | ||||
more and now less, according to the changes in the position of the | ||||
sun to the moon, and of the moon to our eyes, as I have said above. | ||||
905. | ||||
OF THE SPOTS ON THE MOON. | ||||
It has been asserted, that the spots on the moon result from the | ||||
moon being of varying thinness or density; but if this were so, when | ||||
there is an eclipse of the moon the solar rays would pierce through | ||||
the portions which were thin as is alleged [Footnote 3-5: _Eclissi_. | ||||
This word, as it seems to me, here means eclipses of the sun; and | ||||
the sense of the passage, as I understand it, is that by the | ||||
foregoing hypothesis the moon, when it comes between the sun and the | ||||
earth must appear as if pierced,--we may say like a sieve.]. But as | ||||
we do not see this effect the opinion must be false. | ||||
Others say that the surface of the moon is smooth and polished and | ||||
that, like a mirror, it reflects in itself the image of our earth. | ||||
This view is also false, inasmuch as the land, where it is not | ||||
covered with water, presents various aspects and forms. Hence when | ||||
the moon is in the East it would reflect different spots from those | ||||
it would show when it is above us or in the West; now the spots on | ||||
the moon, as they are seen at full moon, never vary in the course of | ||||
its motion over our hemisphere. A second reason is that an object | ||||
reflected in a convex body takes up but a small portion of that | ||||
body, as is proved in perspective [Footnote 18: _come e provato_. | ||||
This alludes to the accompanying diagram.]. The third reason is that | ||||
when the moon is full, it only faces half the hemisphere of the | ||||
illuminated earth, on which only the ocean and other waters reflect | ||||
bright light, while the land makes spots on that brightness; thus | ||||
half of our earth would be seen girt round with the brightness of | ||||
the sea lighted up by the sun, and in the moon this reflection would | ||||
be the smallest part of that moon. Fourthly, a radiant body cannot | ||||
be reflected from another equally radiant; therefore the sea, since | ||||
it borrows its brightness from the sun,--as the moon does--, could | ||||
not cause the earth to be reflected in it, nor indeed could the body | ||||
of the sun be seen reflected in it, nor indeed any star opposite to | ||||
it. | ||||
906. | ||||
If you keep the details of the spots of the moon under observation | ||||
you will often find great variation in them, and this I myself have | ||||
proved by drawing them. And this is caused by the clouds that rise | ||||
from the waters in the moon, which come between the sun and those | ||||
waters, and by their shadow deprive these waters of the sun's rays. | ||||
Thus those waters remain dark, not being able to reflect the solar | ||||
body. | ||||
907. | ||||
How the spots on the moon must have varied from what they formerly | ||||
were, by reason of the course of its waters. | ||||
On the moon's halo. | ||||
908. | ||||
OF HALOS ROUND THE MOON. | ||||
I have found, that the circles which at night seem to surround the | ||||
moon, of various sizes, and degrees of density are caused by various | ||||
gradations in the densities of the vapours which exist at different | ||||
altitudes between the moon and our eyes. And of these halos the | ||||
largest and least red is caused by the lowest of these vapours; the | ||||
second, smaller one, is higher up, and looks redder because it is | ||||
seen through two vapours. And so on, as they are higher they will | ||||
appear smaller and redder, because, between the eye and them, there | ||||
is thicker vapour. Whence it is proved that where they are seen to | ||||
be reddest, the vapours are most dense. | ||||
On instruments for observing the moon (909. 910). | ||||
909. | ||||
If you want to prove why the moon appears larger than it is, when it | ||||
reaches the horizon; take a lens which is highly convex on one | ||||
surface and concave on the opposite, and place the concave side next | ||||
the eye, and look at the object beyond the convex surface; by this | ||||
means you will have produced an exact imitation of the atmosphere | ||||
included beneath the sphere of fire and outside that of water; for | ||||
this atmosphere is concave on the side next the earth, and convex | ||||
towards the fire. | ||||
910. | ||||
Construct glasses to see the moon magnified. | ||||
[Footnote: See the Introduction, p. 136, Fracastoro says in his work | ||||
Homocentres: "_Per dua specilla ocularla si quis perspiciat, alteri | ||||
altero superposito, majora multo et propinquiora videbit | ||||
omnia.--Quin imo quaedam specilla ocularia fiunt tantae densitatis, | ||||
ut si per ea quis aut lunam, aut aliud siderum spectet, adeo | ||||
propinqua illa iudicet, ut ne turres ipsas excedant_" (sect. II c. 8 | ||||
and sect. III, c. 23).] | ||||
I. | ||||
THE STARS. | ||||
On the light of the stars (911-913). | ||||
911. | ||||
The stars are visible by night and not by day, because we are | ||||
eneath the dense atmosphere, which is full of innumerable | ||||
articles of moisture, each of which independently, when the | ||||
ays of the sun fall upon it, reflects a radiance, and so these | ||||
umberless bright particles conceal the stars; and if it were not | ||||
or this atmosphere the sky would always display the stars against | ||||
ts darkness. | ||||
[Footnote: See No. 296, which also refers to starlight.] | ||||
912. | ||||
Whether the stars have their light from the sun or in themselves. | ||||
Some say that they shine of themselves, alledging that if Venus | ||||
nd Mercury had not a light of their own, when they come between | ||||
ur eye and the sun they would darken so much of the sun as they | ||||
ould cover from our eye. But this is false, for it is proved that | ||||
dark object against a luminous body is enveloped and entirely | ||||
oncealed by the lateral rays of the rest of that luminous body | ||||
nd so remains invisible. As may be seen when the sun is seen | ||||
hrough the boughs of trees bare of their leaves, at some distance | ||||
he branches do not conceal any portion of the sun from our eye. | ||||
he same thing happens with the above mentioned planets which, | ||||
hough they have no light of their own, do not--as has been said-- | ||||
onceal any part of the sun from our eye | ||||
[18]. | ||||
SECOND ARGUMENT. | ||||
Some say that the stars appear most brilliant at night in proportion | ||||
as they are higher up; and that if they had no light of their own, | ||||
the shadow of the earth which comes between them and the sun, would | ||||
darken them, since they would not face nor be faced by the solar | ||||
body. But those persons have not considered that the conical shadow | ||||
of the earth cannot reach many of the stars; and even as to those it | ||||
does reach, the cone is so much diminished that it covers very | ||||
little of the star's mass, and all the rest is illuminated by the | ||||
sun. | ||||
Footnote: From this and other remarks (see No. 902) it is clear | ||||
hat Leonardo was familiar with the phenomena of Irradiation.] | ||||
13. | ||||
Why the planets appear larger in the East than they do overhead, | ||||
whereas the contrary should be the case, as they are 3500 miles | ||||
nearer to us when in mid sky than when on the horizon. | ||||
All the degrees of the elements, through which the images of the | ||||
celestial bodies pass to reach the eye, are equal curves and the | ||||
angles by which the central line of those images passes through | ||||
them, are unequal angles [Footnote 13: _inequali_, here and | ||||
elsewhere does not mean unequal in the sense of not being equal to | ||||
each other, but angles which are not right angles.]; and the | ||||
distance is greater, as is shown by the excess of _a b_ beyond _a | ||||
d_; and the enlargement of these celestial bodies on the horizon is | ||||
shown by the 9th of the 7th. | ||||
Observations on the stars. | ||||
914. | ||||
To see the real nature of the planets open the covering and note at | ||||
the base [Footnote 4: _basa_. This probably alludes to some | ||||
instrument, perhaps the Camera obscura.] one single planet, and the | ||||
reflected movement of this base will show the nature of the said | ||||
planet; but arrange that the base may face only one at the time. | ||||
On history of astronomy. | ||||
915. | ||||
Cicero says in [his book] De Divinatione that Astrology has been | ||||
practised five hundred seventy thousand years before the Trojan war. | ||||
57000. | ||||
[Footnote: The statement that CICERO, _De Divin._ ascribes the | ||||
discovery of astrology to a period 57000 years before the Trojan war | ||||
I believe to be quite erroneous. According to ERNESTI, _Clavis | ||||
Ciceroniana,_ CH. G. SCHULZ (_Lexic. Cicer._) and the edition of _De | ||||
Divin._ by GIESE the word Astrologia occurs only twice in CICERO: | ||||
_De Divin. II_, 42. _Ad Chaldaeorum monstra veniamus, de quibus | ||||
Eudoxus, Platonis auditor, in astrologia judicio doctissimorum | ||||
hominum facile princeps, sic opinatur (id quod scriptum reliquit): | ||||
Chaldaeis in praedictione et in notatione cujusque vitae ex natali | ||||
die minime esse credendum._" He then quotes the condemnatory verdict | ||||
of other philosophers as to the teaching of the Chaldaeans but says | ||||
nothing as to the antiquity and origin of astronomy. CICERO further | ||||
notes _De oratore_ I, 16 that Aratus was "_ignarus astrologiae_" but | ||||
that is all. So far as I know the word occurs nowhere else in | ||||
CICERO; and the word _Astronomia_ he does not seem to have used at | ||||
all. (H. MULLER-STRUBING.)] | ||||
Of time and its divisions (916-918). | ||||
916. | ||||
Although time is included in the class of Continuous Quantities, | ||||
being indivisible and immaterial, it does not come entirely under | ||||
the head of Geometry, which represents its divisions by means of | ||||
figures and bodies of infinite variety, such as are seen to be | ||||
continuous in their visible and material properties. But only with | ||||
its first principles does it agree, that is with the Point and the | ||||
Line; the point may be compared to an instant of time, and the line | ||||
may be likened to the length of a certain quantity of time, and just | ||||
as a line begins and terminates in a point, so such a space of time. | ||||
begins and terminates in an instant. And whereas a line is | ||||
infinitely divisible, the divisibility of a space of time is of the | ||||
same nature; and as the divisions of the line may bear a certain | ||||
proportion to each other, so may the divisions of time. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage is repeated word for word on page 190b of | ||||
the same manuscript and this is accounted for by the text in Vol. I, | ||||
No. 4. Compare also No. 1216.] | ||||
917. | ||||
Describe the nature of Time as distinguished from the Geometrical | ||||
definitions. | ||||
918. | ||||
Divide an hour into 3000 parts, and this you can do with a clock by | ||||
making the pendulum lighter or heavier. | ||||
_XVI. | ||||
Physical Geography. | ||||
Leonardo's researches as to the structure of the earth and sea were | ||||
made at a time, when the extended voyages of the Spaniards and | ||||
Portuguese had also excited a special interest in geographical | ||||
questions in Italy, and particularly in Tuscany. Still, it need | ||||
scarcely surprise us to find that in deeper questions, as to the | ||||
structure of the globe, the primitive state of the earth's surface, | ||||
and the like, he was far in advance of his time. | ||||
The number of passages which treat of such matters is relatively | ||||
considerable; like almost all Leonardo's scientific notes they deal | ||||
partly with theoretical and partly with practical questions. Some of | ||||
his theoretical views of the motion of water were collected in a | ||||
copied manuscript volume by an early transcriber, but without any | ||||
acknowledgment of the source whence they were derived. This copy is | ||||
now in the Library of the Barberini palace at Rome and was published | ||||
under the title: "De moto e misura dell'acqua," by FRANCESCO | ||||
CARDINALI, Bologna_ 1828. _In this work the texts are arranged under | ||||
the following titles:_ Libr. I. Della spera dell'acqua; Libr. II. | ||||
Del moto dell'acqua; Libr. III. Dell'onda dell'acqua; Libr. IV. Dei | ||||
retrosi d'acqua; Libr. V. Dell'acqua cadente; Libr. VI. Delle | ||||
rotture fatte dall'acqua; Libr. VII Delle cose portate dall'acqua; | ||||
Libr. VIII. Dell'oncia dell'acqua e delle canne; Libr. IX. De molini | ||||
e d'altri ordigni d'acqua. | ||||
_The large number of isolated observations scattered through the | ||||
manuscripts, accounts for our so frequently finding notes of new | ||||
schemes for the arrangement of those relating to water and its | ||||
motions, particularly in the Codex Atlanticus: I have printed | ||||
several of these plans as an introduction to the Physical Geography, | ||||
and I have actually arranged the texts in accordance with the clue | ||||
afforded by one of them which is undoubtedly one of the latest notes | ||||
referring to the subject (No._ 920_). The text given as No._ 930 | ||||
_which is also taken from a late note-book of Leonardo's, served as | ||||
a basis for the arrangement of the first of the seven books--or | ||||
sections--, bearing the title: Of the Nature of Water_ (Dell'acque | ||||
in se). | ||||
_As I have not made it any part of this undertaking to print the | ||||
passages which refer to purely physical principles, it has also been | ||||
necessary to exclude those practical researches which, in accordance | ||||
with indications given in_ 920, _ought to come in as Books_ 13, 14 | ||||
_and_ 15. _I can only incidentally mention here that Leonardo--as it | ||||
seems to me, especially in his youth--devoted a great deal of | ||||
attention to the construction of mills. This is proved by a number | ||||
of drawings of very careful and minute execution, which are to be | ||||
found in the Codex Atlanticus. Nor was it possible to include his | ||||
considerations on the regulation of rivers, the making of canals and | ||||
so forth (No._ 920, _Books_ 10, 11 _and_ 12_); but those passages in | ||||
which the structure of a canal is directly connected with notices of | ||||
particular places will be found duly inserted under section XVII | ||||
(Topographical notes). In Vol. I, No._ 5 _the text refers to | ||||
canal-making in general._ | ||||
_On one point only can the collection of passages included under the | ||||
general heading of Physical Geography claim to be complete. When | ||||
comparing and sorting the materials for this work I took particular | ||||
care not to exclude or omit any text in which a geographical name | ||||
was mentioned even incidentally, since in all such researches the | ||||
chief interest, as it appeared to me, attached to the question | ||||
whether these acute observations on the various local | ||||
characteristics of mountains, rivers or seas, had been made by | ||||
Leonardo himself, and on the spot. It is self-evident that the few | ||||
general and somewhat superficial observations on the Rhine and the | ||||
Danube, on England and Flanders, must have been obtained from maps | ||||
or from some informants, and in the case of Flanders Leonardo | ||||
himself acknowledges this (see No._ 1008_). But that most of the | ||||
other and more exact observations were made, on the spot, by | ||||
Leonardo himself, may be safely assumed from their method and the | ||||
style in which he writes of them; and we should bear it in mind that | ||||
in all investigations, of whatever kind, experience is always spoken | ||||
of as the only basis on which he relies. Incidentally, as in No._ | ||||
984, _he thinks it necessary to allude to the total absence of all | ||||
recorded observations._ | ||||
I. | ||||
INTRODUCTION. | ||||
Schemes for the arrangement of the materials (919-928). | ||||
919. | ||||
These books contain in the beginning: Of the nature of water itself | ||||
in its motions; the others treat of the effects of its currents, | ||||
which change the world in its centre and its shape. | ||||
920. | ||||
DIVISIONS OF THE BOOK. | ||||
Book 1 of water in itself. | ||||
Book 2 of the sea. | ||||
Book 3 of subterranean rivers. | ||||
Book 4 of rivers. | ||||
Book 5 of the nature of the abyss. | ||||
Book 6 of the obstacles. | ||||
Book 7 of gravels. | ||||
Book 8 of the surface of water. | ||||
Book 9 of the things placed therein. | ||||
Book 10 of the repairing of rivers. | ||||
Book 11 of conduits. | ||||
Book 12 of canals. | ||||
Book 13 of machines turned by water. | ||||
Book 14 of raising water. | ||||
Book 15 of matters worn away by water. | ||||
921. | ||||
First you shall make a book treating of places occupied by fresh | ||||
waters, and the second by salt waters, and the third, how by the | ||||
disappearance of these, our parts of the world were made lighter and | ||||
in consequence more remote from the centre of the world. | ||||
922. | ||||
First write of all water, in each of its motions; then describe all | ||||
its bottoms and their various materials, always referring to the | ||||
propositions concerning the said waters; and let the order be good, | ||||
for otherwise the work will be confused. | ||||
Describe all the forms taken by water from its greatest to its | ||||
smallest wave, and their causes. | ||||
923. | ||||
Book 9, of accidental risings of water. | ||||
924. | ||||
THE ORDER OF THE BOOK. | ||||
Place at the beginning what a river can effect. | ||||
925. | ||||
A book of driving back armies by the force of a flood made by | ||||
releasing waters. | ||||
A book showing how the waters safely bring down timber cut in the | ||||
mountains. | ||||
A book of boats driven against the impetus of rivers. | ||||
A book of raising large bridges higher. Simply by the swelling of | ||||
the waters. | ||||
A book of guarding against the impetus of rivers so that towns may | ||||
not be damaged by them. | ||||
926. | ||||
A book of the ordering of rivers so as to preserve their banks. | ||||
A book of the mountains, which would stand forth and become land, if | ||||
our hemisphere were to be uncovered by the water. | ||||
A book of the earth carried down by the waters to fill up the great | ||||
abyss of the seas. | ||||
A book of the ways in which a tempest may of itself clear out filled | ||||
up sea-ports. | ||||
A book of the shores of rivers and of their permanency. | ||||
A book of how to deal with rivers, so that they may keep their | ||||
bottom scoured by their own flow near the cities they pass. | ||||
A book of how to make or to repair the foundations for bridges over | ||||
the rivers. | ||||
A book of the repairs which ought to be made in walls and banks of | ||||
rivers where the water strikes them. | ||||
A book of the formation of hills of sand or gravel at great depths | ||||
in water. | ||||
927. | ||||
Water gives the first impetus to its motion. | ||||
A book of the levelling of waters by various means, | ||||
A book of diverting rivers from places where they do mischief. | ||||
A book of guiding rivers which occupy too much ground. | ||||
A book of parting rivers into several branches and making them | ||||
fordable. | ||||
A book of the waters which with various currents pass through seas. | ||||
A book of deepening the beds of rivers by means of currents of | ||||
water. | ||||
A book of controlling rivers so that the little beginnings of | ||||
mischief, caused by them, may not increase. | ||||
A book of the various movements of waters passing through channels | ||||
of different forms. | ||||
A book of preventing small rivers from diverting the larger one into | ||||
which their waters run. | ||||
A book of the lowest level which can be found in the current of the | ||||
surface of rivers. | ||||
A book of the origin of rivers which flow from the high tops of | ||||
mountains. | ||||
A book of the various motions of waters in their rivers. | ||||
928. | ||||
[1] Of inequality in the concavity of a ship. [Footnote 1: The first | ||||
line of this passage was added subsequently, evidently as a | ||||
correction of the following line.] | ||||
[1] A book of the inequality in the curve of the sides of ships. | ||||
[1] A book of the inequality in the position of the tiller. | ||||
[1] A book of the inequality in the keel of ships. | ||||
[2] A book of various forms of apertures by which water flows out. | ||||
[3] A book of water contained in vessels with air, and of its | ||||
movements. | ||||
[4] A book of the motion of water through a syphon. [Footnote 7: | ||||
_cicognole_, see No. 966, 11, 17.] | ||||
[5] A book of the meetings and union of waters coming from different | ||||
directions. | ||||
[6] A book of the various forms of the banks through which rivers | ||||
pass. | ||||
[7] A book of the various forms of shoals formed under the sluices | ||||
of rivers. | ||||
[8] A book of the windings and meanderings of the currents of | ||||
rivers. | ||||
[9] A book of the various places whence the waters of rivers are | ||||
derived. | ||||
[10] A book of the configuration of the shores of rivers and of | ||||
their permanency. | ||||
[11] A book of the perpendicular fall of water on various objects. | ||||
[12] Abook of the course of water when it is impeded in various | ||||
places. | ||||
[12] A book of the various forms of the obstacles which impede the | ||||
course of waters. | ||||
[13] A book of the concavity and globosity formed round various | ||||
objects at the bottom. | ||||
[14] Abook of conducting navigable canals above or beneath the | ||||
rivers which intersect them. | ||||
[15] A book of the soils which absorb water in canals and of | ||||
repairing them. | ||||
[16] Abook of creating currents for rivers, which quit their beds, | ||||
[and] for rivers choked with soil. | ||||
General introduction. | ||||
929. | ||||
THE BEGINNING OF THE TREATISE ON WATER. | ||||
By the ancients man has been called the world in miniature; and | ||||
certainly this name is well bestowed, because, inasmuch as man is | ||||
composed of earth, water, air and fire, his body resembles that of | ||||
the earth; and as man has in him bones the supports and framework of | ||||
his flesh, the world has its rocks the supports of the earth; as man | ||||
has in him a pool of blood in which the lungs rise and fall in | ||||
breathing, so the body of the earth has its ocean tide which | ||||
likewise rises and falls every six hours, as if the world breathed; | ||||
as in that pool of blood veins have their origin, which ramify all | ||||
over the human body, so likewise the ocean sea fills the body of the | ||||
earth with infinite springs of water. The body of the earth lacks | ||||
sinews and this is, because the sinews are made expressely for | ||||
movements and, the world being perpetually stable, no movement takes | ||||
place, and no movement taking place, muscles are not necessary. | ||||
--But in all other points they are much alike. | ||||
I. | ||||
OF THE NATURE OF WATER. | ||||
The arrangement of Book I. | ||||
930. | ||||
THE ORDER OF THE FIRST BOOK ON WATER. | ||||
Define first what is meant by height and depth; also how the | ||||
elements are situated one inside another. Then, what is meant by | ||||
solid weight and by liquid weight; but first what weight and | ||||
lightness are in themselves. Then describe why water moves, and why | ||||
its motion ceases; then why it becomes slower or more rapid; besides | ||||
this, how it always falls, being in contact with the air but lower | ||||
than the air. And how water rises in the air by means of the heat of | ||||
the sun, and then falls again in rain; again, why water springs | ||||
forth from the tops of mountains; and if the water of any spring | ||||
higher than the ocean can pour forth water higher than the surface | ||||
of that ocean. And how all the water that returns to the ocean is | ||||
higher than the sphere of waters. And how the waters of the | ||||
equatorial seas are higher than the waters of the North, and higher | ||||
beneath the body of the sun than in any part of the equatorial | ||||
circle; for experiment shows that under the heat of a burning brand | ||||
the water near the brand boils, and the water surrounding this | ||||
ebullition always sinks with a circular eddy. And how the waters of | ||||
the North are lower than the other seas, and more so as they become | ||||
colder, until they are converted into ice. | ||||
Definitions (931. 932). | ||||
931. | ||||
OF WHAT IS WATER. | ||||
Among the four elements water is the second both in weight and in | ||||
instability. | ||||
932. | ||||
THE BEGINNING OF THE BOOK ON WATER. | ||||
Sea is the name given to that water which is wide and deep, in which | ||||
the waters have not much motion. | ||||
[Footnote: Only the beginning of this passage is here given, the | ||||
remainder consists of definitions which have no direct bearing on | ||||
the subject.] | ||||
Of the surface of the water in relation to the globe (933-936). | ||||
933. | ||||
The centres of the sphere of water are two, one universal and common | ||||
to all water, the other particular. The universal one is that which | ||||
is common to all waters not in motion, which exist in great | ||||
quantities. As canals, ditches, ponds, fountains, wells, dead | ||||
rivers, lakes, stagnant pools and seas, which, although they are at | ||||
various levels, have each in itself the limits of their superficies | ||||
equally distant from the centre of the earth, such as lakes placed | ||||
at the tops of high mountains; as the lake near Pietra Pana and the | ||||
lake of the Sybil near Norcia; and all the lakes that give rise to | ||||
great rivers, as the Ticino from Lago Maggiore, the Adda from the | ||||
lake of Como, the Mincio from the lake of Garda, the Rhine from the | ||||
lakes of Constance and of Chur, and from the lake of Lucerne, like | ||||
the Tigris which passes through Asia Minor carrying with it the | ||||
waters of three lakes, one above the other at different heights of | ||||
which the highest is Munace, the middle one Pallas, and the lowest | ||||
Triton; the Nile again flows from three very high lakes in Ethiopia. | ||||
[Footnote 5: _Pietra Pana_, a mountain near Florence. If for Norcia, | ||||
we may read Norchia, the remains of the Etruscan city near Viterbo, | ||||
there can be no doubt that by '_Lago della Sibilla_'--a name not | ||||
known elsewhere, so far as I can learn--Leonardo meant _Lago di | ||||
Vico_ (Lacus Ciminus, Aen. 7).] | ||||
934. | ||||
OF THE CENTRE OF THE OCEAN. | ||||
The centre of the sphere of waters is the true centre of the globe | ||||
of our world, which is composed of water and earth, having the shape | ||||
of a sphere. But, if you want to find the centre of the element of | ||||
the earth, this is placed at a point equidistant from the surface of | ||||
the ocean, and not equidistant from the surface of the earth; for it | ||||
is evident that this globe of earth has nowhere any perfect | ||||
rotundity, excepting in places where the sea is, or marshes or other | ||||
still waters. And every part of the earth that rises above the water | ||||
is farther from the centre. | ||||
935. | ||||
OF THE SEA WHICH CHANGES THE WEIGHT OF THE EARTH. | ||||
The shells, oysters, and other similar animals, which originate in | ||||
sea-mud, bear witness to the changes of the earth round the centre | ||||
of our elements. This is proved thus: Great rivers always run | ||||
turbid, being coloured by the earth, which is stirred by the | ||||
friction of their waters at the bottom and on their shores; and this | ||||
wearing disturbs the face of the strata made by the layers of | ||||
shells, which lie on the surface of the marine mud, and which were | ||||
produced there when the salt waters covered them; and these strata | ||||
were covered over again from time to time, with mud of various | ||||
thickness, or carried down to the sea by the rivers and floods of | ||||
more or less extent; and thus these layers of mud became raised to | ||||
such a height, that they came up from the bottom to the air. At the | ||||
present time these bottoms are so high that they form hills or high | ||||
mountains, and the rivers, which wear away the sides of these | ||||
mountains, uncover the strata of these shells, and thus the softened | ||||
side of the earth continually rises and the antipodes sink closer to | ||||
the centre of the earth, and the ancient bottoms of the seas have | ||||
become mountain ridges. | ||||
936. | ||||
Let the earth make whatever changes it may in its weight, the | ||||
surface of the sphere of waters can never vary in its equal distance | ||||
from the centre of the world. | ||||
Of the proportion of the mass of water to that of the earth (937. | ||||
938). | ||||
937. | ||||
WHETHER THE EARTH IS LESS THAN THE WATER. | ||||
Some assert that it is true that the earth, which is not covered by | ||||
water is much less than that covered by water. But considering the | ||||
size of 7000 miles in diameter which is that of this earth, we may | ||||
conclude the water to be of small depth. | ||||
938. | ||||
OF THE EARTH. | ||||
The great elevations of the peaks of the mountains above the sphere | ||||
of the water may have resulted from this that: a very large portion | ||||
of the earth which was filled with water that is to say the vast | ||||
cavern inside the earth may have fallen in a vast part of its vault | ||||
towards the centre of the earth, being pierced by means of the | ||||
course of the springs which continually wear away the place where | ||||
they pass. | ||||
Sinking in of countries like the Dead Sea in Syria, that is Sodom | ||||
and Gomorrah. | ||||
It is of necessity that there should be more water than land, and | ||||
the visible portion of the sea does not show this; so that there | ||||
must be a great deal of water inside the earth, besides that which | ||||
rises into the lower air and which flows through rivers and springs. | ||||
[Footnote: The small sketch below on the left, is placed in the | ||||
original close to the text referring to the Dead Sea.] | ||||
The theory of Plato. | ||||
939. | ||||
THE FIGURES OF THE ELEMENTS. | ||||
Of the figures of the elements; and first as against those who deny | ||||
the opinions of Plato, and who say that if the elements include one | ||||
another in the forms attributed to them by Plato they would cause a | ||||
vacuum one within the other. I say it is not true, and I here prove | ||||
it, but first I desire to propound some conclusions. It is not | ||||
necessary that the elements which include each other should be of | ||||
corresponding magnitude in all the parts, of that which includes and | ||||
of that which is included. We see that the sphere of the waters | ||||
varies conspicuously in mass from the surface to the bottom, and | ||||
that, far from investing the earth when that was in the form of a | ||||
cube that is of 8 angles as Plato will have it, that it invests the | ||||
earth which has innumerable angles of rock covered by the water and | ||||
various prominences and concavities, and yet no vacuum is generated | ||||
between the earth and water; again, the air invests the sphere of | ||||
waters together with the mountains and valleys, which rise above | ||||
that sphere, and no vacuum remains between the earth and the air, so | ||||
that any one who says a vacuum is generated, speaks foolishly. | ||||
But to Plato I would reply that the surface of the figures which | ||||
according to him the elements would have, could not exist. | ||||
That the flow of rivers proves the slope of the land. | ||||
940. | ||||
PROVES HOW THE EARTH IS NOT GLOBULAR AND NOT BEING GLOBULAR CANNOT | ||||
HAVE A COMMON CENTRE. | ||||
We see the Nile come from Southern regions and traverse various | ||||
provinces, running towards the North for a distance of 3000 miles | ||||
and flow into the Mediterranean by the shores of Egypt; and if we | ||||
will give to this a fall of ten braccia a mile, as is usually | ||||
allowed to the course of rivers in general, we shall find that the | ||||
Nile must have its mouth ten miles lower than its source. Again, we | ||||
see the Rhine, the Rhone and the Danube starting from the German | ||||
parts, almost the centre of Europe, and having a course one to the | ||||
East, the other to the North, and the last to Southern seas. And if | ||||
you consider all this you will see that the plains of Europe in | ||||
their aggregate are much higher than the high peaks of the maritime | ||||
mountains; think then how much their tops must be above the sea | ||||
shores. | ||||
Theory of the elevation of water within the mountains. | ||||
941. | ||||
OF THE HEAT THAT IS IN THE WORLD. | ||||
Where there is life there is heat, and where vital heat is, there is | ||||
movement of vapour. This is proved, inasmuch as we see that the | ||||
element of fire by its heat always draws to itself damp vapours and | ||||
thick mists as opaque clouds, which it raises from seas as well as | ||||
lakes and rivers and damp valleys; and these being drawn by degrees | ||||
as far as the cold region, the first portion stops, because heat and | ||||
moisture cannot exist with cold and dryness; and where the first | ||||
portion stops the rest settle, and thus one portion after another | ||||
being added, thick and dark clouds are formed. They are often wafted | ||||
about and borne by the winds from one region to another, where by | ||||
their density they become so heavy that they fall in thick rain; and | ||||
if the heat of the sun is added to the power of the element of fire, | ||||
the clouds are drawn up higher still and find a greater degree of | ||||
cold, in which they form ice and fall in storms of hail. Now the | ||||
same heat which holds up so great a weight of water as is seen to | ||||
rain from the clouds, draws them from below upwards, from the foot | ||||
of the mountains, and leads and holds them within the summits of the | ||||
mountains, and these, finding some fissure, issue continuously and | ||||
cause rivers. | ||||
The relative height of the surface of the sea to that of the land | ||||
(942-945). | ||||
942. | ||||
OF THE SEA, WHICH TO MANY FOOLS APPEARS TO BE HIGHER THAN THE EARTH | ||||
WHICH FORMS ITS SHORE. | ||||
_b d_ is a plain through which a river flows to the sea; this plain | ||||
ends at the sea, and since in fact the dry land that is uncovered is | ||||
not perfectly level--for, if it were, the river would have no | ||||
motion--as the river does move, this place is a slope rather than a | ||||
plain; hence this plain _d b_ so ends where the sphere of water | ||||
begins that if it were extended in a continuous line to _b a_ it | ||||
would go down beneath the sea, whence it follows that the sea _a c | ||||
b_ looks higher than the dry land. | ||||
Obviously no portions of dry land left uncovered by water can ever | ||||
be lower than the surface of the watery sphere. | ||||
943. | ||||
OF CERTAIN PERSONS WHO SAY THE WATERS WERE HIGHER THAN THE DRY LAND. | ||||
Certainly I wonder not a little at the common opinion which is | ||||
contrary to truth, but held by the universal consent of the judgment | ||||
of men. And this is that all are agreed that the surface of the sea | ||||
is higher than the highest peaks of the mountains; and they allege | ||||
many vain and childish reasons, against which I will allege only one | ||||
simple and short reason; We see plainly that if we could remove the | ||||
shores of the sea, it would invest the whole earth and make it a | ||||
perfect sphere. Now, consider how much earth would be carried away | ||||
to enable the waves of the sea to cover the world; therefore that | ||||
which would be carried away must be higher than the sea-shore. | ||||
944. | ||||
THE OPINION OF SOME PERSONS WHO SAY THAT THE WATER OF SOME SEAS IS | ||||
HIGHER THAN THE HIGHEST SUMMITS OF MOUNTAINS; AND NEVERTHELESS THE | ||||
WATER WAS FORCED UP TO THESE SUMMITS. | ||||
Water would not move from place to place if it were not that it | ||||
seeks the lowest level and by a natural consequence it never can | ||||
return to a height like that of the place where it first on issuing | ||||
from the mountain came to light. And that portion of the sea which, | ||||
in your vain imagining, you say was so high that it flowed over the | ||||
summits of the high mountains, for so many centuries would be | ||||
swallowed up and poured out again through the issue from these | ||||
mountains. You can well imagine that all the time that Tigris and | ||||
Euphrates | ||||
945. | ||||
have flowed from the summits of the mountains of Armenia, it must be | ||||
believed that all the water of the ocean has passed very many times | ||||
through these mouths. And do you not believe that the Nile must have | ||||
sent more water into the sea than at present exists of all the | ||||
element of water? Undoubtedly, yes. And if all this water had fallen | ||||
away from this body of the earth, this terrestrial machine would | ||||
long since have been without water. Whence we may conclude that the | ||||
water goes from the rivers to the sea, and from the sea to the | ||||
rivers, thus constantly circulating and returning, and that all the | ||||
sea and the rivers have passed through the mouth of the Nile an | ||||
infinite number of times [Footnote: _Moti Armeni, Ermini_ in the | ||||
original, in M. RAVAISSON'S transcript _"monti ernini [le loro | ||||
ruine?]"_. He renders this _"Le Tigre et l'Euphrate se sont deverses | ||||
par les sommets des montagnes [avec leurs eaux destructives?] on | ||||
pent cro're" &c. Leonardo always writes _Ermini, Erminia_, for | ||||
_Armeni, Armenia_ (Arabic: _Irminiah_). M. RAVAISSON also deviates | ||||
from the original in his translation of the following passage: "_Or | ||||
tu ne crois pas que le Nil ait mis plus d'eau dans la mer qu'il n'y | ||||
en a a present dans tout l'element de l'eau. Il est certain que si | ||||
cette eau etait tombee_" &c.] | ||||
II. | ||||
ON THE OCEAN. | ||||
Refutation of Pliny's theory as to the saltness of the sea (946. | ||||
947). | ||||
946. | ||||
WHY WATER IS SALT. | ||||
Pliny says in his second book, chapter 103, that the water of the | ||||
sea is salt because the heat of the sun dries up the moisture and | ||||
drinks it up; and this gives to the wide stretching sea the savour | ||||
of salt. But this cannot be admitted, because if the saltness of the | ||||
sea were caused by the heat of the sun, there can be no doubt that | ||||
lakes, pools and marshes would be so much the more salt, as their | ||||
waters have less motion and are of less depth; but experience shows | ||||
us, on the contrary, that these lakes have their waters quite free | ||||
from salt. Again it is stated by Pliny in the same chapter that this | ||||
saltness might originate, because all the sweet and subtle portions | ||||
which the heat attracts easily being taken away, the more bitter and | ||||
coarser part will remain, and thus the water on the surface is | ||||
fresher than at the bottom [Footnote 22: Compare No. 948.]; but this | ||||
is contradicted by the same reason given above, which is, that the | ||||
same thing would happen in marshes and other waters, which are dried | ||||
up by the heat. Again, it has been said that the saltness of the sea | ||||
is the sweat of the earth; to this it may be answered that all the | ||||
springs of water which penetrate through the earth, would then be | ||||
salt. But the conclusion is, that the saltness of the sea must | ||||
proceed from the many springs of water which, as they penetrate into | ||||
the earth, find mines of salt and these they dissolve in part, and | ||||
carry with them to the ocean and the other seas, whence the clouds, | ||||
the begetters of rivers, never carry it up. And the sea would be | ||||
salter in our times than ever it was at any time; and if the | ||||
adversary were to say that in infinite time the sea would dry up or | ||||
congeal into salt, to this I answer that this salt is restored to | ||||
the earth by the setting free of that part of the earth which rises | ||||
out of the sea with the salt it has acquired, and the rivers return | ||||
it to the earth under the sea. | ||||
[Footnote: See PLINY, Hist. Nat. II, CIII [C]. _Itaque Solis ardore | ||||
siccatur liquor: et hoc esse masculum sidus accepimus, torrens | ||||
cuncta sorbensque._ (cp. CIV.) _Sic mari late patenti saporem | ||||
incoqui salis, aut quia exhausto inde dulci tenuique, quod facillime | ||||
trahat vis ignea, omne asperius crassiusque linquatur: ideo summa | ||||
aequorum aqua dulciorem profundam; hanc esse veriorem causam, quam | ||||
quod mare terrae sudor sit aeternus: aut quia plurimum ex arido | ||||
misceatur illi vapore: aut quia terrae natura sicut medicatas aquas | ||||
inficiat_ ... (cp. CV): _altissimum mare XV. stadiorum Fabianus | ||||
tradit. Alii n Ponto coadverso Coraxorum gentis (vocant B Ponti) | ||||
trecentis fere a continenti stadiis immensam altitudinem maris | ||||
tradunt, vadis nunquam repertis._ (cp. CVI [CIII]) _Mirabilius id | ||||
faciunt aquae dulces, juxta mare, ut fistulis emicantes. Nam nec | ||||
aquarum natura a miraculis cessat. Dulces mari invehuntur, leviores | ||||
haud dubie. Ideo et marinae, quarum natura gravior, magis invecta | ||||
sustinent. Quaedam vero et dulces inter se supermeant alias._] | ||||
947. | ||||
For the third and last reason we will say that salt is in all | ||||
created things; and this we learn from water passed over the ashes | ||||
and cinders of burnt things; and the urine of every animal, and the | ||||
superfluities issuing from their bodies, and the earth into which | ||||
all things are converted by corruption. | ||||
But,--to put it better,--given that the world is everlasting, it | ||||
must be admitted that its population will also be eternal; hence the | ||||
human species has eternally been and would be consumers of salt; and | ||||
if all the mass of the earth were to be turned into salt, it would | ||||
not suffice for all human food [Footnote 27: That is, on the | ||||
supposition that salt, once consumed, disappears for ever.]; whence | ||||
we are forced to admit, either that the species of salt must be | ||||
everlasting like the world, or that it dies and is born again like | ||||
the men who devour it. But as experience teaches us that it does not | ||||
die, as is evident by fire, which does not consume it, and by water | ||||
which becomes salt in proportion to the quantity dissolved in | ||||
it,--and when it is evaporated the salt always remains in the | ||||
original quantity--it must pass through the bodies of men either in | ||||
the urine or the sweat or other excretions where it is found again; | ||||
and as much salt is thus got rid of as is carried every year into | ||||
towns; therefore salt is dug in places where there is urine.-- Sea | ||||
hogs and sea winds are salt. | ||||
We will say that the rains which penetrate the earth are what is | ||||
under the foundations of cities with their inhabitants, and are what | ||||
restore through the internal passages of the earth the saltness | ||||
taken from the sea; and that the change in the place of the sea, | ||||
which has been over all the mountains, caused it to be left there in | ||||
the mines found in those mountains, &c. | ||||
The characteristics of sea water (948. 949). | ||||
948. | ||||
The waters of the salt sea are fresh at the greatest depths. | ||||
949. | ||||
THAT THE OCEAN DOES NOT PENETRATE UNDER THE EARTH. | ||||
The ocean does not penetrate under the earth, and this we learn from | ||||
the many and various springs of fresh water which, in many parts of | ||||
the ocean make their way up from the bottom to the surface. The same | ||||
thing is farther proved by wells dug beyond the distance of a mile | ||||
from the said ocean, which fill with fresh water; and this happens | ||||
because the fresh water is lighter than salt water and consequently | ||||
more penetrating. | ||||
Which weighs most, water when frozen or when not frozen? | ||||
FRESH WATER PENETRATES MORE AGAINST SALT WATER THAN SALT WATER | ||||
AGAINST FRESH WATER. | ||||
That fresh water penetrates more against salt water, than salt water | ||||
against fresh is proved by a thin cloth dry and old, hanging with | ||||
the two opposite ends equally low in the two different waters, the | ||||
surfaces of which are at an equal level; and it will then be seen | ||||
how much higher the fresh water will rise in this piece of linen | ||||
than the salt; by so much is the fresh lighter than the salt. | ||||
On the formation of Gulfs (950. 951). | ||||
950. | ||||
All inland seas and the gulfs of those seas, are made by rivers | ||||
which flow into the sea. | ||||
951. | ||||
HERE THE REASON IS GIVEN OF THE EFFECTS PRODUCED BY THE WATERS IN | ||||
THE ABOVE MENTIONED PLACE. | ||||
All the lakes and all the gulfs of the sea and all inland seas are | ||||
due to rivers which distribute their waters into them, and from | ||||
impediments in their downfall into the Mediterranean --which divides | ||||
Africa from Europe and Europe from Asia by means of the Nile and the | ||||
Don which pour their waters into it. It is asked what impediment is | ||||
great enough to stop the course of the waters which do not reach the | ||||
ocean. | ||||
On the encroachments of the sea on the land and vice versa | ||||
(952-954). | ||||
952. | ||||
OF WAVES. | ||||
A wave of the sea always breaks in front of its base, and that | ||||
portion of the crest will then be lowest which before was highest. | ||||
[Footnote: The page of FRANCESCO DI GIORGIO'S _Trattato_, on which | ||||
Leonardo has written this remark, contains some notes on the | ||||
construction of dams, harbours &c.] | ||||
953. | ||||
That the shores of the sea constantly acquire more soil towards the | ||||
middle of the sea; that the rocks and promontories of the sea are | ||||
constantly being ruined and worn away; that the Mediterranean seas | ||||
will in time discover their bottom to the air, and all that will be | ||||
left will be the channel of the greatest river that enters it; and | ||||
this will run to the ocean and pour its waters into that with those | ||||
of all the rivers that are its tributaries. | ||||
954. | ||||
How the river Po, in a short time might dry up the Adriatic sea in | ||||
the same way as it has dried up a large part of Lombardy. | ||||
The ebb and flow of the tide (955-960). | ||||
955. | ||||
Where there is a larger quantity of water, there is a greater flow | ||||
and ebb, but the contrary in narrow waters. | ||||
Look whether the sea is at its greatest flow when the moon is half | ||||
way over our hemisphere [on the meridian]. | ||||
956. | ||||
Whether the flow and ebb are caused by the moon or the sun, or are | ||||
the breathing of this terrestrial machine. That the flow and ebb are | ||||
different in different countries and seas. | ||||
[Footnote: 1. Allusion may here be made to the mythological | ||||
explanation of the ebb and flow given in the Edda. Utgardloki says | ||||
to Thor (Gylfaginning 48): "When thou wert drinking out of the horn, | ||||
and it seemed to thee that it was slow in emptying a wonder befell, | ||||
which I should not have believed possible: the other end of the horn | ||||
lay in the sea, which thou sawest not; but when thou shalt go to the | ||||
sea, thou shalt see how much thou hast drunk out of it. And that men | ||||
now call the ebb tide." | ||||
Several passages in various manuscripts treat of the ebb and flow. | ||||
In collecting them I have been guided by the rule only to transcribe | ||||
those which named some particular spot.] | ||||
957. | ||||
Book 9 of the meeting of rivers and their flow and ebb. The cause is | ||||
the same in the sea, where it is caused by the straits of Gibraltar. | ||||
And again it is caused by whirlpools. | ||||
958. | ||||
OF THE FLOW AND EBB. | ||||
All seas have their flow and ebb in the same period, but they seem | ||||
to vary because the days do not begin at the same time throughout | ||||
the universe; in such wise as that when it is midday in our | ||||
hemisphere, it is midnight in the opposite hemisphere; and at the | ||||
Eastern boundary of the two hemispheres the night begins which | ||||
follows on the day, and at the Western boundary of these hemispheres | ||||
begins the day, which follows the night from the opposite side. | ||||
Hence it is to be inferred that the above mentioned swelling and | ||||
diminution in the height of the seas, although they take place in | ||||
one and the same space of time, are seen to vary from the above | ||||
mentioned causes. The waters are then withdrawn into the fissures | ||||
which start from the depths of the sea and which ramify inside the | ||||
body of the earth, corresponding to the sources of rivers, which are | ||||
constantly taking from the bottom of the sea the water which has | ||||
flowed into it. A sea of water is incessantly being drawn off from | ||||
the surface of the sea. And if you should think that the moon, | ||||
rising at the Eastern end of the Mediterranean sea must there begin | ||||
to attract to herself the waters of the sea, it would follow that we | ||||
must at once see the effect of it at the Eastern end of that sea. | ||||
Again, as the Mediterranean sea is about the eighth part of the | ||||
circumference of the aqueous sphere, being 3000 miles long, while | ||||
the flow and ebb only occur 4 times in 24 hours, these results would | ||||
not agree with the time of 24 hours, unless this Mediterranean sea | ||||
were six thousand miles in length; because if such a superabundance | ||||
of water had to pass through the straits of Gibraltar in running | ||||
behind the moon, the rush of the water through that strait would be | ||||
so great, and would rise to such a height, that beyond the straits | ||||
it would for many miles rush so violently into the ocean as to cause | ||||
floods and tremendous seething, so that it would be impossible to | ||||
pass through. This agitated ocean would afterwards return the waters | ||||
it had received with equal fury to the place they had come from, so | ||||
that no one ever could pass through those straits. Now experience | ||||
shows that at every hour they are passed in safety, but when the | ||||
wind sets in the same direction as the current, the strong ebb | ||||
increases [Footnote 23: In attempting to get out of the | ||||
Mediterranean, vessels are sometimes detained for a considerable | ||||
time; not merely by the causes mentioned by Leonardo but by the | ||||
constant current flowing eastwards through the middle of the straits | ||||
of Gibraltar.]. The sea does not raise the water that has issued | ||||
from the straits, but it checks them and this retards the tide; then | ||||
it makes up with furious haste for the time it has lost until the | ||||
end of the ebb movement. | ||||
959. | ||||
That the flow and ebb are not general; for on the shore at Genoa | ||||
there is none, at Venice two braccia, between England and Flanders | ||||
18 braccia. That in the straits of Sicily the current is very strong | ||||
because all the waters from the rivers that flow into the Adriatic | ||||
pass there. | ||||
[Footnote: A few more recent data may be given here to facilitate | ||||
comparison. In the Adriatic the tide rises 2 and 1/2 feet, at | ||||
Terracina 1 1/4. In the English channel between Calais and Kent it | ||||
rises from 18 to 20 feet. In the straits of Messina it rises no more | ||||
than 2 1/2 feet, and that only in stormy weather, but the current is | ||||
all the stronger. When Leonardo accounts for this by the southward | ||||
flow of all the Italian rivers along the coasts, the explanation is | ||||
at least based on a correct observation; namely that a steady | ||||
current flows southwards along the coast of Calabria and another | ||||
northwards, along the shores of Sicily; he seems to infer, from the | ||||
direction of the fust, that the tide in the Adriatic is caused by | ||||
it.] | ||||
960. | ||||
In the West, near to Flanders, the sea rises and decreases every 6 | ||||
hours about 20 braccia, and 22 when the moon is in its favour; but | ||||
20 braccia is the general rule, and this rule, as it is evident, | ||||
cannot have the moon for its cause. This variation in the increase | ||||
and decrease of the sea every 6 hours may arise from the damming up | ||||
of the waters, which are poured into the Mediterranean by the | ||||
quantity of rivers from Africa, Asia and Europe, which flow into | ||||
that sea, and the waters which are given to it by those rivers; it | ||||
pours them to the ocean through the straits of Gibraltar, between | ||||
Abila and Calpe [Footnote 5: _Abila_, Lat. _Abyla_, Gr. , now | ||||
Sierra _Ximiera_ near Ceuta; _Calpe_, Lat. _Calpe_. Gr., now | ||||
Gibraltar. Leonardo here uses the ancient names of the rocks, which | ||||
were known as the Pillars of Hercules.]. That ocean extends to the | ||||
island of England and others farther North, and it becomes dammed up | ||||
and kept high in various gulfs. These, being seas of which the | ||||
surface is remote from the centre of the earth, have acquired a | ||||
weight, which as it is greater than the force of the incoming waters | ||||
which cause it, gives this water an impetus in the contrary | ||||
direction to that in which it came and it is borne back to meet the | ||||
waters coming out of the straits; and this it does most against the | ||||
straits of Gibraltar; these, so long as this goes on, remain dammed | ||||
up and all the water which is poured out meanwhile by the | ||||
aforementioned rivers, is pent up [in the Mediterranean]; and this | ||||
might be assigned as the cause of its flow and ebb, as is shown in | ||||
the 21st of the 4th of my theory. | ||||
III. | ||||
SUBTERRANEAN WATER COURSES. | ||||
Theory of the circulation of the waters (961. 962). | ||||
961. | ||||
Very large rivers flow under ground. | ||||
962. | ||||
This is meant to represent the earth cut through in the middle, | ||||
showing the depths of the sea and of the earth; the waters start | ||||
from the bottom of the seas, and ramifying through the earth they | ||||
rise to the summits of the mountains, flowing back by the rivers and | ||||
returning to the sea. | ||||
Observations in support of the hypothesis (963-969). | ||||
963. | ||||
The waters circulate with constant motion from the utmost depths of | ||||
the sea to the highest summits of the mountains, not obeying the | ||||
nature of heavy matter; and in this case it acts as does the blood | ||||
of animals which is always moving from the sea of the heart and | ||||
flows to the top of their heads; and here it is that veins burst--as | ||||
one may see when a vein bursts in the nose, that all the blood from | ||||
below rises to the level of the burst vein. When the water rushes | ||||
out of a burst vein in the earth it obeys the nature of other things | ||||
heavier than the air, whence it always seeks the lowest places. [7] | ||||
These waters traverse the body of the earth with infinite | ||||
ramifications. | ||||
[Footnote: The greater part of this passage has been given as No. | ||||
849 in the section on Anatomy.] | ||||
964. | ||||
The same cause which stirs the humours in every species of animal | ||||
body and by which every injury is repaired, also moves the waters | ||||
from the utmost depth of the sea to the greatest heights. | ||||
965. | ||||
It is the property of water that it constitutes the vital human of | ||||
this arid earth; and the cause which moves it through its ramified | ||||
veins, against the natural course of heavy matters, is the same | ||||
property which moves the humours in every species of animal body. | ||||
But that which crowns our wonder in contemplating it is, that it | ||||
rises from the utmost depths of the sea to the highest tops of the | ||||
mountains, and flowing from the opened veins returns to the low | ||||
seas; then once more, and with extreme swiftness, it mounts again | ||||
and returns by the same descent, thus rising from the inside to the | ||||
outside, and going round from the lowest to the highest, from whence | ||||
it rushes down in a natural course. Thus by these two movements | ||||
combined in a constant circulation, it travels through the veins of | ||||
the earth. | ||||
966. | ||||
WHETHER WATER RISES FROM THE SEA TO THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. | ||||
The water of the ocean cannot make its way from the bases to the | ||||
tops of the mountains which bound it, but only so much rises as the | ||||
dryness of the mountain attracts. And if, on the contrary, the rain, | ||||
which penetrates from the summit of the mountain to the base, which | ||||
is the boundary of the sea, descends and softens the slope opposite | ||||
to the said mountain and constantly draws the water, like a syphon | ||||
[Footnote 11: Cicognola, Syphon. See Vol. I, Pl. XXIV, No. 1.] which | ||||
pours through its longest side, it must be this which draws up the | ||||
water of the sea; thus if _s n_ were the surface of the sea, and the | ||||
rain descends from the top of the mountain _a_ to _n_ on one side, | ||||
and on the other sides it descends from _a_ to _m_, without a doubt | ||||
this would occur after the manner of distilling through felt, or as | ||||
happens through the tubes called syphons [Footnote 17: Cicognola, | ||||
Syphon. See Vol. I, Pl. XXIV, No. 1.]. And at all times the water | ||||
which has softened the mountain, by the great rain which runs down | ||||
the two opposite sides, would constantly attract the rain _a n_, on | ||||
its longest side together with the water from the sea, if that side | ||||
of the mountain _a m_ were longer than the other _a n_; but this | ||||
cannot be, because no part of the earth which is not submerged by | ||||
the ocean can be lower than that ocean. | ||||
967. | ||||
OF SPRINGS OF WATER ON THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. | ||||
It is quite evident that the whole surface of the ocean--when there | ||||
is no storm--is at an equal distance from the centre of the earth, | ||||
and that the tops of the mountains are farther from this centre in | ||||
proportion as they rise above the surface of that sea; therefore if | ||||
the body of the earth were not like that of man, it would be | ||||
impossible that the waters of the sea--being so much lower than the | ||||
mountains--could by their nature rise up to the summits of these | ||||
mountains. Hence it is to be believed that the same cause which | ||||
keeps the blood at the top of the head in man keeps the water at the | ||||
summits of the mountains. | ||||
[Footnote: This conception of the rising of the blood, which has | ||||
given rise to the comparison, was recognised as erroneous by | ||||
Leonardo himself at a later period. It must be remembered that the | ||||
MS. A, from which these passages are taken, was written about twenty | ||||
years earlier than the MS. Leic. (Nos. 963 and 849) and twenty-five | ||||
years before the MS. W. An. IV. | ||||
There is, in the original a sketch with No. 968 which is not | ||||
reproduced. It represents a hill of the same shape as that shown at | ||||
No. 982. There are veins, or branched streams, on the side of the | ||||
hill, like those on the skull Pl. CVIII, No. 4] | ||||
968. | ||||
IN CONFIRMATION OF WHY THE WATER GOES TO THE TOPS OF MOUNTAINS. | ||||
I say that just as the natural heat of the blood in the veins keeps | ||||
it in the head of man,--for when the man is dead the cold blood | ||||
sinks to the lower parts--and when the sun is hot on the head of a | ||||
man the blood increases and rises so much, with other humours, that | ||||
by pressure in the veins pains in the head are often caused; in the | ||||
same way veins ramify through the body of the earth, and by the | ||||
natural heat which is distributed throughout the containing body, | ||||
the water is raised through the veins to the tops of mountains. And | ||||
this water, which passes through a closed conduit inside the body of | ||||
the mountain like a dead thing, cannot come forth from its low place | ||||
unless it is warmed by the vital heat of the spring time. Again, the | ||||
heat of the element of fire and, by day, the heat of the sun, have | ||||
power to draw forth the moisture of the low parts of the mountains | ||||
and to draw them up, in the same way as it draws the clouds and | ||||
collects their moisture from the bed of the sea. | ||||
969. | ||||
That many springs of salt water are found at great distances from | ||||
the sea; this might happen because such springs pass through some | ||||
mine of salt, like that in Hungary where salt is hewn out of vast | ||||
caverns, just as stone is hewn. | ||||
[Footnote: The great mine of Wieliczka in Galicia, out of which a | ||||
million cwt. of rock-salt are annually dug out, extends for 3000 | ||||
metres from West to East, and 1150 metres from North to South.] | ||||
IV. | ||||
OF RIVERS. | ||||
On the way in which the sources of rivers are fed. | ||||
970. | ||||
OF THE ORIGIN OF RIVERS. | ||||
The body of the earth, like the bodies of animals, is intersected | ||||
with ramifications of waters which are all in connection and are | ||||
constituted to give nutriment and life to the earth and to its | ||||
creatures. These come from the depth of the sea and, after many | ||||
revolutions, have to return to it by the rivers created by the | ||||
bursting of these springs; and if you chose to say that the rains of | ||||
the winter or the melting of the snows in summer were the cause of | ||||
the birth of rivers, I could mention the rivers which originate in | ||||
the torrid countries of Africa, where it never rains--and still less | ||||
snows--because the intense heat always melts into air all the clouds | ||||
which are borne thither by the winds. And if you chose to say that | ||||
such rivers, as increase in July and August, come from the snows | ||||
which melt in May and June from the sun's approach to the snows on | ||||
the mountains of Scythia [Footnote 9: Scythia means here, as in | ||||
Ancient Geography, the whole of the Northern part of Asia as far as | ||||
India.], and that such meltings come down into certain valleys and | ||||
form lakes, into which they enter by springs and subterranean caves | ||||
to issue forth again at the sources of the Nile, this is false; | ||||
because Scythia is lower than the sources of the Nile, and, besides, | ||||
Scythia is only 400 miles from the Black sea and the sources of the | ||||
Nile are 3000 miles distant from the sea of Egypt into which its | ||||
waters flow. | ||||
The tide in estuaries. | ||||
971. | ||||
Book 9, of the meeting of rivers and of their ebb and flow. The | ||||
cause is the same in the sea, where it is caused by the straits of | ||||
Gibraltar; and again it is caused by whirlpools. | ||||
[3] If two rivers meet together to form a straight line, and then | ||||
below two right angles take their course together, the flow and ebb | ||||
will happen now in one river and now in the other above their | ||||
confluence, and principally if the outlet for their united volume is | ||||
no swifter than when they were separate. Here occur 4 instances. | ||||
[Footnote: The first two lines of this passage have already been | ||||
given as No. 957. In the margin, near line 3 of this passage, the | ||||
text given as No. 919 is written.] | ||||
On the alterations, caused in the courses of rivers by their | ||||
confluence (972-974). | ||||
972. | ||||
When a smaller river pours its waters into a larger one, and that | ||||
larger one flows from the opposite direction, the course of the | ||||
smaller river will bend up against the approach of the larger river; | ||||
and this happens because, when the larger river fills up all its bed | ||||
with water, it makes an eddy in front of the mouth of the other | ||||
river, and so carries the water poured in by the smaller river with | ||||
its own. When the smaller river pours its waters into the larger | ||||
one, which runs across the current at the mouth of the smaller | ||||
river, its waters will bend with the downward movement of the larger | ||||
river. [Footnote: In the original sketches the word _Arno_ is | ||||
written at the spot here marked _A_, at _R. Rifredi_, and at _M. | ||||
Mugnone_.] | ||||
973. | ||||
When the fulness of rivers is diminished, then the acute angles | ||||
formed at the junction of their branches become shorter at the sides | ||||
and wider at the point; like the current _a n_ and the current _d | ||||
n_, which unite in _n_ when the river is at its greatest fulness. I | ||||
say, that when it is in this condition if, before the fullest time, | ||||
_d n_ was lower than _a n_, at the time of fulness _d n_ will be | ||||
full of sand and mud. When the water _d n_ falls, it will carry away | ||||
the mud and remain with a lower bottom, and the channel _a n_ | ||||
finding itself the higher, will fling its waters into the lower, _d | ||||
n_, and will wash away all the point of the sand-spit _b n c_, and | ||||
thus the angle _a c d_ will remain larger than the angle _a n d_ and | ||||
the sides shorter, as I said before. | ||||
[Footnote: Above the first sketch we find, in the original, this | ||||
note: "_Sopra il pote rubaconte alla torricella_"; and by the | ||||
second, which represents a pier of a bridge, "_Sotto l'ospedal del | ||||
ceppo._"] | ||||
974. | ||||
WATER. | ||||
OF THE MOVEMENT OF A SUDDEN RUSH MADE BY A RIVER IN ITS BED | ||||
PREVIOUSLY DRY. | ||||
In proportion as the current of the water given forth by the | ||||
draining of the lake is slow or rapid in the dry river bed, so will | ||||
this river be wider or narrower, or shallower or deeper in one place | ||||
than another, according to this proposition: the flow and ebb of the | ||||
sea which enters the Mediterranean from the ocean, and of the rivers | ||||
which meet and struggle with it, will raise their waters more or | ||||
less in proportion as the sea is wider or narrower. | ||||
[Footnote: In the margin is a sketch of a river which winds so as to | ||||
form islands.] | ||||
Whirlpools. | ||||
975. | ||||
Whirlpools, that is to say caverns; that is to say places left by | ||||
precipitated waters. | ||||
On the alterations in the channels of rivers. | ||||
976. | ||||
OF THE VIBRATION OF THE EARTH. | ||||
The subterranean channels of waters, like those which exist between | ||||
the air and the earth, are those which unceasingly wear away and | ||||
deepen the beds of their currents. | ||||
The origin of the sand in rivers (977. 978). | ||||
977. | ||||
A river that flows from mountains deposits a great quantity of large | ||||
stones in its bed, which still have some of their angles and sides, | ||||
and in the course of its flow it carries down smaller stones with | ||||
the angles more worn; that is to say the large stones become | ||||
smaller. And farther on it deposits coarse gravel and then smaller, | ||||
and as it proceeds this becomes coarse sand and then finer, and | ||||
going on thus the water, turbid with sand and gravel, joins the sea; | ||||
and the sand settles on the sea-shores, being cast up by the salt | ||||
waves; and there results the sand of so fine a nature as to seem | ||||
almost like water, and it will not stop on the shores of the sea but | ||||
returns by reason of its lightness, because it was originally formed | ||||
of rotten leaves and other very light things. Still, being | ||||
almost--as was said--of the nature of water itself, it afterwards, | ||||
when the weather is calm, settles and becomes solid at the bottom of | ||||
the sea, where by its fineness it becomes compact and by its | ||||
smoothness resists the waves which glide over it; and in this shells | ||||
are found; and this is white earth, fit for pottery. | ||||
978. | ||||
All the torrents of water flowing from the mountains to the sea | ||||
carry with them the stones from the hills to the sea, and by the | ||||
influx of the sea-water towards the mountains; these stones were | ||||
thrown back towards the mountains, and as the waters rose and | ||||
retired, the stones were tossed about by it and in rolling, their | ||||
angles hit together; then as the parts, which least resisted the | ||||
blows, were worn off, the stones ceased to be angular and became | ||||
round in form, as may be seen on the banks of the Elsa. And those | ||||
remained larger which were less removed from their native spot; and | ||||
they became smaller, the farther they were carried from that place, | ||||
so that in the process they were converted into small pebbles and | ||||
then into sand and at last into mud. After the sea had receded from | ||||
the mountains the brine left by the sea with other humours of the | ||||
earth made a concretion of these pebbles and this sand, so that the | ||||
pebbles were converted into rock and the sand into tufa. And of this | ||||
we see an example in the Adda where it issues from the mountains of | ||||
Como and in the Ticino, the Adige and the Oglio coming from the | ||||
German Alps, and in the Arno at Monte Albano [Footnote 13: At the | ||||
foot of _Monte Albano_ lies Vinci, the birth place of Leonardo. | ||||
Opposite, on the other bank of the Arno, is _Monte Lupo_.], near | ||||
Monte Lupo and Capraia where the rocks, which are very large, are | ||||
all of conglomerated pebbles of various kinds and colours. | ||||
V. | ||||
ON MOUNTAINS. | ||||
The formation of mountains (979-983). | ||||
979. | ||||
Mountains are made by the currents of rivers. | ||||
Mountains are destroyed by the currents of rivers. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare 789.] | ||||
980. | ||||
That the Northern bases of some Alps are not yet petrified. And this | ||||
is plainly to be seen where the rivers, which cut through them, flow | ||||
towards the North; where they cut through the strata in the living | ||||
stone in the higher parts of the mountains; and, where they join the | ||||
plains, these strata are all of potter's clay; as is to be seen in | ||||
the valley of Lamona where the river Lamona, as it issues from the | ||||
Appenines, does these things on its banks. | ||||
That the rivers have all cut and divided the mountains of the great | ||||
Alps one from the other. This is visible in the order of the | ||||
stratified rocks, because from the summits of the banks, down to the | ||||
river the correspondence of the strata in the rocks is visible on | ||||
either side of the river. That the stratified stones of the | ||||
mountains are all layers of clay, deposited one above the other by | ||||
the various floods of the rivers. That the different size of the | ||||
strata is caused by the difference in the floods--that is to say | ||||
greater or lesser floods. | ||||
981. | ||||
The summits of mountains for a long time rise constantly. | ||||
The opposite sides of the mountains always approach each other | ||||
below; the depths of the valleys which are above the sphere of the | ||||
waters are in the course of time constantly getting nearer to the | ||||
centre of the world. | ||||
In an equal period, the valleys sink much more than the mountains | ||||
rise. | ||||
The bases of the mountains always come closer together. | ||||
In proportion as the valleys become deeper, the more quickly are | ||||
their sides worn away. | ||||
982. | ||||
In every concavity at the summit of the mountains we shall always | ||||
find the divisions of the strata in the rocks. | ||||
983. | ||||
OF THE SEA WHICH ENCIRCLES THE EARTH. | ||||
I find that of old, the state of the earth was that its plains were | ||||
all covered up and hidden by salt water. [Footnote: This passage has | ||||
already been published by Dr. M. JORDAN: _Das Malerbuch des L. da | ||||
Vinci, Leipzig_ 1873, p. 86. However, his reading of the text | ||||
differs from mine.] | ||||
The authorities for the study of the structure of the earth. | ||||
984. | ||||
Since things are much more ancient than letters, it is no marvel if, | ||||
in our day, no records exist of these seas having covered so many | ||||
countries; and if, moreover, some records had existed, war and | ||||
conflagrations, the deluge of waters, the changes of languages and | ||||
of laws have consumed every thing ancient. But sufficient for us is | ||||
the testimony of things created in the salt waters, and found again | ||||
in high mountains far from the seas. | ||||
VI. | ||||
GEOLOGICAL PROBLEMS. | ||||
985. | ||||
In this work you have first to prove that the shells at a thousand | ||||
braccia of elevation were not carried there by the deluge, because | ||||
they are seen to be all at one level, and many mountains are seen to | ||||
be above that level; and to inquire whether the deluge was caused by | ||||
rain or by the swelling of the sea; and then you must show how, | ||||
neither by rain nor by swelling of the rivers, nor by the overflow | ||||
of this sea, could the shells--being heavy objects--be floated up | ||||
the mountains by the sea, nor have carried there by the rivers | ||||
against the course of their waters. | ||||
Doubts about the deluge. | ||||
986. | ||||
A DOUBTFUL POINT. | ||||
Here a doubt arises, and that is: whether the deluge, which happened | ||||
at the time of Noah, was universal or not. And it would seem not, | ||||
for the reasons now to be given: We have it in the Bible that this | ||||
deluge lasted 40 days and 40 nights of incessant and universal rain, | ||||
and that this rain rose to ten cubits above the highest mountains in | ||||
the world. And if it had been that the rain was universal, it would | ||||
have covered our globe which is spherical in form. And this | ||||
spherical surface is equally distant in every part, from the centre | ||||
of its sphere; hence the sphere of the waters being under the same | ||||
conditions, it is impossible that the water upon it should move, | ||||
because water, in itself, does not move unless it falls; therefore | ||||
how could the waters of such a deluge depart, if it is proved that | ||||
it has no motion? and if it departed how could it move unless it | ||||
went upwards? Here, then, natural reasons are wanting; hence to | ||||
remove this doubt it is necessary to call in a miracle to aid us, or | ||||
else to say that all this water was evaporated by the heat of the | ||||
sun. | ||||
[Footnote: The passages, here given from the MS. Leic., have | ||||
hitherto remained unknown. Some preliminary notes on the subject are | ||||
to be found in MS. F 8oa and 8ob; but as compared with the fuller | ||||
treatment here given, they are, it seems to me, of secondary | ||||
interest. They contain nothing that is not repeated here more | ||||
clearly and fully. LIBRI, _Histoire des Sciences mathematiques III_, | ||||
pages 218--221, has printed the text of F 80a and 80b, therefore it | ||||
seemed desirable to give my reasons for not inserting it in this | ||||
work.] | ||||
That marine shells could not go up the mountains. | ||||
987. | ||||
OF THE DELUGE AND OF MARINE SHELLS. | ||||
If you were to say that the shells which are to be seen within the | ||||
confines of Italy now, in our days, far from the sea and at such | ||||
heights, had been brought there by the deluge which left them there, | ||||
I should answer that if you believe that this deluge rose 7 cubits | ||||
above the highest mountains-- as he who measured it has | ||||
written--these shells, which always live near the sea-shore, should | ||||
have been left on the mountains; and not such a little way from the | ||||
foot of the mountains; nor all at one level, nor in layers upon | ||||
layers. And if you were to say that these shells are desirous of | ||||
remaining near to the margin of the sea, and that, as it rose in | ||||
height, the shells quitted their first home, and followed the | ||||
increase of the waters up to their highest level; to this I answer, | ||||
that the cockle is an animal of not more rapid movement than the | ||||
snail is out of water, or even somewhat slower; because it does not | ||||
swim, on the contrary it makes a furrow in the sand by means of its | ||||
sides, and in this furrow it will travel each day from 3 to 4 | ||||
braccia; therefore this creature, with so slow a motion, could not | ||||
have travelled from the Adriatic sea as far as Monferrato in | ||||
Lombardy [Footnote: _Monferrato di Lombardia_. The range of hills of | ||||
Monferrato is in Piedmont, and Casale di Monferrato belonged, in | ||||
Leonardo's time, to the Marchese di Mantova.], which is 250 miles | ||||
distance, in 40 days; which he has said who took account of the | ||||
time. And if you say that the waves carried them there, by their | ||||
gravity they could not move, excepting at the bottom. And if you | ||||
will not grant me this, confess at least that they would have to | ||||
stay at the summits of the highest mountains, in the lakes which are | ||||
enclosed among the mountains, like the lakes of Lario, or of Como | ||||
and il Maggiore [Footnote: _Lago di Lario._ Lacus Larius was the | ||||
name given by the Romans to the lake of Como. It is evident that it | ||||
is here a slip of the pen since the the words in the MS. are: _"Come | ||||
Lago di Lario o'l Magare e di Como,"_ In the MS. after line 16 we | ||||
come upon a digression treating of the weight of water; this has | ||||
here been omitted. It is 11 lines long.] and of Fiesole, and of | ||||
Perugia, and others. | ||||
And if you should say that the shells were carried by the waves, | ||||
being empty and dead, I say that where the dead went they were not | ||||
far removed from the living; for in these mountains living ones are | ||||
found, which are recognisable by the shells being in pairs; and they | ||||
are in a layer where there are no dead ones; and a little higher up | ||||
they are found, where they were thrown by the waves, all the dead | ||||
ones with their shells separated, near to where the rivers fell into | ||||
the sea, to a great depth; like the Arno which fell from the | ||||
Gonfolina near to Monte Lupo [Footnote: _Monte Lupo_, compare 970, | ||||
13; it is between Empoli and Florence.], where it left a deposit of | ||||
gravel which may still be seen, and which has agglomerated; and of | ||||
stones of various districts, natures, and colours and hardness, | ||||
making one single conglomerate. And a little beyond the sandstone | ||||
conglomerate a tufa has been formed, where it turned towards Castel | ||||
Florentino; farther on, the mud was deposited in which the shells | ||||
lived, and which rose in layers according to the levels at which the | ||||
turbid Arno flowed into that sea. And from time to time the bottom | ||||
of the sea was raised, depositing these shells in layers, as may be | ||||
seen in the cutting at Colle Gonzoli, laid open by the Arno which is | ||||
wearing away the base of it; in which cutting the said layers of | ||||
shells are very plainly to be seen in clay of a bluish colour, and | ||||
various marine objects are found there. And if the earth of our | ||||
hemisphere is indeed raised by so much higher than it used to be, it | ||||
must have become by so much lighter by the waters which it lost | ||||
through the rift between Gibraltar and Ceuta; and all the more the | ||||
higher it rose, because the weight of the waters which were thus | ||||
lost would be added to the earth in the other hemisphere. And if the | ||||
shells had been carried by the muddy deluge they would have been | ||||
mixed up, and separated from each other amidst the mud, and not in | ||||
regular steps and layers-- as we see them now in our time. | ||||
The marine shells were not produced away from the sea. | ||||
988. | ||||
As to those who say that shells existed for a long time and were | ||||
born at a distance from the sea, from the nature of the place and of | ||||
the cycles, which can influence a place to produce such | ||||
creatures--to them it may be answered: such an influence could not | ||||
place the animals all on one line, except those of the same sort and | ||||
age; and not the old with the young, nor some with an operculum and | ||||
others without their operculum, nor some broken and others whole, | ||||
nor some filled with sea-sand and large and small fragments of other | ||||
shells inside the whole shells which remained open; nor the claws of | ||||
crabs without the rest of their bodies; nor the shells of other | ||||
species stuck on to them like animals which have moved about on | ||||
them; since the traces of their track still remain, on the outside, | ||||
after the manner of worms in the wood which they ate into. Nor would | ||||
there be found among them the bones and teeth of fish which some | ||||
call arrows and others serpents' tongues, nor would so many | ||||
[Footnote: I. Scilla argued against this hypothesis, which was still | ||||
accepted in his days; see: _La vana Speculazione, Napoli_ 1670.] | ||||
portions of various animals be found all together if they had not | ||||
been thrown on the sea shore. And the deluge cannot have carried | ||||
them there, because things that are heavier than water do not float | ||||
on the water. But these things could not be at so great a height if | ||||
they had not been carried there by the water, such a thing being | ||||
impossible from their weight. In places where the valleys have not | ||||
been filled with salt sea water shells are never to be seen; as is | ||||
plainly visible in the great valley of the Arno above Gonfolina; a | ||||
rock formerly united to Monte Albano, in the form of a very high | ||||
bank which kept the river pent up, in such a way that before it | ||||
could flow into the sea, which was afterwards at its foot, it formed | ||||
two great lakes; of which the first was where we now see the city of | ||||
Florence together with Prato and Pistoia, and Monte Albano. It | ||||
followed the rest of its bank as far as where Serravalle now stands. | ||||
>From the Val d'Arno upwards, as far as Arezzo, another lake was | ||||
formed, which discharged its waters into the former lake. It was | ||||
closed at about the spot where now we see Girone, and occupied the | ||||
whole of that valley above for a distance of 40 miles in length. | ||||
This valley received on its bottom all the soil brought down by the | ||||
turbid waters. And this is still to be seen at the foot of Prato | ||||
Magno; it there lies very high where the rivers have not worn it | ||||
away. Across this land are to be seen the deep cuts of the rivers | ||||
that have passed there, falling from the great mountain of Prato | ||||
Magno; in these cuts there are no vestiges of any shells or of | ||||
marine soil. This lake was joined with that of Perugia [Footnote: | ||||
See PI. CXIII.] | ||||
A great quantity of shells are to be seen where the rivers flow into | ||||
the sea, because on such shores the waters are not so salt owing to | ||||
the admixture of the fresh water, which is poured into it. Evidence | ||||
of this is to be seen where, of old, the Appenines poured their | ||||
rivers into the Adriatic sea; for there in most places great | ||||
quantities of shells are to be found, among the mountains, together | ||||
with bluish marine clay; and all the rocks which are torn off in | ||||
such places are full of shells. The same may be observed to have | ||||
been done by the Arno when it fell from the rock of Gonfolina into | ||||
the sea, which was not so very far below; for at that time it was | ||||
higher than the top of San Miniato al Tedesco, since at the highest | ||||
summit of this the shores may be seen full of shells and oysters | ||||
within its flanks. The shells did not extend towards Val di Nievole, | ||||
because the fresh waters of the Arno did not extend so far. | ||||
That the shells were not carried away from the sea by the deluge, | ||||
because the waters which came from the earth although they drew the | ||||
sea towards the earth, were those which struck its depths; because | ||||
the water which goes down from the earth, has a stronger current | ||||
than that of the sea, and in consequence is more powerful, and it | ||||
enters beneath the sea water and stirs the depths and carries with | ||||
it all sorts of movable objects which are to be found in the earth, | ||||
such as the above-mentioned shells and other similar things. And in | ||||
proportion as the water which comes from the land is muddier than | ||||
sea water it is stronger and heavier than this; therefore I see no | ||||
way of getting the said shells so far in land, unless they had been | ||||
born there. If you were to tell me that the river Loire [Footnote: | ||||
Leonardo has written Era instead of Loera or Loira--perhaps under | ||||
the mistaken idea that _Lo_ was an article.],which traverses France | ||||
covers when the sea rises more than eighty miles of country, because | ||||
it is a district of vast plains, and the sea rises about 20 braccia, | ||||
and shells are found in this plain at the distance of 80 miles from | ||||
the sea; here I answer that the flow and ebb in our Mediterranean | ||||
Sea does not vary so much; for at Genoa it does not rise at all, and | ||||
at Venice but little, and very little in Africa; and where it varies | ||||
little it covers but little of the country. | ||||
The course of the water of a river always rises higher in a place | ||||
where the current is impeded; it behaves as it does where it is | ||||
reduced in width to pass under the arches of a bridge. | ||||
Further researches (989-991). | ||||
989. | ||||
A CONFUTATION OF THOSE WHO SAY THAT SHELLS MAY HAVE BEEN CARRIED TO | ||||
A DISTANCE OF MANY DAYS' JOURNEY FROM THE SEA BY THE DELUGE, WHICH | ||||
WAS SO HIGH AS TO BE ABOVE THOSE HEIGHTS. | ||||
I say that the deluge could not carry objects, native to the sea, up | ||||
to the mountains, unless the sea had already increased so as to | ||||
create inundations as high up as those places; and this increase | ||||
could not have occurred because it would cause a vacuum; and if you | ||||
were to say that the air would rush in there, we have already | ||||
concluded that what is heavy cannot remain above what is light, | ||||
whence of necessity we must conclude that this deluge was caused by | ||||
rain water, so that all these waters ran to the sea, and the sea did | ||||
not run up the mountains; and as they ran to the sea, they thrust | ||||
the shells from the shore of the sea and did not draw them to wards | ||||
themselves. And if you were then to say that the sea, raised by the | ||||
rain water, had carried these shells to such a height, we have | ||||
already said that things heavier than water cannot rise upon it, but | ||||
remain at the bottom of it, and do not move unless by the impact of | ||||
the waves. And if you were to say that the waves had carried them to | ||||
such high spots, we have proved that the waves in a great depth move | ||||
in a contrary direction at the bottom to the motion at the top, and | ||||
this is shown by the turbidity of the sea from the earth washed down | ||||
near its shores. Anything which is lighter than the water moves with | ||||
the waves, and is left on the highest level of the highest margin of | ||||
the waves. Anything which is heavier than the water moves, suspended | ||||
in it, between the surface and the bottom; and from these two | ||||
conclusions, which will be amply proved in their place, we infer | ||||
that the waves of the surface cannot convey shells, since they are | ||||
heavier than water. | ||||
If the deluge had to carry shells three hundred and four hundred | ||||
miles from the sea, it would have carried them mixed with various | ||||
other natural objects heaped together; and we see at such distances | ||||
oysters all together, and sea-snails, and cuttlefish, and all the | ||||
other shells which congregate together, all to be found together and | ||||
dead; and the solitary shells are found wide apart from each other, | ||||
as we may see them on sea-shores every day. And if we find oysters | ||||
of very large shells joined together and among them very many which | ||||
still have the covering attached, indicating that they were left | ||||
here by the sea, and still living when the strait of Gibraltar was | ||||
cut through; there are to be seen, in the mountains of Parma and | ||||
Piacenza, a multitude of shells and corals, full of holes, and still | ||||
sticking to the rocks there. When I was making the great horse for | ||||
Milan, a large sack full was brought to me in my workshop by certain | ||||
peasants; these were found in that place and among them were many | ||||
preserved in their first freshness. | ||||
Under ground, and under the foundations of buildings, timbers are | ||||
found of wrought beams and already black. Such were found in my time | ||||
in those diggings at Castel Fiorentino. And these had been in that | ||||
deep place before the sand carried by the Arno into the sea, then | ||||
covering the plain, had heen raised to such a height; and before the | ||||
plains of Casentino had been so much lowered, by the earth being | ||||
constantly carried down from them. | ||||
[Footnote: These lines are written in the margin.] | ||||
And if you were to say that these shells were created, and were | ||||
continually being created in such places by the nature of the spot, | ||||
and of the heavens which might have some influence there, such an | ||||
opinion cannot exist in a brain of much reason; because here are the | ||||
years of their growth, numbered on their shells, and there are large | ||||
and small ones to be seen which could not have grown without food, | ||||
and could not have fed without motion--and here they could not move | ||||
[Footnote: These lines are written in the margin.] | ||||
990. | ||||
That in the drifts, among one and another, there are still to be | ||||
found the traces of the worms which crawled upon them when they were | ||||
not yet dry. And all marine clays still contain shells, and the | ||||
shells are petrified together with the clay. From their firmness and | ||||
unity some persons will have it that these animals were carried up | ||||
to places remote from the sea by the deluge. Another sect of | ||||
ignorant persons declare that Nature or Heaven created them in these | ||||
places by celestial influences, as if in these places we did not | ||||
also find the bones of fishes which have taken a long time to grow; | ||||
and as if, we could not count, in the shells of cockles and snails, | ||||
the years and months of their life, as we do in the horns of bulls | ||||
and oxen, and in the branches of plants that have never been cut in | ||||
any part. Besides, having proved by these signs the length of their | ||||
lives, it is evident, and it must be admitted, that these animals | ||||
could not live without moving to fetch their food; and we find in | ||||
them no instrument for penetrating the earth or the rock where we | ||||
find them enclosed. But how could we find in a large snail shell the | ||||
fragments and portions of many other sorts of shells, of various | ||||
sorts, if they had not been thrown there, when dead, by the waves of | ||||
the sea like the other light objects which it throws on the earth? | ||||
Why do we find so many fragments and whole shells between layer and | ||||
layer of stone, if this had not formerly been covered on the shore | ||||
by a layer of earth thrown up by the sea, and which was afterwards | ||||
petrified? And if the deluge before mentioned had carried them to | ||||
these parts of the sea, you might find these shells at the boundary | ||||
of one drift but not at the boundary between many drifts. We must | ||||
also account for the winters of the years during which the sea | ||||
multiplied the drifts of sand and mud brought down by the | ||||
neighbouring rivers, by washing down the shores; and if you chose to | ||||
say that there were several deluges to produce these rifts and the | ||||
shells among them, you would also have to affirm that such a deluge | ||||
took place every year. Again, among the fragments of these shells, | ||||
it must be presumed that in those places there were sea coasts, | ||||
where all the shells were thrown up, broken, and divided, and never | ||||
in pairs, since they are found alive in the sea, with two valves, | ||||
each serving as a lid to the other; and in the drifts of rivers and | ||||
on the shores of the sea they are found in fragments. And within the | ||||
limits of the separate strata of rocks they are found, few in number | ||||
and in pairs like those which were left by the sea, buried alive in | ||||
the mud, which subsequently dried up and, in time, was petrified. | ||||
991. | ||||
And if you choose to say that it was the deluge which carried these | ||||
shells away from the sea for hundreds of miles, this cannot have | ||||
happened, since that deluge was caused by rain; because rain | ||||
naturally forces the rivers to rush towards the sea with all the | ||||
things they carry with them, and not to bear the dead things of the | ||||
sea shores to the mountains. And if you choose to say that the | ||||
deluge afterwards rose with its waters above the mountains, the | ||||
movement of the sea must have been so sluggish in its rise against | ||||
the currents of the rivers, that it could not have carried, floating | ||||
upon it, things heavier than itself; and even if it had supported | ||||
them, in its receding it would have left them strewn about, in | ||||
various spots. But how are we to account for the corals which are | ||||
found every day towards Monte Ferrato in Lombardy, with the holes of | ||||
the worms in them, sticking to rocks left uncovered by the currents | ||||
of rivers? These rocks are all covered with stocks and families of | ||||
oysters, which as we know, never move, but always remain with one of | ||||
their halves stuck to a rock, and the other they open to feed | ||||
themselves on the animalcules that swim in the water, which, hoping | ||||
to find good feeding ground, become the food of these shells. We do | ||||
not find that the sand mixed with seaweed has been petrified, | ||||
because the weed which was mingled with it has shrunk away, and this | ||||
the Po shows us every day in the debris of its banks. | ||||
Other problems (992-994). | ||||
992. | ||||
Why do we find the bones of great fishes and oysters and corals and | ||||
various other shells and sea-snails on the high summits of mountains | ||||
by the sea, just as we find them in low seas? | ||||
993. | ||||
You now have to prove that the shells cannot have originated if not | ||||
in salt water, almost all being of that sort; and that the shells in | ||||
Lombardy are at four levels, and thus it is everywhere, having been | ||||
made at various times. And they all occur in valleys that open | ||||
towards the seas. | ||||
994. | ||||
>From the two lines of shells we are forced to say that the earth | ||||
indignantly submerged under the sea and so the first layer was made; | ||||
and then the deluge made the second. | ||||
[Footnote: This note is in the early writing of about 1470--1480. On | ||||
the same sheet are the passages No. 1217 and 1219. Compare also No. | ||||
1339. All the foregoing chapters are from Manuscripts of about 1510. | ||||
This explains the want of connection and the contradiction between | ||||
this and the foregoing texts.] | ||||
VII. | ||||
ON THE ATMOSPHERE. | ||||
Constituents of the atmosphere. | ||||
995. | ||||
That the brightness of the air is occasioned by the water which has | ||||
dissolved itself in it into imperceptible molecules. These, being | ||||
lighted by the sun from the opposite side, reflect the brightness | ||||
which is visible in the air; and the azure which is seen in it is | ||||
caused by the darkness that is hidden beyond the air. [Footnote: | ||||
Compare Vol. I, No. 300.] | ||||
On the motion of air (996--999). | ||||
996. | ||||
That the return eddies of wind at the mouth of certain valleys | ||||
strike upon the waters and scoop them out in a great hollow, whirl | ||||
the water into the air in the form of a column, and of the colour of | ||||
a cloud. And I saw this thing happen on a sand bank in the Arno, | ||||
where the sand was hollowed out to a greater depth than the stature | ||||
of a man; and with it the gravel was whirled round and flung about | ||||
for a great space; it appeared in the air in the form of a great | ||||
bell-tower; and the top spread like the branches of a pine tree, and | ||||
then it bent at the contact of the direct wind, which passed over | ||||
from the mountains. | ||||
997. | ||||
The element of fire acts upon a wave of air in the same way as the | ||||
air does on water, or as water does on a mass of sand --that is | ||||
earth; and their motions are in the same proportions as those of the | ||||
motors acting upon them. | ||||
998. | ||||
OF MOTION. | ||||
I ask whether the true motion of the clouds can be known by the | ||||
motion of their shadows; and in like manner of the motion of the | ||||
sun. | ||||
999. | ||||
To know better the direction of the winds. [Footnote: In connection | ||||
with this text I may here mention a hygrometer, drawn and probably | ||||
invented by Leonardo. A facsimile of this is given in Vol. I, p. 297 | ||||
with the note: _'Modi di pesare l'arie eddi sapere quando s'a | ||||
arrompere il tepo'_ (Mode of weighing the air and of knowing when | ||||
the weather will change); by the sponge _"Spugnea"_ is written.] | ||||
The globe an organism. | ||||
1000. | ||||
Nothing originates in a spot where there is no sentient, vegetable | ||||
and rational life; feathers grow upon birds and are changed every | ||||
year; hairs grow upon animals and are changed every year, excepting | ||||
some parts, like the hairs of the beard in lions, cats and their | ||||
like. The grass grows in the fields, and the leaves on the trees, | ||||
and every year they are, in great part, renewed. So that we might | ||||
say that the earth has a spirit of growth; that its flesh is the | ||||
soil, its bones the arrangement and connection of the rocks of which | ||||
the mountains are composed, its cartilage the tufa, and its blood | ||||
the springs of water. The pool of blood which lies round the heart | ||||
is the ocean, and its breathing, and the increase and decrease of | ||||
the blood in the pulses, is represented in the earth by the flow and | ||||
ebb of the sea; and the heat of the spirit of the world is the fire | ||||
which pervades the earth, and the seat of the vegetative soul is in | ||||
the fires, which in many parts of the earth find vent in baths and | ||||
mines of sulphur, and in volcanoes, as at Mount Aetna in Sicily, and | ||||
in many other places. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare No. 929.] | ||||
_XVII._ | ||||
_Topographical Notes._ | ||||
_A large part of the texts published in this section might perhaps | ||||
have found their proper place in connection with the foregoing | ||||
chapters on Physical Geography. But these observations on Physical | ||||
Geography, of whatever kind they may be, as soon as they are | ||||
localised acquire a special interest and importance and particularly | ||||
as bearing on the question whether Leonardo himself made the | ||||
observations recorded at the places mentioned or merely noted the | ||||
statements from hearsay. In a few instances he himself tells us that | ||||
he writes at second hand. In some cases again, although the style | ||||
and expressions used make it seem highly probable that he has | ||||
derived his information from others-- though, as it seems to me, | ||||
these cases are not very numerous--we find, on the other hand, among | ||||
these topographical notes a great number of observations, about | ||||
which it is extremely difficult to form a decided opinion. Of what | ||||
the Master's life and travels may have been throughout his | ||||
sixty-seven years of life we know comparatively little; for a long | ||||
course of time, and particularly from about 1482 to 1486, we do not | ||||
even know with certainty that he was living in Italy. Thus, from a | ||||
biographical point of view a very great interest attaches to some of | ||||
the topographical notes, and for this reason it seemed that it would | ||||
add to their value to arrange them in a group by themselves. | ||||
Leonardo's intimate knowledge with places, some of which were | ||||
certainly remote from his native home, are of importance as | ||||
contributing to decide the still open question as to the extent of | ||||
Leonardo's travels. We shall find in these notes a confirmation of | ||||
the view, that the MSS. in which the Topographical Notes occur are | ||||
in only a very few instances such diaries as may have been in use | ||||
during a journey. These notes are mostly found in the MSS. books of | ||||
his later and quieter years, and it is certainly remarkable that | ||||
Leonardo is very reticent as to the authorities from whom he quotes | ||||
his facts and observations: For instance, as to the Straits of | ||||
Gibraltar, the Nile, the Taurus Mountains and the Tigris and | ||||
Euphrates. Is it likely that he, who declared that in all scientific | ||||
research, his own experience should be the foundation of his | ||||
statements (see XIX Philosophy No. 987--991,) should here have made | ||||
an exception to this rule without mentioning it?_ | ||||
_As for instance in the discussion as to the equilibrium of the mass | ||||
of water in the Mediterranean Sea--a subject which, it may be | ||||
observed, had at that time attracted the interest and study of | ||||
hardly any other observer. The acute remarks, in Nos. 985--993, on | ||||
the presence of shells at the tops of mountains, suffice to | ||||
prove--as it seems to me--that it was not in his nature to allow | ||||
himself to be betrayed into wide generalisations, extending beyond | ||||
the limits of his own investigations, even by such brilliant results | ||||
of personal study._ | ||||
_Most of these Topographical Notes, though suggesting very careful | ||||
and thorough research, do not however, as has been said, afford | ||||
necessarily indisputable evidence that that research was Leonardo's | ||||
own. But it must be granted that in more than one instance | ||||
probability is in favour of this idea._ | ||||
_Among the passages which treat somewhat fully of the topography of | ||||
Eastern places by far the most interesting is a description of the | ||||
Taurus Mountains; but as this text is written in the style of a | ||||
formal report and, in the original, is associated with certain | ||||
letters which give us the history of its origin, I have thought it | ||||
best not to sever it from that connection. It will be found under | ||||
No. XXI (Letters)._ | ||||
_That Florence, and its neighbourhood, where Leonardo spent his | ||||
early years, should be nowhere mentioned except in connection with | ||||
the projects for canals, which occupied his attention for some short | ||||
time during the first ten years of the XVIth century, need not | ||||
surprise us. The various passages relating to the construction of | ||||
canals in Tuscany, which are put together at the beginning, are | ||||
immediately followed by those which deal with schemes for canals in | ||||
Lombardy; and after these come notes on the city and vicinity of | ||||
Milan as well as on the lakes of North Italy._ | ||||
_The notes on some towns of Central Italy which Leonardo visited in | ||||
1502, when in the service of Cesare Borgia, are reproduced here in | ||||
the same order as in the note book used during these travels (MS. | ||||
L., Institut de France). These notes have but little interest in | ||||
themselves excepting as suggesting his itinerary. The maps of the | ||||
districts drawn by Leonardo at the time are more valuable (see No. | ||||
1054 note). The names on these maps are not written from right to | ||||
left, but in the usual manner, and we are permitted to infer that | ||||
they were made in obedience to some command, possibly for the use of | ||||
Cesare Borgia himself; the fact that they remained nevertheless in | ||||
Leonardo's hands is not surprising when we remember the sudden | ||||
political changes and warlike events of the period. There can be no | ||||
doubt that these maps, which are here published for the first time, | ||||
are original in the strictest sense of the word, that is to say | ||||
drawn from observations of the places themselves; this is proved by | ||||
the fact--among others--that we find among his manuscripts not only | ||||
the finished maps themselves but the rough sketches and studies for | ||||
them. And it would perhaps be difficult to point out among the | ||||
abundant contributions to geographical knowledge published during | ||||
the XVIth century, any maps at all approaching these in accuracy and | ||||
finish._ | ||||
_The interesting map of the world, so far as it was then known, | ||||
which is among the Leonardo MSS. at Windsor (published in the_ | ||||
'Archaeologia' _Vol. XI) cannot be attributed to the Master, as the | ||||
Marchese Girolamo d'Adda has sufficiently proved; it has not | ||||
therefore been reproduced here._ | ||||
_Such of Leonardo's observations on places in Italy as were made | ||||
before or after his official travels as military engineer to Cesare | ||||
Borgia, have been arranged in alphabetical order, under Nos. | ||||
1034-1054. The most interesting are those which relate to the Alps | ||||
and the Appenines, Nos. 1057-1068._ | ||||
_Most of the passages in which France is mentioned have hitherto | ||||
remained unknown, as well as those which treat of the countries | ||||
bordering on the Mediterranean, which come at the end of this | ||||
section. Though these may be regarded as of a more questionable | ||||
importance in their bearing on the biography of the Master than | ||||
those which mention places in France, it must be allowed that they | ||||
are interesting as showing the prominent place which the countries | ||||
of the East held in his geographical studies. He never once alludes | ||||
to the discovery of America._ | ||||
I. | ||||
ITALY. | ||||
Canals in connection with the Arno (1001-1008). | ||||
1001. | ||||
CANAL OF FLORENCE. | ||||
Sluices should be made in the valley of la Chiana at Arezzo, so that | ||||
when, in the summer, the Arno lacks water, the canal may not remain | ||||
dry: and let this canal be 20 braccia wide at the bottom, and at the | ||||
top 30, and 2 braccia deep, or 4, so that two of these braccia may | ||||
flow to the mills and the meadows, which will benefit the country; | ||||
and Prato, Pistoia and Pisa, as well as Florence, will gain two | ||||
hundred thousand ducats a year, and will lend a hand and money to | ||||
this useful work; and the Lucchese the same, for the lake of Sesto | ||||
will be navigable; I shall direct it to Prato and Pistoia, and cut | ||||
through Serravalle and make an issue into the lake; for there will | ||||
be no need of locks or supports, which are not lasting and so will | ||||
always be giving trouble in working at them and keeping them up. | ||||
And know that in digging this canal where it is 4 braccia deep, it | ||||
will cost 4 dinari the square braccio; for twice the depth 6 dinari, | ||||
if you are making 4 braccia [Footnote: This passage is illustrated | ||||
by a slightly sketched map, on which these places are indicated from | ||||
West to East: Pisa, Luccha, Lago, Seravalle, Pistoja, Prato, | ||||
Firenze.] and there are but 2 banks; that is to say one from the | ||||
bottom of the trench to the surface of the edges of it, and the | ||||
other from these edges to the top of the ridge of earth which will | ||||
be raised on the margin of the bank. And if this bank were of double | ||||
the depth only the first bank will be increased, that is 4 braccia | ||||
increased by half the first cost; that is to say that if at first 4 | ||||
dinari were paid for 2 banks, for 3 it would come to 6, at 2 dinari | ||||
the bank, if the trench measured 16 braccia at the bottom; again, if | ||||
the trench were 16 braccia wide and 4 deep, coming to 4 lire for the | ||||
work, 4 Milan dinari the square braccio; a trench which was 32 | ||||
braccia at the bottom would come to 8 dinari the square braccio. | ||||
1002. | ||||
>From the wall of the Arno at [the gate of] la Giustizia to the bank | ||||
of the Arno at Sardigna where the walls are, to the mills, is 7400 | ||||
braccia, that is 2 miles and 1400 braccia and beyond the Arno is | ||||
5500 braccia. | ||||
[Footnote: 2. _Giustizia_. By this the Porta della Giustizia seems | ||||
to be meant; from the XVth to the XVIth centuries it was also | ||||
commonly known as Porta Guelfa, Porta San Francesco del Renaio, | ||||
Porta Nuova, and Porta Reale. It was close to the Arno opposite to | ||||
the Porta San Niccolo, which still exists.] | ||||
1003. | ||||
By guiding the Arno above and below a treasure will be found in each | ||||
acre of ground by whomsoever will. | ||||
1004. | ||||
The wall of the old houses runs towards the gate of San Nicolo. | ||||
[Footnote: By the side of this text there is an indistinct sketch, | ||||
resembling that given under No.973. On the bank is written the word | ||||
_Casace_. There then follows in the original a passage of 12 lines | ||||
in which the consequences of the windings of the river are | ||||
discussed. A larger but equally hasty diagram on the same page | ||||
represents the shores of the Arno inside Florence as in two parallel | ||||
lines. Four horizontal lines indicate the bridges. By the side these | ||||
measures are stated in figures: I. (at the Ponte alla Carraja): | ||||
_230--largho br. 12 e 2 di spoda e 14 di pile e a 4 pilastri;_ 2. | ||||
(at the Ponte S. Trinita); _l88--largho br. 15 e 2 di spode he 28 | ||||
di pilastri for delle spode e pilastri so 2;_ 3. (at the Ponte | ||||
vecchio); _pote lung br. 152 e largo;_ 4. (at the Ponte alle | ||||
Grazie): _290 ellargo 12 e 2 di spode e 6 di pili._ | ||||
There is, in MS. W. L. 2l2b, a sketched plan of Florence, with the | ||||
following names of gates: | ||||
_Nicholo--Saminiato--Giorgo--Ghanolini--Porta San Fredian | ||||
--Prato--Faenza--Ghallo--Pinti--Giustitia_.] | ||||
1005. | ||||
The ruined wall is 640 braccia; 130 is the wall remaining with the | ||||
mill; 300 braccia were broken in 4 years by Bisarno. | ||||
1006. | ||||
They do not know why the Arno will never remain in a channel. It is | ||||
because the rivers which flow into it deposit earth where they | ||||
enter, and wear it away on the opposite side, bending the river in | ||||
that direction. The Arno flows for 6 miles between la Caprona and | ||||
Leghorn; and for 12 through the marshes, which extend 32 miles, and | ||||
16 from La Caprona up the river, which makes 48; by the Arno from | ||||
Florence beyond 16 miles; to Vico 16 miles, and the canal is 5; from | ||||
Florence to Fucechio it is 40 miles by the river Arno. | ||||
56 miles by the Arno from Florence to Vico; by the Pistoia canal it | ||||
is 44 miles. Thus it is 12 miles shorter by the canal than by the | ||||
Arno. | ||||
[Footnote: This passage is written by the side of a map washed in | ||||
Indian ink, of the course of the Arno; it is evidently a sketch for | ||||
a completer map. | ||||
These investigations may possibly be connected with the following | ||||
documents. _Francesco Guiducci alla Balia di Firenze. Dal Campo | ||||
contro Pisa_ 24 _Luglio_ 1503 (_Archivio di Stato, Firenze, Lettere | ||||
alla Balia_; published by J. GAYE, _Carteggio inedito d'Artisti, | ||||
Firenze_ 1840, _Tom. II_, p. 62): _Ex Castris, Franciscus | ||||
Ghuiduccius,_ 24. _Jul._ 1503. _Appresso fu qui hieri con una di V. | ||||
Signoria Alexandro degli Albizi insieme con Leonardo da Vinci et | ||||
certi altri, et veduto el disegno insieme con el ghovernatore, doppo | ||||
molte discussioni et dubii conclusesi che l'opera fussi molto al | ||||
proposito, o si veramente Arno volgersi qui, o restarvi con un | ||||
canale, che almeno vieterebbe che le colline da nemici non | ||||
potrebbono essere offese; come tucto referiranno loro a bocha V. S._ | ||||
And, _Archivio di Stato, Firenze, Libro d'Entrata e Uscita di cassa | ||||
de' Magnifici Signori di luglio e agosto_ | ||||
1503 _a_ 51 _T.: Andata di Leonardo al Campo sotto Pisa. Spese | ||||
extraordinarie dieno dare a di XXVI di luglio L. LVI sol. XII per | ||||
loro a Giovanni Piffero; e sono per tanti, asegnia avere spexi in | ||||
vetture di sei chavalli a spese di vitto per andare chon Lionardo da | ||||
Vinci a livellare Arno in quello di Pisa per levallo del lilo suo._ | ||||
(Published by MILANESI, _Archivio Storico Italiano, Serie III, Tom. | ||||
XVI._} VASARI asserts: _(Leonardo) fu il primo ancora, che | ||||
giovanetto discorresse sopra il fiume d'Arno per metterlo in canale | ||||
da Pisa a Fiorenza_ (ed. SANSONI, IV, 20). | ||||
The passage above is in some degree illustrated by the map on Pl. | ||||
CXII, where the course of the Arno westward from Empoli is shown.] | ||||
1007. | ||||
The eddy made by the Mensola, when the Arno is low and the Mensola | ||||
full. | ||||
[Footnote: _Mensola_ is a mountain stream which falls into the Arno | ||||
about a mile and a half above Florence. | ||||
A=Arno, I=Isola, M=Mvgone, P=Pesa, N=Mesola.] | ||||
1008. | ||||
That the river which is to be turned from one place to another must | ||||
be coaxed and not treated roughly or with violence; and to do this a | ||||
sort of floodgate should be made in the river, and then lower down | ||||
one in front of it and in like manner a third, fourth and fifth, so | ||||
that the river may discharge itself into the channel given to it, or | ||||
that by this means it may be diverted from the place it has damaged, | ||||
as was done in Flanders--as I was told by Niccolo di Forsore. | ||||
How to protect and repair the banks washed by the water, as below | ||||
the island of Cocomeri. | ||||
Ponte Rubaconte (Fig. 1); below [the palaces] Bisticci and Canigiani | ||||
(Fig. 2). Above the flood gate of la Giustizia (Fig. 3); _a b_ is a | ||||
sand bank opposite the end of the island of the Cocomeri in the | ||||
middle of the Arno (Fig. 4). [Footnote: The course of the river Arno | ||||
is also discussed in Nos. 987 and 988.] | ||||
Canals in the Milanese (1009-1013). | ||||
1009. | ||||
The canal of San Cristofano at Milan made May 3rd 1509. [Footnote: | ||||
This observation is written above a washed pen and ink drawing which | ||||
has been published as Tav. VI in the _,,Saggio."_ The editors of | ||||
that work explain the drawing as _"uno Studio di bocche per | ||||
estrazione d'acqua."_] | ||||
1010. | ||||
OF THE CANAL OF MARTESANA. | ||||
By making the canal of Martesana the water of the Adda is greatly | ||||
diminished by its distribution over many districts for the | ||||
irrigation of the fields. A remedy for this would be to make several | ||||
little channels, since the water drunk up by the earth is of no more | ||||
use to any one, nor mischief neither, because it is taken from no | ||||
one; and by making these channels the water which before was lost | ||||
returns again and is once more serviceable and useful to men. | ||||
[Footnote: _"el navilio di Martagano"_ is also mentioned in a note | ||||
written in red chalk, MS. H2 17a Leonardo has, as it seems, little | ||||
to do with Lodovico il Moro's scheme to render this canal navigable. | ||||
The canal had been made in 1460 by Bertonino da Novara. Il Moro | ||||
issued his degree in 1493, but Leonardo's notes about this canal | ||||
were, with the exception of one (No. 1343), written about sixteen | ||||
years later.] | ||||
1011. | ||||
No canal which is fed by a river can be permanent if the river | ||||
whence it originates is not wholly closed up, like the canal of | ||||
Martesana which is fed by the Ticino. | ||||
1012. | ||||
>From the beginning of the canal to the mill. | ||||
>From the beginning of the canal of Brivio to the mill of Travaglia | ||||
is 2794 trabochi, that is 11176 braccia, which is more than 3 miles | ||||
and two thirds; and here the canal is 57 braccia higher than the | ||||
surface of the water of the Adda, giving a fall of two inches in | ||||
every hundred trabochi; and at that spot we propose to take the | ||||
opening of our canal. | ||||
[Footnote: The following are written on the sketches: At the place | ||||
marked _N: navilio da dacquiue_ (canal of running water); at _M: | ||||
molin del Travaglia_ (Mill of Travaglia); at _R: rochetta ssanta | ||||
maria_ (small rock of Santa Maria); at _A: Adda;_ at _L: Lagho di | ||||
Lecho ringorgato alli 3 corni in Adda,--Concha perpetua_ (lake of | ||||
Lecco overflowing at Tre Corni, in Adda,-- a permanent sluice). Near | ||||
the second sketch, referring to the sluice near _Q: qui la chatena | ||||
ttalie d'u peso_ (here the chain is in one piece). At _M_ in the | ||||
lower sketch: _mol del travaglia, nel cavare la concha il tereno | ||||
ara chotrapero co cassa d'acqua._ (Mill of Travaglia, in digging | ||||
out the sluice the soil will have as a counterpoise a vessel of | ||||
water).] | ||||
1013. | ||||
If it be not reported there that this is to be a public canal, it | ||||
will be necessary to pay for the land; [Footnote 3: _il re_. Louis | ||||
XII or Francis I of France. It is hardly possible to doubt that the | ||||
canals here spoken of were intended to be in the Milanese. Compare | ||||
with this passage the rough copy of a letter by Leonardo, to the | ||||
_"Presidente dell' Ufficio regolatore dell' acqua"_ on No. 1350. See | ||||
also the note to No. 745, 1. 12.] and the king will pay it by | ||||
remitting the taxes for a year. | ||||
Estimates and preparatory studies for canals (1014. 1015). | ||||
1014. | ||||
CANAL. | ||||
The canal which may be 16 braccia wide at the bottom and 20 at the | ||||
top, we may say is on the average 18 braccia wide, and if it is 4 | ||||
braccia deep, at 4 dinari the square braccia; it will only cost 900 | ||||
ducats, to excavate by the mile, if the square braccio is calculated | ||||
in ordinary braccia; but if the braccia are those used in measuring | ||||
land, of which every 4 are equal to 4 1/2 and if by the mile we | ||||
understand three thousand ordinary braccia; turned into land | ||||
braccia, these 3000 braccia will lack 1/4; there remain 2250 | ||||
braccia, which at 4 dinari the braccio will amount to 675 ducats a | ||||
mile. At 3 dinari the square braccio, the mile will amount to 506 | ||||
1/4 ducats so that the excavation of 30 miles of the canal will | ||||
amount to 15187 1/2 ducats. | ||||
1015. | ||||
To make the great canal, first make the smaller one and conduct into | ||||
it the waters which by a wheel will help to fill the great one. | ||||
Notes on buildings in Milan (1016-1019) | ||||
1016. | ||||
Indicate the centre of Milan. | ||||
Moforte--porta resa--porta nova--strada nova--navilio--porta | ||||
cumana--barco--porta giovia--porta vercellina--porta sco | ||||
Anbrogio--porta Tesinese--torre dell' Imperatore-- porta | ||||
Lodovica--acqua. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CIX. The original sketch is here reduced to about | ||||
half its size. The gates of the town are here named, beginning at | ||||
the right hand and following the curved line. In the bird's eye view | ||||
of Milan below, the cathedral is plainly recognisable in the middle; | ||||
to the right is the tower of San Gottardo. The square, above the | ||||
number 9147, is the Lazzaretto, which was begun in 1488. On the left | ||||
the group of buildings of the _'Castello'_ will be noticed. On the | ||||
sketched Plan of Florence (see No. 1004 note) Leonardo has written | ||||
on the margin the following names of gates of Milan: Vercellina | ||||
--Ticinese--Ludovica--Romana--Orientale-- | ||||
Nova--Beatrice--Cumana--Compare too No. 1448, 11. 5, 12.] | ||||
1017. | ||||
The moat of Milan. | ||||
Canal 2 braccia wide. | ||||
The castle with the moats full. | ||||
The filling of the moats of the Castle of Milan. | ||||
1018. | ||||
THE BATH. | ||||
To heat the water for the stove of the Duchess take four parts of | ||||
cold water to three parts of hot water. | ||||
[Footnote: _Duchessa di Milano_, Beatrice d'Este, wife of Ludovico | ||||
il Moro to whom she was married, in 1491. She died in June 1497.] | ||||
1019. | ||||
In the Cathedral at the pulley of the nail of the cross. | ||||
Item. | ||||
To place the mass _v r_ in the... | ||||
[Footnote: On this passage AMORETTI remarks _(Memorie Storiche_ | ||||
chap. IX): _Nell'anno stesso lo veggiamo formare un congegno di | ||||
carucole e di corde, con cui trasportare in piu venerabile e piu | ||||
sicuro luogo, cioe nell'ultima arcata della nave di mezzo della | ||||
metropolitana, la sacra reliquia del Santo Chiodo, che ivi ancor si | ||||
venera. Al fol. 15 del codice segnato Q. R. in 16, egli ci ha | ||||
lasciata di tal congegno una doppia figura, cioe una di quattro | ||||
carucole, e una di tre colle rispettive corde, soggiugnandovi: in | ||||
Domo alla carucola del Chiodo della Croce._ | ||||
AMORETTI'S views as to the mark on the MS, and the date when it was | ||||
written are, it may be observed, wholly unfounded. The MS. L, in | ||||
which it occurs, is of the year 1502, and it is very unlikely that | ||||
Leonardo was in Milan at that time; this however would not prevent | ||||
the remark, which is somewhat obscure, from applying to the | ||||
Cathedral at Milan.] | ||||
1020. | ||||
OF THE FORCE OF THE VACUUM FORMED IN A MOMENT. | ||||
I saw, at Milan, a thunderbolt fall on the tower della Credenza on | ||||
its Northern side, and it descended with a slow motion down that | ||||
side, and then at once parted from that tower and carried with it | ||||
and tore away from that wall a space of 3 braccia wide and two deep; | ||||
and this wall was 4 braccia thick and was built of thin and small | ||||
old bricks; and this was dragged out by the vacuum which the flame | ||||
of the thunderbolt had caused, &c. | ||||
[Footnote: With reference to buildings at Milan see also Nos. 751 | ||||
and 756, and Pl. XCV, No. 2 (explained on p. 52), Pl. C (explained | ||||
on pages 60-62). See also pages 25, 39 and 40.] | ||||
Remarks on natural phenomena in and near Milan (1021. 1022). | ||||
1021. | ||||
I have already been to see a great variety (of atmospheric effects). | ||||
And lately over Milan towards Lago Maggiore I saw a cloud in the | ||||
form of an immense mountain full of rifts of glowing light, because | ||||
the rays of the sun, which was already close to the horizon and red, | ||||
tinged the cloud with its own hue. And this cloud attracted to it | ||||
all the little clouds that were near while the large one did not | ||||
move from its place; thus it retained on its summit the reflection | ||||
of the sunlight till an hour and a half after sunset, so immensely | ||||
large was it; and about two hours after sunset such a violent wind | ||||
arose, that it was really tremendous and unheard of. | ||||
[Footnote: _di arie_ is wanting in the original but may safely be | ||||
inserted in the context, as the formation of clouds is under | ||||
discussion before this text.] | ||||
1022. | ||||
On the 10th day of December at 9 o'clock a. m. fire was set to the | ||||
place. | ||||
On the l8th day of December 1511 at 9 o'clock a. m. this second fire | ||||
was kindled by the Swiss at Milan at the place called DCXC. | ||||
[Footnote: With these two texts, (l. 1--2 and l. 3--5 are in the | ||||
original side by side) there are sketches of smoke wreaths in red | ||||
chalk.] | ||||
Note on Pavia. | ||||
1023. | ||||
The chimneys of the castle of Pavia have 6 rows of openings and from | ||||
each to the other is one braccio. | ||||
[Footnote: Other notes relating to Pavia occur on p. 43 and p. 53 | ||||
(Pl. XCVIII, No. 3). Compare No. 1448, 26.] | ||||
Notes on the Sforzesca near Vigevano (1024-1028). | ||||
1024. | ||||
On the 2nd day of February 1494. At Sforzesca I drew twenty five | ||||
steps, 2/3 braccia to each, and 8 braccia wide. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CX, No. 2. The rest of the notes on this page | ||||
refer to the motion of water. On the lower sketch we read: 4 _br._ | ||||
(four braccia) and _giara_ (for _ghiaja_, sand, gravel).] | ||||
1025. | ||||
The vineyards of Vigevano on the 20th day of March 1494. | ||||
[Footnote: On one side there is an effaced sketch in red chalk.] | ||||
1026. | ||||
To lock up a butteris at Vigevano. | ||||
1027. | ||||
Again if the lowest part of the bank which lies across the current | ||||
of the waters is made in deep and wide steps, after the manner of | ||||
stairs, the waters which, in their course usually fall | ||||
perpendicularly from the top of such a place to the bottom, and wear | ||||
away the foundations of this bank can no longer descend with a blow | ||||
of too great a force; and I find the example of this in the stairs | ||||
down which the water falls in the fields at Sforzesca at Vigevano | ||||
over which the running water falls for a height of 50 braccia. | ||||
1028. | ||||
Stair of Vigevano below La Sforzesca, 130 steps, 1/4 braccio high | ||||
and 1/2 braccio wide, down which the water falls, so as not to wear | ||||
away anything at the end of its fall; by these steps so much soil | ||||
has come down that it has dried up a pool; that is to say it has | ||||
filled it up and a pool of great depth has been turned into meadows. | ||||
Notes on the North Italian lake. (1029-1033) | ||||
1029. | ||||
In many places there are streams of water which swell for six hours | ||||
and ebb for six hours; and I, for my part, have seen one above the | ||||
lake of Como called Fonte Pliniana, which increases and ebbs, as I | ||||
have said, in such a way as to turn the stones of two mills; and | ||||
when it fails it falls so low that it is like looking at water in a | ||||
deep pit. | ||||
[Footnote: The fountain is known by this name to this day: it is | ||||
near Torno, on the Eastern shore of Como. The waters still rise and | ||||
fall with the flow and ebb of the tide as Pliny described it (Epist. | ||||
IV, 30; Hist. Nat. II, 206).] | ||||
1030. | ||||
LAKE OF COMO. VALLEY OF CHIAVENNA. | ||||
Above the lake of Como towards Germany is the valley of Chiavenna | ||||
where the river Mera flows into this lake. Here are barren and very | ||||
high mountains, with huge rocks. Among these mountains are to be | ||||
found the water-birds called gulls. Here grow fir trees, larches and | ||||
pines. Deer, wildgoats, chamois, and terrible bears. It is | ||||
impossible to climb them without using hands and feet. The peasants | ||||
go there at the time of the snows with great snares to make the | ||||
bears fall down these rocks. These mountains which very closely | ||||
approach each other are parted by the river. They are to the right | ||||
and left for the distance of 20 miles throughout of the same nature. | ||||
>From mile to mile there are good inns. Above on the said river there | ||||
are waterfalls of 400 braccia in height, which are fine to see; and | ||||
there is good living at 4 soldi the reckoning. This river brings | ||||
down a great deal of timber. | ||||
VAL SASINA. | ||||
Val Sasina runs down towards Italy; this is almost the same form and | ||||
character. There grow here many _mappello_ and there are great ruins | ||||
and falls of water [Footnote 14: The meaning of _mappello_ is | ||||
unknown.]. | ||||
VALLEY OF INTROZZO. | ||||
This valley produces a great quantity of firs, pines and larches; | ||||
and from here Ambrogio Fereri has his timber brought down; at the | ||||
head of the Valtellina are the mountains of Bormio, terrible and | ||||
always covered with snow; marmots (?) are found there. | ||||
BELLAGGIO. | ||||
Opposite the castle Bellaggio there is the river Latte, which falls | ||||
from a height of more than 100 braccia from the source whence it | ||||
springs, perpendicularly, into the lake with an inconceivable roar | ||||
and noise. This spring flows only in August and September. | ||||
VALTELLINA. | ||||
Valtellina, as it is called, is a valley enclosed in high and | ||||
terrible mountains; it produces much strong wine, and there is so | ||||
much cattle that the natives conclude that more milk than wine grows | ||||
there. This is the valley through which the Adda passes, which first | ||||
runs more than 40 miles through Germany; this river breeds the fish | ||||
_temolo_ which live on silver, of which much is to be found in its | ||||
sands. In this country every one can sell bread and wine, and the | ||||
wine is worth at most one soldo the bottle and a pound of veal one | ||||
soldo, and salt ten dinari and butter the same and their pound is 30 | ||||
ounces, and eggs are one soldo the lot. | ||||
1031. | ||||
At BORMIO. | ||||
At Bormio are the baths;--About eight miles above Como is the | ||||
Pliniana, which increases and ebbs every six hours, and its swell | ||||
supplies water for two mills; and its ebbing makes the spring dry | ||||
up; two miles higher up there is Nesso, a place where a river falls | ||||
with great violence into a vast rift in the mountain. These | ||||
excursions are to be made in the month of May. And the largest bare | ||||
rocks that are to be found in this part of the country are the | ||||
mountains of Mandello near to those of Lecco, and of Gravidona | ||||
towards Bellinzona, 30 miles from Lecco, and those of the valley of | ||||
Chiavenna; but the greatest of all is that of Mandello, which has at | ||||
its base an opening towards the lake, which goes down 200 steps, and | ||||
there at all times is ice and wind. | ||||
IN VAL SASINA. | ||||
In Val Sasina, between Vimognio and Introbbio, to the right hand, | ||||
going in by the road to Lecco, is the river Troggia which falls from | ||||
a very high rock, and as it falls it goes underground and the river | ||||
ends there. 3 miles farther we find the buildings of the mines of | ||||
copper and silver near a place called Pra' Santo Pietro, and mines | ||||
of iron and curious things. La Grigna is the highest mountain there | ||||
is in this part, and it is quite bare. | ||||
[Footnote: 1030 and 1031. From the character of the handwriting we | ||||
may conclude that these observations were made in Leonardo's youth; | ||||
and I should infer from their contents, that they were notes made in | ||||
anticipation of a visit to the places here described, and derived | ||||
from some person (unknown to us) who had given him an account of | ||||
them.] | ||||
1032. | ||||
The lake of Pusiano flows into the lake of Segrino [Footnote 3: The | ||||
statement about the lake Segrino is incorrect; it is situated in the | ||||
Valle Assina, above the lake of Pusiano.] and of Annone and of Sala. | ||||
The lake of Annone is 22 braccia higher at the surface of its water | ||||
than the surface of the water of the lake of Lecco, and the lake of | ||||
Pusiano is 20 braccia higher than the lake of Annone, which added to | ||||
the afore said 22 braccia make 42 braccia and this is the greatest | ||||
height of the surface of the lake of Pusiano above the surface of | ||||
the lake of Lecco. | ||||
[Footnote: This text has in the original a slight sketch to | ||||
illustrate it.] | ||||
1033. | ||||
At Santa Maria in the Valley of Ravagnate [Footnote 2: _Ravagnate_ | ||||
(Leonardo writes _Ravagna_) in the Brianza is between Oggiono and | ||||
Brivio, South of the lake of Como. M. Ravaisson avails himself of | ||||
this note to prove his hypothesis that Leonardo paid two visits to | ||||
France. See Gazette des Beaux Arts, 1881 pag. 528: | ||||
_Au recto du meme feuillet, on lit encore une note relative a une | ||||
vallee "nemonti brigatia"; il me semble qu'il s'agit bien des monts | ||||
de Briancon, le Brigantio des anciens. Briancon est sur la route de | ||||
Lyon en Italie. Ce fut par le mont Viso que passerent, en aout 1515, | ||||
les troupes francaises qui allaient remporter la victoire de | ||||
Marignan. | ||||
Leonard de Vinci, ingenieur de Francois Ier, comme il l'avait ete de | ||||
Louis XII, aurait-il ete pour quelque chose dans le plan du celebre | ||||
passage des Alpes, qui eut lieu en aout 1515, et a la suite duquel | ||||
on le vit accompagner partout le chevaleresque vainqueur? Auraitil | ||||
ete appele par le jeune roi, de Rome ou l'artiste etait alors, des | ||||
son avenement au trone?_] in the mountains of Brianza are the rods | ||||
of chestnuts of 9 braccia and one out of an average of 100 will be | ||||
14 braccia. | ||||
At Varallo di Ponbia near to Sesto on the Ticino the quinces are | ||||
white, large and hard. | ||||
[Footnote 5: Varallo di Ponbia, about ten miles South of Arona is | ||||
distinct from Varallo the chief town in the Val di Sesia.] | ||||
Notes on places in Central Italy, visited in 1502 (1034-1054). | ||||
1034. | ||||
Pigeon-house at Urbino, the 30th day of July 1502. [Footnote: An | ||||
indistinct sketch is introduced with this text, in the original, in | ||||
which the word _Scolatoro_ (conduit) is written.] | ||||
1035. | ||||
Made by the sea at Piombino. [Footnote: Below the sketch there are | ||||
eleven lines of text referring to the motion of waves.] | ||||
1036. | ||||
Acquapendente is near Orvieto. [Footnote: _Acquapendente_ is about | ||||
10 miles West of Orvieto, and is to the right in the map on Pl. | ||||
CXIII, near the lake of Bolsena.] | ||||
1037. | ||||
The rock of Cesena. [Footnote: See Pl. XCIV No. 1, the lower sketch. | ||||
The explanation of the upper sketch is given on p. 29.] | ||||
1038. | ||||
Siena, _a b_ 4 braccia, _a c_ 10 braccia. Steps at [the castle of] | ||||
Urbino. [Footnote: See Pl. CX No. 3; compare also No. 765.] | ||||
1039. | ||||
The bell of Siena, that is the manner of its movement, and the place | ||||
of the attachment of the clapper. [Footnote: The text is accompanied | ||||
by an indistinct sketch.] | ||||
1040. | ||||
On St. Mary's day in the middle of August, at Cesena, 1502. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CX, No. 4.] | ||||
1041. | ||||
Stairs of the [palace of the] Count of Urbino,--rough. [Footnote: | ||||
The text is accompanied by a slight sketch.] | ||||
1042. | ||||
At the fair of San Lorenzo at Cesena. 1502. | ||||
1043. | ||||
Windows at Cesena. [Footnote: There are four more lines of text | ||||
which refer to a slightly sketched diagram.] | ||||
1044. | ||||
At Porto Cesenatico, on the 6th of September 1502 at 9 o'clock a. m. | ||||
The way in which bastions ought to project beyond the walls of the | ||||
towers to defend the outer talus; so that they may not be taken by | ||||
artillery. | ||||
[Footnote: An indistinct sketch, accompanies this passage.] | ||||
1045. | ||||
The rock of the harbour of Cesena is four points towards the South | ||||
West from Cesena. | ||||
1046. | ||||
In Romagna, the realm of all stupidity, vehicles with four wheels | ||||
are used, of which O the two in front are small and two high ones | ||||
are behind; an arrangement which is very unfavourable to the motion, | ||||
because on the fore wheels more weight is laid than on those behind, | ||||
as I showed in the first of the 5th on "Elements". | ||||
1047. | ||||
Thus grapes are carried at Cesena. The number of the diggers of the | ||||
ditches is [arranged] pyramidically. [Footnote: A sketch, | ||||
representing a hook to which two bunches of grapes are hanging, | ||||
refers to these first two lines. Cesena is mentioned again Fol. 82a: | ||||
_Carro da Cesena_ (a cart from Cesena).] | ||||
1048. | ||||
There might be a harmony of the different falls of water as you saw | ||||
them at the fountain of Rimini on the 8th day of August, 1502. | ||||
1049. | ||||
The fortress at Urbino. [Footnote: 1049. In the original the text is | ||||
written inside the sketch in the place here marked _n_.] | ||||
1050. | ||||
Imola, as regards Bologna, is five points from the West, towards the | ||||
North West, at a distance of 20 miles. | ||||
Castel San Piero is seen from Imola at four points from the West | ||||
towards the North West, at a distance of 7 miles. | ||||
Faenza stands with regard to Imola between East and South East at a | ||||
distance of ten miles. Forli stands with regard to Faenza between | ||||
South East and East at a distance of 20 miles from Imola and ten | ||||
from Faenza. | ||||
Forlimpopoli lies in the same direction at 25 miles from Imola. | ||||
Bertinoro, as regards Imola, is five points from the East to wards | ||||
the South East, at 27 miles. | ||||
1051. | ||||
Imola as regards Bologna is five points from the West towards the | ||||
North West at a distance of 20 miles. | ||||
Castel San Pietro lies exactly North West of Imola, at a distance of | ||||
7 miles. | ||||
Faenza, as regards Imola lies exactly half way between the East and | ||||
South East at a distance of 10 miles; and Forli lies in the same | ||||
direction from Imola at a distance of 20 miles; and Forlimpopolo | ||||
lies in the same direction from Forli at a distance of 25 miles. | ||||
Bertinoro is seen from Imola two points from the East towards the | ||||
South East at a distance of 27 miles. | ||||
[Footnote: Leonardo inserted this passage on the margin of the | ||||
circular plan, in water colour, of Imola--see Pl. CXI No. 1.--In the | ||||
original the fields surrounding the town are light green; the moat, | ||||
which surrounds the fortifications and the windings of the river | ||||
Santerno, are light blue. The parts, which have come out blackish | ||||
close to the river are yellow ochre in the original. The dark groups | ||||
of houses inside the town are red. At the four points of the compass | ||||
drawn in the middle of the town Leonardo has written (from right to | ||||
left): _Mezzodi_ (South) at the top; to the left _Scirocho_ (South | ||||
east), _levante_ (East), _Greco_ (North East), _Septantrione_ | ||||
(North), _Maesstro_ (North West), _ponente_ (West) _Libecco_ (South | ||||
West). The arch in which the plan is drawn is, in the original, 42 | ||||
centimetres across. | ||||
At the beginning of October 1502 Cesare Borgia was shut up in Imola | ||||
by a sudden revolt of the Condottieri, and it was some weeks before | ||||
he could release himself from this state of siege (see Gregorovius, | ||||
_Geschichte der Stadt Rom im Mittelalter_, Vol. VII, Book XIII, 5, | ||||
5). | ||||
Besides this incident Imola plays no important part in the history | ||||
of the time. I therefore think myself fully justified in connecting | ||||
this map, which is at Windsor, with the siege of 1502 and with | ||||
Leonardo's engagements in the service of Cesare Borgia, because a | ||||
comparison of these texts, Nos. 1050 and 1051, raise, I believe, the | ||||
hypothesis to a certainty.] | ||||
1052. | ||||
>From Bonconventi to Casa Nova are 10 miles, from Casa Nova to Chiusi | ||||
9 miles, from Chiusi to Perugia, from, Perugia to Santa Maria degli | ||||
Angeli, and then to Fuligno. [Footnote: Most of the places here | ||||
described lie within the district shown in the maps on Pl. CXIII.] | ||||
1053. | ||||
On the first of August 1502, the library at Pesaro. | ||||
1054. | ||||
OF PAINTING. | ||||
On the tops and sides of hills foreshorten the shape of the ground | ||||
and its divisions, but give its proper shape to what is turned | ||||
towards you. [Footnote: This passage evidently refers to the making | ||||
of maps, such as Pl. CXII, CXIII, and CXIV. There is no mention of | ||||
such works, it is true, excepting in this one passage of MS. L. But | ||||
this can scarcely be taken as evidence against my view that Leonardo | ||||
busied himself very extensively at that time in the construction of | ||||
maps; and all the less since the foregoing chapters clearly prove | ||||
that at a time so full of events Leonardo would only now and then | ||||
commit his observations to paper, in the MS. L. | ||||
By the side of this text we find, in the original, a very indistinct | ||||
sketch, perhaps a plan of a position. Instead of this drawing I have | ||||
here inserted a much clearer sketch of a position from the same MS., | ||||
L. 82b and 83a. They are the only drawings of landscape, it may be | ||||
noted, which occur at all in that MS.] | ||||
Alessandria in Piedmont (1055. 1056). | ||||
1055. | ||||
At Candia in Lombardy, near Alessandria della Paglia, in making a | ||||
well for Messer Gualtieri [Footnote 2: Messer Gualtieri, the same | ||||
probably as is mentioned in Nos. 672 and 1344.] of Candia, the | ||||
skeleton of a very large boat was found about 10 braccia | ||||
underground; and as the timber was black and fine, it seemed good to | ||||
the said Messer Gualtieri to have the mouth of the well lengthened | ||||
in such a way as that the ends of the boat should be uncovered. | ||||
1056. | ||||
At Alessandria della Paglia in Lombardy there are no stones for | ||||
making lime of, but such as are mixed up with an infinite variety of | ||||
things native to the sea, which is now more than 200 miles away. | ||||
The Alps (1057-1062). | ||||
1057. | ||||
At Monbracco, above Saluzzo,--a mile above the Certosa, at the foot | ||||
of Monte Viso, there is a quarry of flakey stone, which is as white | ||||
as Carrara marble, without a spot, and as hard as porphyry or even | ||||
harder; of which my worthy gossip, Master Benedetto the sculptor, | ||||
has promised to give me a small slab, for the colours, the second | ||||
day of January 1511. | ||||
[Footnote: Saluzzo at the foot of the Alps South of Turin.] | ||||
[Footnote 9. 10.: _Maestro Benedetto scultore_; probably some native | ||||
of Northern Italy acquainted with the place here described. Hardly | ||||
the Florentine sculptor Benedetto da Majano. Amoretti had published | ||||
this passage, and M. Ravaisson who gave a French translation of it | ||||
in the _Gazette des Beaux Arts_ (1881, pag. 528), remarks as | ||||
follows: _Le maitre sculpteur que Leonard appelle son "compare" ne | ||||
serait-il pas Benedetto da Majano, un de ceux qui jugerent avec lui | ||||
de la place a donner au David de Michel-Ange, et de qui le Louvre a | ||||
acquis recemment un buste d'apres Philippe Strozzi?_ To this it may | ||||
be objected that Benedetto da Majano had already lain in his grave | ||||
fourteen years, in the year 1511, when he is supposed to have given | ||||
the promise to Leonardo. The colours may have been given to the | ||||
sculptor Benedetto and the stone may have been in payment for them. | ||||
>From the description of the stone here given we may conclude that it | ||||
is repeated from hearsay of the sculptor's account of it. I do not | ||||
understand how, from this observation, it is possible to conclude | ||||
that Leonardo was on the spot.] | ||||
1058. | ||||
That there are springs which suddenly break forth in earthquakes or | ||||
other convulsions and suddenly fail; and this happened in a mountain | ||||
in Savoy where certain forests sank in and left a very deep gap, and | ||||
about four miles from here the earth opened itself like a gulf in | ||||
the mountain, and threw out a sudden and immense flood of water | ||||
which scoured the whole of a little valley of the tilled soil, | ||||
vineyards and houses, and did the greatest mischief, wherever it | ||||
overflowed. | ||||
1059. | ||||
The river Arve, a quarter of a mile from Geneva in Savoy, where the | ||||
fair is held on midsummerday in the village of Saint Gervais. | ||||
[Footnote: An indistinct sketch is to be seen by the text.] | ||||
1060. | ||||
And this may be seen, as I saw it, by any one going up Monbroso | ||||
[Footnote: I have vainly enquired of every available authority for a | ||||
solution of the mystery as to what mountain is intended by the name | ||||
Monboso (Comp. Vol. I Nos. 300 and 301). It seems most obvious to | ||||
refer it to Monte Rosa. ROSA derived from the Keltic ROS which | ||||
survives in Breton and in Gaelic, meaning, in its first sense, a | ||||
mountain spur, but which also--like HORN--means a very high peak; | ||||
thus Monte Rosa would mean literally the High Peak.], a peak of the | ||||
Alps which divide France from Italy. The base of this mountain gives | ||||
birth to the 4 rivers which flow in four different directions | ||||
through the whole of Europe. And no mountain has its base at so | ||||
great a height as this, which lifts itself above almost all the | ||||
clouds; and snow seldom falls there, but only hail in the summer, | ||||
when the clouds are highest. And this hail lies [unmelted] there, so | ||||
that if it were not for the absorption of the rising and falling | ||||
clouds, which does not happen more than twice in an age, an enormous | ||||
mass of ice would be piled up there by the layers of hail, and in | ||||
the middle of July I found it very considerable; and I saw the sky | ||||
above me quite dark, and the sun as it fell on the mountain was far | ||||
brighter here than in the plains below, because a smaller extent of | ||||
atmosphere lay between the summit of the mountain and the sun. | ||||
[Footnote 6: _in una eta._ This is perhaps a slip of the pen on | ||||
Leonardo's part and should be read _estate_ (summer).] | ||||
Leic. 9b] | ||||
1061. | ||||
In the mountains of Verona the red marble is found all mixed with | ||||
cockle shells turned into stone; some of them have been filled at | ||||
the mouth with the cement which is the substance of the stone; and | ||||
in some parts they have remained separate from the mass of the rock | ||||
which enclosed them, because the outer covering of the shell had | ||||
interposed and had not allowed them to unite with it; while in other | ||||
places this cement had petrified those which were old and almost | ||||
stripped the outer skin. | ||||
1062. | ||||
Bridge of Goertz-Wilbach (?). | ||||
[Footnote: There is a slight sketch with this text, Leonardo seems | ||||
to have intended to suggest, with a few pen-strokes, the course of | ||||
the Isonzo and of the Wipbach in the vicinity of Gorizia (Goerz). He | ||||
himself says in another place that he had been in Friuli (see No. | ||||
1077 1. 19).] | ||||
The Appenins (1063-1068). | ||||
1063. | ||||
That part of the earth which was lightest remained farthest from the | ||||
centre of the world; and that part of the earth became the lightest | ||||
over which the greatest quantity of water flowed. And therefore that | ||||
part became lightest where the greatest number of rivers flow; like | ||||
the Alps which divide Germany and France from Italy; whence issue | ||||
the Rhone flowing Southwards, and the Rhine to the North. The Danube | ||||
or Tanoia towards the North East, and the Po to the East, with | ||||
innumerable rivers which join them, and which always run turbid with | ||||
the soil carried by them to the sea. | ||||
The shores of the sea are constantly moving towards the middle of | ||||
the sea and displace it from its original position. The lowest | ||||
portion of the Mediterranean will be reserved for the bed and | ||||
current of the Nile, the largest river that flows into that sea. And | ||||
with it are grouped all its tributaries, which at first fell into | ||||
the sea; as may be seen with the Po and its tributaries, which first | ||||
fell into that sea, which between the Appenines and the German Alps | ||||
was united to the Adriatic sea. | ||||
That the Gallic Alps are the highest part of Europe. | ||||
1064. | ||||
And of these I found some in the rocks of the high Appenines and | ||||
mostly at the rock of La Vernia. [Footnote 6: _Sasso della Vernia._ | ||||
The frowning rock between the sources of the Arno and the Tiber, as | ||||
Dante describes this mountain, which is 1269 metres in height. | ||||
This note is written by the side of that given as No. 1020; but | ||||
their connection does not make it clear what Leonardo's purpose was | ||||
in writing it.] | ||||
1065. | ||||
At Parma, at 'La Campana' on the twenty-fifth of October 1514. | ||||
[Footnote 2: _Capano_, an Inn.] | ||||
A note on the petrifactions, or fossils near Parma will be found | ||||
under No. 989.] | ||||
1066. | ||||
A method for drying the marsh of Piombino. [Footnote: There is a | ||||
slight sketch with this text in the original.--Piombino is also | ||||
mentioned in Nos. 609, l. 55-58 (compare Pl. XXXV, 3, below). Also | ||||
in No. 1035.] | ||||
1067. | ||||
The shepherds in the Romagna at the foot of the Apennines make | ||||
peculiar large cavities in the mountains in the form of a horn, and | ||||
on one side they fasten a horn. This little horn becomes one and the | ||||
same with the said cavity and thus they produce by blowing into it a | ||||
very loud noise. [Footnote: As to the Romagna see also No. 1046.] | ||||
1068. | ||||
A spring may be seen to rise in Sicily which at certain times of the | ||||
year throws out chesnut leaves in quantities; but in Sicily chesnuts | ||||
do not grow, hence it is evident that that spring must issue from | ||||
some abyss in Italy and then flow beneath the sea to break forth in | ||||
Sicily. [Footnote: The chesnut tree is very common in Sicily. In | ||||
writing _cicilia_ Leonardo meant perhaps Cilicia.] | ||||
II. | ||||
FRANCE. | ||||
1069. | ||||
GERMANY. FRANCE. | ||||
a. Austria, a. Picardy. | ||||
b. Saxony. b. Normandy. | ||||
c. Nuremberg. c. Dauphine. | ||||
d. Flanders. | ||||
SPAIN. | ||||
a. Biscay. | ||||
b. Castille. | ||||
c. Galicia. | ||||
d. Portugal. | ||||
e. Taragona. | ||||
f. Granada. | ||||
[Footnote: Two slightly sketched maps, one of Europe the other of | ||||
Spain, are at the side of these notes.] | ||||
1070. | ||||
Perpignan. Roanne. Lyons. Paris. Ghent. Bruges. Holland. | ||||
[Footnote: _Roana_ does not seem to mean here Rouen in Normandy, but | ||||
is probably Roanne (Rodumna) on the upper Loire, Lyonnais (Dep. du | ||||
Loire). This town is now unimportant, but in Leonardo's time was | ||||
still a place of some consequence.] | ||||
1071. | ||||
At Bordeaux in Gascony the sea rises about 40 braccia before its | ||||
ebb, and the river there is filled with salt water for more than a | ||||
hundred and fifty miles; and the vessels which are repaired there | ||||
rest high and dry on a high hill above the sea at low tide. | ||||
[Footnote 2: This is obviously an exaggeration founded on inaccurate | ||||
information. Half of 150 miles would be nearer the mark.] | ||||
1072. | ||||
The Rhone issues from the lake of Geneva and flows first to the West | ||||
and then to the South, with a course of 400 miles and pours its | ||||
waters into the Mediterranean. | ||||
1073. | ||||
_c d_ is the garden at Blois; _a b_ is the conduit of Blois, made in | ||||
France by Fra Giocondo, _b c_ is what is wanting in the height of | ||||
that conduit, _c d_ is the height of the garden at Blois, _e f_ is | ||||
the siphon of the conduit, _b c_, _e f_, _f g_ is where the siphon | ||||
discharges into the river. [Footnote: The tenor of this note (see | ||||
lines 2 and 3) seems to me to indicate that this passage was not | ||||
written in France, but was written from oral information. We have no | ||||
evidence as to when this note may have been written beyond the | ||||
circumstance that Fra Giocondo the Veronese Architect left France | ||||
not before the year 1505. The greater part of the magnificent | ||||
Chateau of Blois has now disappeared. Whether this note was made for | ||||
a special purpose is uncertain. The original form and extent of the | ||||
Chateau is shown in Androvet, _Les plus excellents Bastiments de | ||||
France, Paris MDCVII,_ and it may be observed that there is in the | ||||
middle of the garden a Pavilion somewhat similar to that shown on | ||||
Pl. LXXXVIII No. 7. | ||||
See S. DE LA SAUSSAYE, _Histoire du Chateau de Blois 4eme edition | ||||
Blois et Paris_ p. 175: _En mariant sa fille ainee a Francois, comte | ||||
d'Angouleme, Louis XII lui avait constitue en dot les comtes de | ||||
Blois, d'Asti, de Coucy, de Montfort, d'Etampes et de Vertus. Une | ||||
ordonnance de Francois I. lui laissa en_ 1516 _l'administration du | ||||
comte de Blois. | ||||
Le roi fit commencer, dans la meme annee, les travaux de celle belle | ||||
partie du chateau, connue sous le nom d'aile de Francois I, et dont | ||||
nous avons donne la description au commencement de ce livre. Nous | ||||
trouvons en effet, dans les archives du Baron de Foursanvault, une | ||||
piece qui en fixe parfaitement la date. On y lit: "Je, Baymon | ||||
Philippeaux, commis par le Roy a tenir le compte et fair le payement | ||||
des bastiments, ediffices et reparacions que le dit seigneur fait | ||||
faire en son chastu de Blois, confesse avoir eu et receu ... la | ||||
somme de trois mille livres tournois ... le cinquieme jour de | ||||
juillet, l'an mil cinq cent et seize._ P. 24: _Les jardins avaient | ||||
ete decores avec beaucoup de luxe par les differents possesseurs du | ||||
chateau. Il ne reste de tous les batiments qu'ils y eleverent que | ||||
ceux des officiers charges de l'ad_ministration et de la culture des | ||||
jardins, et un pavilion carre en pierre et en brique flanque de | ||||
terrasses a chacun de ses angles. Quoique defigure par des mesures | ||||
elevees sur les terrasses, cet edifice est tris-digne d'interet par | ||||
l'originalite du plan, la decoration architecturale et le souvenir | ||||
d'Anne de Bretagne qui le fit construire._ Felibien describes the | ||||
garden as follows: _Le jardin haut etait fort bien dresse par grands | ||||
compartimens de toutes sortes de figures, avec des allees de | ||||
meuriers blancs et des palissades de coudriers. Deux grands berceaux | ||||
de charpenterie separoient toute la longueur et la largeur du | ||||
jardin, et dans les quatres angles des allees, ou ces berceaux se | ||||
croissent, il y auoit 4 cabinets, de mesme charpenterie ... Il y a | ||||
pas longtemps qu'il y auoit dans ce mesme jardin, a l'endroit ou se | ||||
croissent les allees du milieu, un edifice de figure octogone, de | ||||
plus de 7 thoises de diametre et de plus de neuf thoises de haut; | ||||
avec 4 enfoncements en forme de niches dans les 4 angles des allies. | ||||
Ce bastiment.... esloit de charpente mais d'un extraordinairement | ||||
bien travaille. On y voyait particulierement la cordiliere qui | ||||
regnati tout autour en forme de cordon. Car la Reyne affectait de la | ||||
mettre nonseulement a ses armes et a ses chiffres mais de la faire | ||||
representer en divers manieres dans tous les ouvrages qu'on lui | ||||
faisait pour elle ... le bastiment estati couvert en forme de dome | ||||
qui dans son milieu avait encore un plus petit dome, ou lanterne | ||||
vitree au-dessus de laquelle estait une figure doree representant | ||||
Saint Michel. Les deux domes estoient proprement couvert d'ardoise | ||||
et de plomb dore par dehors; par dedans ils esloient lambrissez | ||||
d'une menuiserie tres delicate. Au milieu de ce Salon il y avait un | ||||
grand bassin octogone de marbre blanc, dont toutes les faces | ||||
estoient enrichies de differentes sculptures, avec les armes et les | ||||
chiffres du Roy Louis XII et de la Reine Anne, Dans ce bassin il y | ||||
en avait un autre pose sur un piedestal lequel auoit sept piedz de | ||||
diametre. Il estait de figure ronde a godrons, avec des masques et | ||||
d'autres ornements tres scauamment taillez. Du milieu de ce | ||||
deuxiesme bassin s'y levoit un autre petit piedestal qui portait un | ||||
troisiesme bassin de trois pieds de diametre, aussy parfaitement | ||||
bien taille; c'estoit de ce dernier bassin que jallissoit l'eau qui | ||||
se rependoit en suitte dans les deux autres bassins. Les beaux | ||||
ouvrages faits d'un marbre esgalement blanc et poli, furent brisez | ||||
par la pesanteur de tout l'edifice, que les injures de l'air | ||||
renverserent de fond en comble.] | ||||
1074. | ||||
The river Loire at Amboise. | ||||
The river is higher within the bank _b d_ than outside that bank. | ||||
The island where there is a part of Amboise. | ||||
This is the river that passes through Amboise; it passes at _a b c | ||||
d_, and when it has passed the bridge it turns back, against the | ||||
original current, by the channel _d e_, _b f_ in contact with the | ||||
bank which lies between the two contrary currents of the said river, | ||||
_a b_, _c d_, and _d e_, _b f_. It then turns down again by the | ||||
channel _f l_, _g h_, _n m_, and reunites with the river from which | ||||
it was at first separated, which passes by _k n_, which makes _k m_, | ||||
_r t_. But when the river is very full it flows all in one channel | ||||
passing over the bank _b d_. [Footnote: See Pl. CXV. Lines 1-7 are | ||||
above, lines 8-10 in the middle of the large island and the word | ||||
_Isola_ is written above _d_ in the smaller island; _a_ is written | ||||
on the margin on the bank of the river above 1. I; in the | ||||
reproduction it is not visible. As may be seen from the last | ||||
sentence, the observation was made after long study of the river's | ||||
course, when Leonardo had resided for some time at, or near, | ||||
Amboise.] | ||||
1075. | ||||
The water may be dammed up above the level of Romorantin to such a | ||||
height, that in its fall it may be used for numerous mills. | ||||
1075. | ||||
The river at Villefranche may be conducted to Romorantin which may | ||||
be done by the inhabitants; and the timber of which their houses are | ||||
built may be carried in boats to Romorantin [Footnote: Compare No. | ||||
744.]. The river may be dammed up at such a height that the waters | ||||
may be brought back to Romorantin with a convenient fall. | ||||
1076. | ||||
As to whether it is better that the water should all be raised in a | ||||
single turn or in two? | ||||
The answer is that in one single turn the wheel could not support | ||||
all the water that it can raise in two turns, because at the half | ||||
turn of the wheel it would be raising 100 pounds and no more; and if | ||||
it had to raise the whole, 200 pounds in one turn, it could not | ||||
raise them unless the wheel were of double the diameter and if the | ||||
diameter were doubled, the time of its revolution would be doubled; | ||||
therefore it is better and a greater advantage in expense to make | ||||
such a wheel of half the size (?) the land which it would water and | ||||
would render the country fertile to supply food to the inhabitants, | ||||
and would make navigable canals for mercantile purposes. | ||||
The way in which the river in its flow should scour its own channel. | ||||
By the ninth of the third; the more rapid it is, the more it wears | ||||
away its channel; and, by the converse proposition, the slower the | ||||
water the more it deposits that which renders it turbid. | ||||
And let the sluice be movable like the one I arranged in Friuli | ||||
[Footnote 19: This passage reveals to us the fact that Leonardo had | ||||
visited the country of Friuli and that he had stayed there for some | ||||
time. Nothing whatever was known of this previously.], where when | ||||
one sluice was opened the water which passed through it dug out the | ||||
bottom. Therefore when the rivers are flooded, the sluices of the | ||||
mills ought to be opened in order that the whole course of the river | ||||
may pass through falls to each mill; there should be many in order | ||||
to give a greater impetus, and so all the river will be scoured. And | ||||
below the site of each of the two mills there may be one of the said | ||||
sluice falls; one of them may be placed below each mill. | ||||
1078. | ||||
A trabocco is four braccia, and one mile is three thousand of the | ||||
said braccia. Each braccio is divided into 12 inches; and the water | ||||
in the canals has a fall in every hundred trabocchi of two of these | ||||
inches; therefore 14 inches of fall are necessary in two thousand | ||||
eight hundred braccia of flow in these canals; it follows that 15 | ||||
inches of fall give the required momentum to the currents of the | ||||
waters in the said canals, that is one braccio and a half in the | ||||
mile. And from this it may be concluded that the water taken from | ||||
the river of Ville-franche and lent to the river of Romorantin | ||||
will..... Where one river by reason of its low level cannot flow | ||||
into the other, it will be necessary to dam it up, so that it may | ||||
acquire a fall into the other, which was previously the higher. | ||||
The eve of Saint Antony I returned from Romorantin to Amboise, and | ||||
the King went away two days before from Romorantin. | ||||
>From Romorantin as far as the bridge at Saudre it is called the | ||||
Saudre, and from that bridge as far as Tours it is called the Cher. | ||||
I would test the level of that channel which is to lead from the | ||||
Loire to Romorantin, with a channel one braccio wide and one braccio | ||||
deep. | ||||
[Footnote: Lines 6-18 are partly reproduced in the facsimile on p. | ||||
254, and the whole of lines 19-25. | ||||
The following names are written along the rivers on the larger | ||||
sketch, _era f_ (the Loire) _scier f_ (the Cher) three times. _Pote | ||||
Sodro_ (bridge of the Soudre). _Villa francha_ (Villefranche) | ||||
_banco_ (sandbank) _Sodro_ (Soudre). The circle below shows the | ||||
position of Romorantin. The words '_orologio del sole_' written | ||||
below do not belong to the map of the rivers. The following names | ||||
are written by the side of the smaller sketch-map:--_tors_ (Tours), | ||||
_Abosa_ (Amboise) _bres_--for Bles (Blois) _mo rica_ (Montrichard). | ||||
_Lione_ (Lyons). This map was also published in the 'Saggio' | ||||
(Milano, 1872) Pl. XXII, and the editors remark: _Forse la linia | ||||
retta che va da Amboise a Romorantin segna l'andamento proposto d'un | ||||
Canale, che poi rembra prolungarsi in giu fin dove sta scritto | ||||
Lione._ | ||||
M. Ravaisson has enlarged on this idea in the Gazette des Beaux Arts | ||||
(1881 p. 530): _Les traces de Leonard permettent d'entrevoir que le | ||||
canal commencant soit aupres de Tours, soit aupres de Blois et | ||||
passant par Romorantin, avec port d'embarquement a Villefranche, | ||||
devait, au dela de Bourges, traverser l'Allier au-dessous des | ||||
affluents de la Dore et de la Sioule, aller par Moulins jusqu' a | ||||
Digoin; enfin, sur l'autre rive de la Loire, depasser les monts du | ||||
Charolais et rejoindre la Saone aupres de Macon._ It seems to me | ||||
rash, however, to found so elaborate an hypothesis on these sketches | ||||
of rivers. The slight stroke going to _Lione_ is perhaps only an | ||||
indication of the direction.--With regard to the Loire compare also | ||||
No. 988. l. 38.] | ||||
1079. | ||||
THE ROAD TO ORLEANS | ||||
At 1/4 from the South to the South East. At 1/3 from the South to | ||||
the South East. At 1/4 from the South to the South East. At 1/5 from | ||||
the South to the South East. Between the South West and South, to | ||||
the East bearing to the South; from the South towards the East 1/8; | ||||
thence to the West, between the South and South West; at the South. | ||||
[Footnote: The meaning is obscure; a more important passage | ||||
referring to France is to be found under No. 744] | ||||
On the Germans (1080. 1081). | ||||
1080. | ||||
The way in which the Germans closing up together cross and | ||||
interweave their broad leather shields against the enemy, stooping | ||||
down and putting one of the ends on the ground while they hold the | ||||
rest in their hand. [Footnote: Above the text is a sketch of a few | ||||
lines crossing each other and the words _de ponderibus_. The meaning | ||||
of the passage is obscure.] | ||||
1081. | ||||
The Germans are wont to annoy a garrison with the smoke of feathers, | ||||
sulphur and realgar, and they make this smoke last 7 or 8 hours. | ||||
Likewise the husks of wheat make a great and lasting smoke; and also | ||||
dry dung; but this must be mixed with olive husks, that is olives | ||||
pressed for oil and from which the oil has been extracted. | ||||
[Footnote: There is with this passage a sketch of a round tower | ||||
shrouded in smoke.] | ||||
The Danube. | ||||
1082. | ||||
That the valleys were formerly in great part covered by lakes the | ||||
soil of which always forms the banks of rivers,--and by seas, which | ||||
afterwards, by the persistent wearing of the rivers, cut through the | ||||
mountains and the wandering courses of the rivers carried away the | ||||
other plains enclosed by the mountains; and the cutting away of the | ||||
mountains is evident from the strata in the rocks, which correspond | ||||
in their sections as made by the courses of the rivers [Footnote 4: | ||||
_Emus_, the Balkan; _Dardania_, now Servia.], The Haemus mountains | ||||
which go along Thrace and Dardania and join the Sardonius mountains | ||||
which, going on to the westward change their name from Sardus to | ||||
Rebi, as they come near Dalmatia; then turning to the West cross | ||||
Illyria, now called Sclavonia, changing the name of Rebi to Albanus, | ||||
and going on still to the West, they change to Mount Ocra in the | ||||
North; and to the South above Istria they are named Caruancas; and | ||||
to the West above Italy they join the Adula, where the Danube rises | ||||
[8], which stretches to the East and has a course of 1500 miles; its | ||||
shortest line is about l000 miles, and the same or about the same is | ||||
that branch of the Adula mountains changed as to their name, as | ||||
before mentioned. To the North are the Carpathians, closing in the | ||||
breadth of the valley of the Danube, which, as I have said extends | ||||
eastward, a length of about 1000 miles, and is sometimes 200 and in | ||||
some places 300 miles wide; and in the midst flows the Danube, the | ||||
principal river of Europe as to size. The said Danube runs through | ||||
the middle of Austria and Albania and northwards through Bavaria, | ||||
Poland, Hungary, Wallachia and Bosnia and then the Danube or Donau | ||||
flows into the Black Sea, which formerly extended almost to Austria | ||||
and occupied the plains through which the Danube now courses; and | ||||
the evidence of this is in the oysters and cockle shells and | ||||
scollops and bones of great fishes which are still to be found in | ||||
many places on the sides of those mountains; and this sea was formed | ||||
by the filling up of the spurs of the Adula mountains which then | ||||
extended to the East joining the spurs of the Taurus which extend to | ||||
the West. And near Bithynia the waters of this Black Sea poured into | ||||
the Propontis [Marmora] falling into the Aegean Sea, that is the | ||||
Mediterranean, where, after a long course, the spurs of the Adula | ||||
mountains became separated from those of the Taurus. The Black Sea | ||||
sank lower and laid bare the valley of the Danube with the above | ||||
named countries, and the whole of Asia Minor beyond the Taurus range | ||||
to the North, and the plains from mount Caucasus to the Black Sea to | ||||
the West, and the plains of the Don this side--that is to say, at | ||||
the foot of the Ural mountains. And thus the Black Sea must have | ||||
sunk about 1000 braccia to uncover such vast plains. | ||||
[Footnote 8: _Danubio_, in the original _Reno_; evidently a mistake | ||||
as we may infer from _come dissi_ l. 10 &c.] | ||||
III. | ||||
THE COUNTRIES OF THE WESTERN END OF THE MEDITERRANEAN. | ||||
The straits of Gibraltar (1083-1085). | ||||
1083. | ||||
WHY THE SEA MAKES A STRONGER CURRENT IN THE STRAITS OF SPAIN THAN | ||||
ELSEWHERE. | ||||
A river of equal depth runs with greater speed in a narrow space | ||||
than in a wide one, in proportion to the difference between the | ||||
wider and the narrower one. | ||||
This proposition is clearly proved by reason confirmed by | ||||
experiment. Supposing that through a channel one mile wide there | ||||
flows one mile in length of water; where the river is five miles | ||||
wide each of the 5 square miles will require 1/5 of itself to be | ||||
equal to the square mile of water required in the sea, and where the | ||||
river is 3 miles wide each of these square miles will require the | ||||
third of its volume to make up the amount of the square mile of the | ||||
narrow part; as is demonstrated in _f g h_ at the mile marked _n_. | ||||
[Footnote: In the place marked A in the diagram _Mare Mediterano_ | ||||
(Mediterranean Sea) is written in the original. And at B, _stretto | ||||
di Spugna_ (straits of Spain, _i.e._ Gibraltar). Compare No. 960.] | ||||
1084. | ||||
WHY THE CURRENT OF GIBRALTAR IS ALWAYS GREATER TO THE WEST THAN TO | ||||
THE EAST. | ||||
The reason is that if you put together the mouths of the rivers | ||||
which discharge into the Mediterranean sea, you would find the sum | ||||
of water to be larger than that which this sea pours through the | ||||
straits into the ocean. You see Africa discharging its rivers that | ||||
run northwards into this sea, and among them the Nile which runs | ||||
through 3000 miles of Africa; there is also the Bagrada river and | ||||
the Schelif and others. [Footnote 5: _Bagrada_ (Leonardo writes | ||||
Bragada) in Tunis, now Medscherda; _Mavretano_, now Schelif.] | ||||
Likewise Europe pours into it the Don and the Danube, the Po, the | ||||
Rhone, the Arno, and the Tiber, so that evidently these rivers, with | ||||
an infinite number of others of less fame, make its great breadth | ||||
and depth and current; and the sea is not wider than 18 miles at the | ||||
most westerly point of land where it divides Europe from Africa. | ||||
1085. | ||||
The gulf of the Mediterranean, as an inland sea, received the | ||||
principal waters of Africa, Asia and Europe that flowed towards it; | ||||
and its waters came up to the foot of the mountains that surrounded | ||||
it and made its shores. And the summits of the Apennines stood up | ||||
out of this sea like islands, surrounded by salt water. Africa | ||||
again, behind its Atlas mountains did not expose uncovered to the | ||||
sky the surface of its vast plains about 3000 miles in length, and | ||||
Memphis [Footnote 6: _Mefi._ Leonardo can only mean here the citadel | ||||
of Cairo on the Mokattam hills.] was on the shores of this sea, and | ||||
above the plains of Italy, where now birds fly in flocks, fish were | ||||
wont to wander in large shoals. | ||||
1086. | ||||
Tunis. | ||||
The greatest ebb made anywhere by the Mediterranean is above Tunis, | ||||
being about two and a half braccia and at Venice it falls two | ||||
braccia. In all the rest of the Mediterranean sea the fall is little | ||||
or none. | ||||
1087. | ||||
Libya. | ||||
Describe the mountains of shifting deserts; that is to say the | ||||
formation of waves of sand borne by the wind, and of its mountains | ||||
and hills, such as occur in Libya. Examples may be seen on the wide | ||||
sands of the Po and the Ticino, and other large rivers. | ||||
1088. | ||||
Majorca. | ||||
Circumfulgore is a naval machine. It was an invention of the men of | ||||
Majorca. [Footnote: The machine is fully described in the MS. and | ||||
shown in a sketch.] | ||||
1089. | ||||
The Tyrrhene Sea. | ||||
Some at the Tyrrhene sea employ this method; that is to say they | ||||
fastened an anchor to one end of the yard, and to the other a cord, | ||||
of which the lower end was fastened to an anchor; and in battle they | ||||
flung this anchor on to the oars of the opponent's boat and by the | ||||
use of a capstan drew it to the side; and threw soft soap and tow, | ||||
daubed with pitch and set ablaze, on to that side where the anchor | ||||
hung; so that in order to escape that fire, the defenders of that | ||||
ship had to fly to the opposite side; and in doing this they aided | ||||
to the attack, because the galley was more easily drawn to the side | ||||
by reason of the counterpoise. [Footnote: This text is illustrated | ||||
in the original by a pen and ink sketch.] | ||||
IV. | ||||
THE LEVANT. | ||||
The Levantine Sea. | ||||
1090. | ||||
On the shores of the Mediterranean 300 rivers flow, and 40, 200 | ||||
ports. And this sea is 3000 miles long. Many times has the increase | ||||
of its waters, heaped up by their backward flow and the blowing of | ||||
the West winds, caused the overflow of the Nile and of the rivers | ||||
which flow out through the Black Sea, and have so much raised the | ||||
seas that they have spread with vast floods over many countries. And | ||||
these floods take place at the time when the sun melts the snows on | ||||
the high mountains of Ethiopia that rise up into the cold regions of | ||||
the air; and in the same way the approach of the sun acts on the | ||||
mountains of Sarmatia in Asia and on those in Europe; so that the | ||||
gathering together of these three things are, and always have been, | ||||
the cause of tremendous floods: that is, the return flow of the sea | ||||
with the West wind and the melting of the snows. So every river will | ||||
overflow in Syria, in Samaria, in Judea between Sinai and the | ||||
Lebanon, and in the rest of Syria between the Lebanon and the Taurus | ||||
mountains, and in Cilicia, in the Armenian mountains, and in | ||||
Pamphilia and in Lycia within the hills, and in Egypt as far as the | ||||
Atlas mountains. The gulf of Persia which was formerly a vast lake | ||||
of the Tigris and discharged into the Indian Sea, has now worn away | ||||
the mountains which formed its banks and laid them even with the | ||||
level of the Indian ocean. And if the Mediterranean had continued | ||||
its flow through the gulf of Arabia, it would have done the same, | ||||
that is to say, would have reduced the level of the Mediterranean to | ||||
that of the Indian Sea. | ||||
The Red Sea. (1091. 1092). | ||||
1091. | ||||
For a long time the water of the Mediterranean flowed out through | ||||
the Red Sea, which is 100 miles wide and 1500 long, and full of | ||||
reefs; and it has worn away the sides of Mount Sinai, a fact which | ||||
testifies, not to an inundation from the Indian sea beating on these | ||||
coasts, but to a deluge of water which carried with it all the | ||||
rivers which abound round the Mediterranean, and besides this there | ||||
is the reflux of the sea; and then, a cutting being made to the West | ||||
3000 miles away from this place, Gibraltar was separated from Ceuta, | ||||
which had been joined to it. And this passage was cut very low down, | ||||
in the plains between Gibraltar and the ocean at the foot of the | ||||
mountain, in the low part, aided by the hollowing out of some | ||||
valleys made by certain rivers, which might have flowed here. | ||||
Hercules [Footnote 9: Leonardo seems here to mention Hercules half | ||||
jestingly and only in order to suggest to the reader an allusion to | ||||
the legend of the pillars of Hercules.] came to open the sea to the | ||||
westward and then the sea waters began to pour into the Western | ||||
Ocean; and in consequence of this great fall, the Red Sea remained | ||||
the higher; whence the water, abandoning its course here, ever after | ||||
poured away through the Straits of Spain. | ||||
1092. | ||||
The surface of the Red Sea is on a level with the ocean. | ||||
A mountain may have fallen and closed the mouth of the Red Sea and | ||||
prevented the outlet of the Mediterranean, and the Mediterranean Sea | ||||
thus overfilled had for outlet the passage below the mountains of | ||||
Gades; for, in our own times a similar thing has been seen [Footnote | ||||
6: Compare also No. 1336, ll. 30, 35 and 36.-- Paolo Giovio, the | ||||
celebrated historian (born at Como in 1483) reports that in 1513 at | ||||
the foot of the Alps, above Bellinzona, on the road to Switzerland, | ||||
a mountain fell with a very great noise, in consequence of an | ||||
earthquake, and that the mass of rocks, which fell on the left | ||||
(Western) side blocked the river Breno (T. I p. 218 and 345 of D. | ||||
Sauvage's French edition, quoted in ALEXIS PERCY, _Memoire des | ||||
tremblements de terre de la peninsule italique; Academie Royale de | ||||
Belgique._ T. XXII).--]; a mountain fell seven miles across a valley | ||||
and closed it up and made a lake. And thus most lakes have been made | ||||
by mountains, as the lake of Garda, the lakes of Como and Lugano, | ||||
and the Lago Maggiore. The Mediterranean fell but little on the | ||||
confines of Syria, in consequence of the Gaditanean passage, but a | ||||
great deal in this passage, because before this cutting was made the | ||||
Mediterranean sea flowed to the South East, and then the fall had to | ||||
be made by its run through the Straits of Gades. | ||||
At _a_ the water of the Mediterranean fell into the ocean. | ||||
All the plains which lie between the sea and mountains were formerly | ||||
covered with salt water. | ||||
Every valley has been made by its own river; and the proportion | ||||
between valleys is the same as that between river and river. | ||||
The greatest river in our world is the Mediterranean river, which | ||||
moves from the sources of the Nile to the Western ocean. | ||||
And its greatest height is in Outer Mauritania and it has a course | ||||
of ten thousand miles before it reunites with its ocean, the father | ||||
of the waters. | ||||
That is 3000 miles for the Mediterranean, 3000 for the Nile, as far | ||||
as discovered and 3000 for the Nile which flows to the East, &c. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CXI 2, a sketch of the shores of the | ||||
Mediterranean Sea, where lines 11 to 16 may be seen. The large | ||||
figures 158 are not in Leonardo's writing. The character of the | ||||
writing leads us to conclude that this text was written later than | ||||
the foregoing. A slight sketch of the Mediterranean is also to be | ||||
found in MS. I', 47a.] | ||||
The Nile (1093-1098). | ||||
1093. | ||||
Therefore we must conclude those mountains to be of the greatest | ||||
height, above which the clouds falling in snow give rise to the | ||||
Nile. | ||||
1094. | ||||
The Egyptians, the Ethiopians, and the Arabs, in crossing the Nile | ||||
with camels, are accustomed to attach two bags on the sides of the | ||||
camel's bodies that is skins in the form shown underneath. | ||||
In these four meshes of the net the camels for baggage place their | ||||
feet. | ||||
[Footnote: Unfortunately both the sketches which accompany this | ||||
passage are too much effaced to be reproduced. The upper represents | ||||
the two sacks joined by ropes, as here described, the other shows | ||||
four camels with riders swimming through a river.] | ||||
1095. | ||||
The Tigris passes through Asia Minor and brings with it the water of | ||||
three lakes, one after the other of various elevations; the first | ||||
being Munace and the middle Pallas and the lowest Triton. And the | ||||
Nile again springs from three very high lakes in Ethiopia, and runs | ||||
northwards towards the sea of Egypt with a course of 4000 miles, and | ||||
by the shortest and straightest line it is 3000 miles. It is said | ||||
that it issues from the Mountains of the Moon, and has various | ||||
unknown sources. The said lakes are about 4000 braccia above the | ||||
surface of the sphere of water, that is 1 mile and 1/3, giving to | ||||
the Nile a fall of 1 braccia in every mile. | ||||
[Footnote 5: _Incogniti principio._ The affluents of the lakes are | ||||
probably here intended. Compare, as to the Nile, Nos. 970, 1063 and | ||||
1084.] | ||||
1096. | ||||
Very many times the Nile and other very large rivers have poured out | ||||
their whole element of water and restored it to the sea. | ||||
1097. | ||||
Why does the inundation of the Nile occur in the summer, coming from | ||||
torrid countries? | ||||
1098. | ||||
It is not denied that the Nile is constantly muddy in entering the | ||||
Egyptian sea and that its turbidity is caused by soil that this | ||||
river is continually bringing from the places it passes; which soil | ||||
never returns in the sea which receives it, unless it throws it on | ||||
its shores. You see the sandy desert beyond Mount Atlas where | ||||
formerly it was covered with salt water. | ||||
Customs of Asiatic Nations (1099. 1100). | ||||
1099. | ||||
The Assyrians and the people of Euboea accustom their horses to | ||||
carry sacks which they can at pleasure fill with air, and which in | ||||
case of need they carry instead of the girth of the saddle above and | ||||
at the side, and they are well covered with plates of cuir bouilli, | ||||
in order that they may not be perforated by flights of arrows. Thus | ||||
they have not on their minds their security in flight, when the | ||||
victory is uncertain; a horse thus equipped enables four or five men | ||||
to cross over at need. | ||||
1100. | ||||
SMALL BOATS. | ||||
The small boats used by the Assyrians were made of thin laths of | ||||
willow plaited over rods also of willow, and bent into the form of a | ||||
boat. They were daubed with fine mud soaked with oil or with | ||||
turpentine, and reduced to a kind of mud which resisted the water | ||||
and because pine would split; and always remained fresh; and they | ||||
covered this sort of boats with the skins of oxen in safely crossing | ||||
the river Sicuris of Spain, as is reported by Lucant; [Footnote 7: | ||||
See Lucan's Pharsalia IV, 130: _Utque habuit ripas Sicoris camposque | ||||
reliquit, Primum cana salix madefacto vimine parvam Texitur in | ||||
puppim, calsoque inducto juvenco Vectoris patiens tumidum supernatat | ||||
amnem. Sic Venetus stagnante Pado, fusoque Britannus Navigat oceano, | ||||
sic cum tenet omnia Nilus, Conseritur bibula Memphitis cymbo papyro. | ||||
His ratibus transjecta manus festinat utrimque Succisam cavare nemus | ||||
] | ||||
The Spaniards, the Scythians and the Arabs, when they want to make a | ||||
bridge in haste, fix hurdlework made of willows on bags of ox-hide, | ||||
and so cross in safety. | ||||
Rhodes (1101. 1102). | ||||
1101. | ||||
In [fourteen hundred and] eighty nine there was an earthquake in the | ||||
sea of Atalia near Rhodes, which opened the sea--that is its | ||||
bottom--and into this opening such a torrent of water poured that | ||||
for more than three hours the bottom of the sea was uncovered by | ||||
reason of the water which was lost in it, and then it closed to the | ||||
former level. | ||||
[Footnote: _Nello ottanto_ 9. It is scarcely likely that Leonardo | ||||
should here mean 89 AD. Dr. H. MULLER- STRUBING writes to me as | ||||
follows on this subject: "With reference to Rhodes Ross says (_Reise | ||||
auf den Griechischen Inseln, III_ 70 _ff_. 1840), that ancient | ||||
history affords instances of severe earthquakes at Rhodes, among | ||||
others one in the second year of the 138th Olympiad=270 B. C.; a | ||||
remarkably violent one under Antoninus Pius (A. D. 138-161) and | ||||
again under Constantine and later. But Leonardo expressly speaks of | ||||
an earthquake "_nel mar di Atalia presso a Rodi_", which is | ||||
singular. The town of Attalia, founded by Attalus, which is what he | ||||
no doubt means, was in Pamphylia and more than 150 English miles | ||||
East of Rhodes in a straight line. Leake and most other geographers | ||||
identify it with the present town of Adalia. Attalia is rarely | ||||
mentioned by the ancients, indeed only by Strabo and Pliny and no | ||||
earthquake is spoken of. I think therefore you are justified in | ||||
assuming that Leonardo means 1489". In the elaborate catalogue of | ||||
earthquakes in the East by Sciale Dshelal eddin Sayouthy (an | ||||
unpublished Arabic MS. in the possession of Prof. SCHEFER, (Membre | ||||
de l'Institut, Paris) mention is made of a terrible earthquake in | ||||
the year 867 of the Mohamedan Era corresponding to the year 1489, | ||||
and it is there stated that a hundred persons were killed by it in | ||||
the fortress of Kerak. There are three places of this name. Kerak on | ||||
the sea of Tiberias, Kerak near Tahle on the Libanon, which I | ||||
visited in the summer of l876--but neither of these is the place | ||||
alluded to. Possibly it may be the strongly fortified town of | ||||
Kerak=Kir Moab, to the West of the Dead Sea. There is no notice | ||||
about this in ALEXIS PERCY, _Memoire sur les tremblements de terres | ||||
ressentis dans la peninsule turco- hellenique et en Syrie (Memoires | ||||
couronnes et memoires des savants etrangers, Academie Royale de | ||||
Belgique, Tome XXIII)._] | ||||
1102. | ||||
Rhodes has in it 5000 houses. | ||||
Cyprus (1103. 1104). | ||||
1103. | ||||
SITE FOR [A TEMPLE OF] VENUS. | ||||
You must make steps on four sides, by which to mount to a meadow | ||||
formed by nature at the top of a rock which may be hollowed out and | ||||
supported in front by pilasters and open underneath in a large | ||||
portico, | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. LXXXIII. Compare also p. 33 of this Vol. The | ||||
standing male figure at the side is evidently suggested by Michael | ||||
Angelo's David. On the same place a slight sketch of horses seems to | ||||
have been drawn first; there is no reason for assuming that the text | ||||
and this sketch, which have no connection with each other, are of | ||||
the same date. | ||||
_Sito di Venere._ By this heading Leonardo appears to mean Cyprus, | ||||
which was always considered by the ancients to be the home and birth | ||||
place of Aphrodite (Kirpic in Homer).] | ||||
in which the water may fall into various vases of granite, | ||||
porphyryand serpentine, within semi-circular recesses; and the water | ||||
may overflow from these. And round this portico towards the North | ||||
there should be a lake with a little island in the midst of which | ||||
should be a thick and shady wood; the waters at the top of the | ||||
pilasters should pour into vases at their base, from whence they | ||||
should flow in little channels. | ||||
Starting from the shore of Cilicia towards the South you discover | ||||
the beauties of the island of Cyprus. | ||||
The Caspian Sea (1105. 1106). | ||||
1104. | ||||
>From the shore of the Southern coast of Cilicia may be seen to the | ||||
South the beautiful island of Cyprus, which was the realm of the | ||||
goddess Venus, and many navigators being attracted by her beauty, | ||||
had their ships and rigging broken amidst the reefs, surrounded by | ||||
the whirling waters. Here the beauty of delightful hills tempts | ||||
wandering mariners to refresh themselves amidst their flowery | ||||
verdure, where the winds are tempered and fill the island and the | ||||
surrounding seas with fragrant odours. Ah! how many a ship has here | ||||
been sunk. Ah! how many a vessel broken on these rocks. Here might | ||||
be seen barks without number, some wrecked and half covered by the | ||||
sand; others showing the poop and another the prow, here a keel and | ||||
there the ribs; and it seems like a day of judgment when there | ||||
should be a resurrection of dead ships, so great is the number of | ||||
them covering all the Northern shore; and while the North gale makes | ||||
various and fearful noises there. | ||||
1105. | ||||
Write to Bartolomeo the Turk as to the flow and ebb of the Black | ||||
sea, and whether he is aware if there be such a flow and ebb in the | ||||
Hyrcanean or Caspian sea. [Footnote: The handwriting of this note | ||||
points to a late date.] | ||||
1106. | ||||
WHY WATER IS FOUND AT THE TOP OF MOUNTAINS. | ||||
>From the straits of Gibraltar to the Don is 3500 miles, that is one | ||||
mile and 1/6, giving a fall of one braccio in a mile to any water | ||||
that moves gently. The Caspian sea is a great deal higher; and none | ||||
of the mountains of Europe rise a mile above the surface of our | ||||
seas; therefore it might be said that the water which is on the | ||||
summits of our mountains might come from the height of those seas, | ||||
and of the rivers which flow into them, and which are still higher. | ||||
The sea of Azov. | ||||
1107. | ||||
Hence it follows that the sea of Azov is the highest part of the | ||||
Mediterranean sea, being at a distance of 3500 miles from the | ||||
Straits of Gibraltar, as is shown by the map for navigation; and it | ||||
has 3500 braccia of descent, that is, one mile and 1/6; therefore it | ||||
is higher than any mountains which exist in the West. | ||||
[Footnote: The passage before this, in the original, treats of the | ||||
exit of the waters from Lakes in general.] | ||||
The Dardanelles. | ||||
1108. | ||||
In the Bosphorus the Black Sea flows always into the Egean sea, and | ||||
the Egean sea never flows into it. And this is because the Caspian, | ||||
which is 400 miles to the East, with the rivers which pour into it, | ||||
always flows through subterranean caves into this sea of Pontus; and | ||||
the Don does the same as well as the Danube, so that the waters of | ||||
Pontus are always higher than those of the Egean; for the higher | ||||
always fall towards the lower, and never the lower towards the | ||||
higher. | ||||
Constantinople. | ||||
1109. | ||||
The bridge of Pera at Constantinople, 40 braccia wide, 70 braccia | ||||
high above the water, 600 braccia long; that is 400 over the sea and | ||||
200 on the land, thus making its own abutments. | ||||
[Footnote: See Pl. CX No. 1. In 1453 by order of Sultan Mohamed II. | ||||
the Golden Horn was crossed by a pontoon bridge laid on barrels (see | ||||
Joh. Dukas' History of the Byzantine Empire XXXVIII p. 279). --The | ||||
biographers of Michelangelo, Vasari as well as Condivi, relate that | ||||
at the time when Michelangelo suddenly left Rome, in 1506, he | ||||
entertained some intention of going to Constantinople, there to | ||||
serve the Sultan, who sought to engage him, by means of certain | ||||
Franciscan Monks, for the purpose of constructing a bridge to | ||||
connect Constantinople with Pera. See VASARI, _Vite_ (ed. Sansoni | ||||
VII, 168): _Michelangelo, veduto questa furia del papa, dubitando di | ||||
lui, ebbe, secondo che si dice, voglia di andarsene in | ||||
Gostantinopoli a servire il Turco, per mezzo di certi frati di San | ||||
Francesco, che desiderava averlo per fare un ponte che passassi da | ||||
Gostantinopoli a Pera._ And CONDIVI, _Vita di M. Buonaroti chap._ | ||||
30_; Michelangelo allora vedendosi condotto a questo, temendo | ||||
dell'ira del papa, penso d'andarsene in Levante; massimamente | ||||
essendo stato dal Turco ricercato con grandissime promesse per mezzo | ||||
di certi frati di San Francesco, per volersene servire in fare un | ||||
ponte da Costantinopoli a Pera ed in altri affari._ Leonardo's plan | ||||
for this bridge was made in 1502. We may therefore conclude that at | ||||
about that time the Sultan Bajazet II. had either announced a | ||||
competition in this matter, or that through his agents Leonardo had | ||||
first been called upon to carry out the scheme.] | ||||
The Euphrates. | ||||
1110. | ||||
If the river will turn to the rift farther on it will never return | ||||
to its bed, as the Euphrates does, and this may do at Bologna the | ||||
one who is disappointed for his rivers. | ||||
Centrae Asia. | ||||
1111. | ||||
Mounts Caucasus, Comedorum, and Paropemisidae are joined together | ||||
between Bactria and India, and give birth to the river Oxus which | ||||
takes its rise in these mountains and flows 500 miles towards the | ||||
North and as many towards the West, and discharges its waters into | ||||
the Caspian sea; and is accompanied by the Oxus, Dargados, Arthamis, | ||||
Xariaspes, Dargamaim, Ocus and Margus, all very large rivers. From | ||||
the opposite side towards the South rises the great river Indus | ||||
which sends its waters for 600 miles Southwards and receives as | ||||
tributaries in this course the rivers Xaradrus, Hyphasis, Vadris, | ||||
Vandabal Bislaspus to the East, Suastes and Coe to the West, uniting | ||||
with these rivers, and with their waters it flows 800 miles to the | ||||
West; then, turning back by the Arbiti mountains makes an elbow and | ||||
turns Southwards, where after a course of about 100 miles it finds | ||||
the Indian Sea, in which it pours itself by seven branches. On the | ||||
side of the same mountains rises the great Ganges, which river flows | ||||
Southwards for 500 miles and to the Southwest a thousand ... and | ||||
Sarabas, Diarnuna, Soas and Scilo, Condranunda are its tributaries. | ||||
It flows into the Indian sea by many mouths. | ||||
On the natives of hot countries. | ||||
1112. | ||||
Men born in hot countries love the night because it refreshes them | ||||
and have a horror of light because it burns them; and therefore they | ||||
are of the colour of night, that is black. And in cold countries it | ||||
is just the contrary. | ||||
[Footnote: The sketch here inserted is in MS. H3 55b.] | ||||
_XVIII._ | ||||
_Naval Warfare.--Mechanical Appliances.--Music._ | ||||
_Such theoretical questions, as have been laid before the reader in | ||||
Sections XVI and XVII, though they were the chief subjects of | ||||
Leonardo's studies of the sea, did not exclusively claim his | ||||
attention. A few passages have been collected at the beginning of | ||||
this section, which prove that he had turned his mind to the | ||||
practical problems of navigation, and more especially of naval | ||||
warfare. What we know for certain of his life gives us no data, it | ||||
is true, as to when or where these matters came under his | ||||
consideration; but the fact remains certain both from these notes in | ||||
his manuscripts, and from the well known letter to Ludovico il Moro | ||||
(No._ 1340_), in which he expressly states that he is as capable as | ||||
any man, in this very department._ | ||||
_The numerous notes as to the laws and rationale of the flight of | ||||
birds, are scattered through several note-books. An account of these | ||||
is given in the Bibliography of the manuscripts at the end of this | ||||
work. It seems probable that the idea which led him to these | ||||
investigations was his desire to construct a flying or aerial | ||||
machine for man. At the same time it must be admitted that the notes | ||||
on the two subjects are quite unconnected in the manuscripts, and | ||||
that those on the flight of birds are by far the most numerous and | ||||
extensive. The two most important passages that treat of the | ||||
construction of a flying machine are those already published as Tav. | ||||
XVI, No._ 1 _and Tav. XVIII in the_ "Saggio delle opere di Leonardo | ||||
da Vinci" _(Milan_ 1872_). The passages--Nos._ 1120-1125--_here | ||||
printed for the first time and hitherto unknown--refer to the same | ||||
subject and, with the exception of one already published in the | ||||
Saggio-- No._ 1126--_they are, so far as I know, the only notes, | ||||
among the numerous observations on the flight of birds, in which the | ||||
phenomena are incidentally and expressly connected with the idea of | ||||
a flying machine._ | ||||
_The notes on machines of war, the construction of fortifications, | ||||
and similar matters which fall within the department of the | ||||
Engineer, have not been included in this work, for the reasons given | ||||
on page_ 26 _of this Vol. An exception has been made in favour of | ||||
the passages Nos._ 1127 _and_ 1128, _because they have a more | ||||
general interest, as bearing on the important question: whence the | ||||
Master derived his knowledge of these matters. Though it would be | ||||
rash to assert that Leonardo was the first to introduce the science | ||||
of mining into Italy, it may be confidently said that he is one of | ||||
the earliest writers who can be proved to have known and understood | ||||
it; while, on the other hand, it is almost beyond doubt that in the | ||||
East at that time, the whole science of besieging towns and mining | ||||
in particular, was far more advanced than in Europe. This gives a | ||||
peculiar value to the expressions used in No._ 1127. | ||||
_I have been unable to find in the manuscripts any passage whatever | ||||
which throws any light on Leonardo's great reputation as a musician. | ||||
Nothing therein illustrates VASARPS well-known statement:_ Avvenne | ||||
che morto Giovan Galeazze duca di Milano, e creato Lodovico Sforza | ||||
nel grado medesimo anno 1494, fu condotto a Milano con gran | ||||
riputazione Lionardo al duca, il quale molto si dilettava del suono | ||||
della lira, perche sonasse; e Lionardo porto quello strumento | ||||
ch'egli aveva di sua mano fabbricato d'argento gran parte, in forma | ||||
d'un teschio di cavallo, cosa bizzarra e nuova, acciocche l'armonia | ||||
fosse con maggior tuba e piu sonora di voce; laonde supero tutti i | ||||
musici che quivi erano concorsi a sonare. | ||||
_The only notes on musical matters are those given as Nos._ 1129 | ||||
_and_ 1130, _which explain certain arrangements in instruments._ | ||||
The ship's logs of Vitruvius, of Alberti and of Leonardo | ||||
1113. | ||||
ON MOVEMENTS;--TO KNOW HOW MUCH A SHIP ADVANCES IN AN HOUR. | ||||
The ancients used various devices to ascertain the distance gone by | ||||
a ship each hour, among which Vitruvius [Footnote 6: See VITRUVIUS, | ||||
_De Architectura lib. X._ C. 14 (p. 264 in the edition of Rose and | ||||
Muller- Strubing). The German edition published at Bale in 1543 has, | ||||
on fol. 596, an illustration of the contrivance, as described by | ||||
Vitruvius.] gives one in his work on Architecture which is just as | ||||
fallacious as all the others; and this is a mill wheel which touches | ||||
the waves of the sea at one end and in each complete revolution | ||||
describes a straight line which represents the circumference of the | ||||
wheel extended to a straightness. But this invention is of no worth | ||||
excepting on the smooth and motionless surface of lakes. But if the | ||||
water moves together with the ship at an equal rate, then the wheel | ||||
remains motionless; and if the motion of the water is more or less | ||||
rapid than that of the ship, then neither has the wheel the same | ||||
motion as the ship so that this invention is of but little use. | ||||
There is another method tried by experiment with a known distance | ||||
between one island and another; and this is done by a board or under | ||||
the pressure of wind which strikes on it with more or less | ||||
swiftness. This is in Battista Alberti [Footnote 25: LEON BATTISTA | ||||
ALBERTI, _De Architectura lib. V._, c. 12 treats '_de le navi e | ||||
parti loro_', but there is no reference to the machine, mentioned by | ||||
Leonardo. Alberti says here: _Noi abbiamo trattato lungamente in | ||||
altro luogo de' modi de le navi, ma in questo luogo ne abbiamo detto | ||||
quel tanto che si bisogna_. To this the following note is added in | ||||
the most recent Italian edition: _Questo libro e tuttora inedito e | ||||
porta il titolo, secondo Gesnero di_ '_Liber navis_'.]. | ||||
Battista Alberti's method which is made by experiment on a known | ||||
distance between one island and another. But such an invention does | ||||
not succeed excepting on a ship like the one on which the experiment | ||||
was made, and it must be of the same burden and have the same sails, | ||||
and the sails in the same places, and the size of the waves must be | ||||
the same. But my method will serve for any ship, whether with oars | ||||
or sails; and whether it be small or large, broad or long, or high | ||||
or low, it always serves [Footnote 52: Leonardo does not reveal the | ||||
method invented by him.]. | ||||
Methods of staying and moving in water | ||||
1114. | ||||
How an army ought to cross rivers by swimming with air-bags ... How | ||||
fishes swim [Footnote 2: Compare No. 821.]; of the way in which they | ||||
jump out of the water, as may be seen with dolphins; and it seems a | ||||
wonderful thing to make a leap from a thing which does not resist | ||||
but slips away. Of the swimming of animals of a long form, such as | ||||
eels and the like. Of the mode of swimming against currents and in | ||||
the rapid falls of rivers. Of the mode of swimming of fishes of a | ||||
round form. How it is that animals which have not long hind quartres | ||||
cannot swim. How it is that all other animals which have feet with | ||||
toes, know by nature how to swim, excepting man. In what way man | ||||
ought to learn to swim. Of the way in which man may rest on the | ||||
water. How man may protect himself against whirlpools or eddies in | ||||
the water, which drag him down. How a man dragged to the bottom must | ||||
seek the reflux which will throw him up from the depths. How he | ||||
ought to move his arms. How to swim on his back. How he can and how | ||||
he cannot stay under water unless he can hold his breath [13]. How | ||||
by means of a certain machine many people may stay some time under | ||||
water. How and why I do not describe my method of remaining under | ||||
water, or how long I can stay without eating; and I do not publish | ||||
nor divulge these by reason of the evil nature of men who would use | ||||
them as means of destruction at the bottom of the sea, by sending | ||||
ships to the bottom, and sinking them together with the men in them. | ||||
And although I will impart others, there is no danger in them; | ||||
because the mouth of the tube, by which you breathe, is above the | ||||
water supported on bags or corks [19]. | ||||
[Footnote: L. 13-19 will also be found in Vol. I No. 1.] | ||||
On naval warfare (1115. 1116). | ||||
1115. | ||||
Supposing in a battle between ships and galleys that the ships are | ||||
victorious by reason of the high of heir tops, you must haul the | ||||
yard up almost to the top of the mast, and at the extremity of the | ||||
yard, that is the end which is turned towards the enemy, have a | ||||
small cage fastened, wrapped up below and all round in a great | ||||
mattress full of cotton so that it may not be injured by the bombs; | ||||
then, with the capstan, haul down the opposite end of this yard and | ||||
the top on the opposite side will go up so high, that it will be far | ||||
above the round-top of the ship, and you will easily drive out the | ||||
men that are in it. But it is necessary that the men who are in the | ||||
galley should go to the opposite side of it so as to afford a | ||||
counterpoise to the weight of the men placed inside the cage on the | ||||
yard. | ||||
1116. | ||||
If you want to build an armada for the sea employ these ships to ram | ||||
in the enemy's ships. That is, make ships 100 feet long and 8 feet | ||||
wide, but arranged so that the left hand rowers may have their oars | ||||
to the right side of the ship, and the right hand ones to the left | ||||
side, as is shown at M, so that the leverage of the oars may be | ||||
longer. And the said ship may be one foot and a half thick, that is | ||||
made with cross beams within and without, with planks in contrary | ||||
directions. And this ship must have attached to it, a foot below the | ||||
water, an iron-shod spike of about the weight and size of an anvil; | ||||
and this, by force of oars may, after it has given the first blow, | ||||
be drawn back, and driven forward again with fury give a second | ||||
blow, and then a third, and so many as to destroy the other ship. | ||||
The use of swimming belts. | ||||
1117. | ||||
A METHOD OF ESCAPING IN A TEMPEST AND SHIPWRECK AT SEA. | ||||
Have a coat made of leather, which must be double across the breast, | ||||
that is having a hem on each side of about a finger breadth. Thus it | ||||
will be double from the waist to the knee; and the leather must be | ||||
quite air-tight. When you want to leap into the sea, blow out the | ||||
skirt of your coat through the double hems of the breast; and jump | ||||
into the sea, and allow yourself to be carried by the waves; when | ||||
you see no shore near, give your attention to the sea you are in, | ||||
and always keep in your mouth the air-tube which leads down into the | ||||
coat; and if now and again you require to take a breath of fresh | ||||
air, and the foam prevents you, you may draw a breath of the air | ||||
within the coat. | ||||
[Footnote: AMORETTI, _Memorie Storiche_, Tav. II. B. Fig. 5, gives | ||||
the same figure, somewhat altered. 6. _La canna dell' aria_. Compare | ||||
Vol. I. No. I. Note] | ||||
On the gravity of water. | ||||
1118. | ||||
If the weight of the sea bears on its bottom, a man, lying on that | ||||
bottom and having l000 braccia of water on his back, would have | ||||
enough to crush him. | ||||
Diving apparatus and Skating (1119-1121). | ||||
1119. | ||||
Of walking under water. Method of walking on water. | ||||
[Footnote: The two sketches belonging to this passage are given by | ||||
AMORETTI, _Memorie Storiche_. Tav. II, Fig. 3 and 4.] | ||||
1120. | ||||
Just as on a frozen river a man may run without moving his feet, so | ||||
a car might be made that would slide by itself. | ||||
[Footnote: The drawings of carts by the side of this text have no | ||||
direct connection with the problem as stated in words.--Compare No. | ||||
1448, l. 17.] | ||||
1121. | ||||
A definition as to why a man who slides on ice does not fall. | ||||
[Footnote: An indistinct sketch accompanies the passage, in the | ||||
original.] | ||||
On Flying machines (1122-1126). | ||||
1122. | ||||
Man when flying must stand free from the waist upwards so as to be | ||||
able to balance himself as he does in a boat so that the centre of | ||||
gravity in himself and in the machine may counterbalance each other, | ||||
and be shifted as necessity demands for the changes of its centre of | ||||
resistance. | ||||
1123. | ||||
Remember that your flying machine must imitate no other than the | ||||
bat, because the web is what by its union gives the armour, or | ||||
strength to the wings. | ||||
If you imitate the wings of feathered birds, you will find a much | ||||
stronger structure, because they are pervious; that is, their | ||||
feathers are separate and the air passes through them. But the bat | ||||
is aided by the web that connects the whole and is not pervious. | ||||
1124. | ||||
TO ESCAPE THE PERIL OF DESTRUCTION. | ||||
Destruction to such a machine may occur in two ways; of which the | ||||
first is the breaking of the machine. The second would be when the | ||||
machine should turn on its edge or nearly on its edge, because it | ||||
ought always to descend in a highly oblique direction, and almost | ||||
exactly balanced on its centre. As regards the first--the breaking | ||||
of the machine--, that may be prevented by making it as strong as | ||||
possible; and in whichever direction it may tend to turn over, one | ||||
centre must be very far from the other; that is, in a machine 30 | ||||
braccia long the centres must be 4 braccia one from the other. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare No. 1428.] | ||||
1125. | ||||
Bags by which a man falling from a height of 6 braccia may avoid | ||||
hurting himself, by a fall whether into water or on the ground; and | ||||
these bags, strung together like a rosary, are to be fixed on one's | ||||
back. | ||||
1126. | ||||
An object offers as much resistance to the air as the air does to | ||||
the object. You may see that the beating of its wings against the | ||||
air supports a heavy eagle in the highest and rarest atmosphere, | ||||
close to the sphere of elemental fire. Again you may see the air in | ||||
motion over the sea, fill the swelling sails and drive heavily laden | ||||
ships. From these instances, and the reasons given, a man with wings | ||||
large enough and duly connected might learn to overcome the | ||||
resistance of the air, and by conquering it, succeed in subjugating | ||||
it and rising above it. [Footnote: A parachute is here sketched, | ||||
with an explanatory remark. It is reproduced on Tav. XVI in the | ||||
Saggio, and in: _Leonardo da Vinci als Ingenieur etc., Ein Beitrag | ||||
zur Geschichte der Technik und der induktiven Wissenschaften, von | ||||
Dr. Hermann Grothe, Berlin_ 1874, p. 50.] | ||||
Of mining. | ||||
1127. | ||||
If you want to know where a mine runs, place a drum over all the | ||||
places where you suspect that it is being made, and upon this drum | ||||
put a couple of dice, and when you are over the spot where they are | ||||
mining, the dice will jump a little on the drum at every blow which | ||||
is given underground in the mining. | ||||
There are persons who, having the convenience of a river or a lake | ||||
in their lands, have made, close to the place where they suspect | ||||
that a mine is being made, a great reservoir of water, and have | ||||
countermined the enemy, and having found them, have turned the water | ||||
upon them and destroyed a great number in the mine. | ||||
Of Greek fire. | ||||
1128. | ||||
GREEK FIRE. | ||||
Take charcoal of willow, and saltpetre, and sulphuric acid, and | ||||
sulphur, and pitch, with frankincense and camphor, and Ethiopian | ||||
wool, and boil them all together. This fire is so ready to burn that | ||||
it clings to the timbers even under water. And add to this | ||||
composition liquid varnish, and bituminous oil, and turpentine and | ||||
strong vinegar, and mix all together and dry it in the sun, or in an | ||||
oven when the bread is taken out; and then stick it round hempen or | ||||
other tow, moulding it into a round form, and studding it all over | ||||
with very sharp nails. You must leave in this ball an opening to | ||||
serve as a fusee, and cover it with rosin and sulphur. | ||||
Again, this fire, stuck at the top of a long plank which has one | ||||
braccio length of the end pointed with iron that it may not be burnt | ||||
by the said fire, is good for avoiding and keeping off the ships, so | ||||
as not to be overwhelmed by their onset. | ||||
Again throw vessels of glass full of pitch on to the enemy's ships | ||||
when the men in them are intent on the battle; and then by throwing | ||||
similar burning balls upon them you have it in your power to burn | ||||
all their ships. | ||||
[Footnote: Venturi has given another short text about the Greek fire | ||||
in a French translation (Essai Section XIV). He adds that the | ||||
original text is to be found in MS. B. 30 (?). Libri speaks of it in | ||||
a note as follows (_Histoire des sciences mathematiques en Italie | ||||
Vol. II_ p. 129): _La composition du feu gregeois est une des chases | ||||
qui ont ete les plus cherchees et qui sont encore les plus | ||||
douteuses. On dit qu'il fut invente au septieme siecle de l'ere | ||||
chretienne par l'architecte Callinique (Constantini Porphyrogenetae | ||||
opera, Lugd. Batav._ 1617,-- _in-_8vo; p. 172, _de admin, imper. | ||||
exp._ 48_), et il se trouve souvent mentionne par les Historiens | ||||
Byzantins. Tantot on le langait avec des machines, comme on | ||||
lancerait une banche, tantot on le soufflait avec de longs tubes, | ||||
comme on soufflerait un gaz ou un liquide enflamme (Annae Comnenae | ||||
Alexias_, p. 335, _lib. XI.--Aeliani et Leonis, imperatoris tactica, | ||||
Lugd.-Bat._ 1613, _in_-4. part. 2 a, p. 322, _Leonis tact. cap._ | ||||
l9.--_Joinville, histoire du Saint Louis collect. Petitot tom. II,_ | ||||
p. 235). _Les ecrivains contemporains disent que l'eau ne pouvait | ||||
pas eteindre ce feu, mais qu'avec du vinaigre et du sable on y | ||||
parvenait. Suivant quelques historiens le feu gregeois etait compose | ||||
de soufre et de resine. Marcus Graecus (Liber ignium, Paris,_ 1804, | ||||
_in_-40_) donne plusieurs manieres de le faire qui ne sont pas tres | ||||
intelligibles, mais parmi lesquelles on trouve la composition de la | ||||
poudre a canon. Leonard de Vinci (MSS. de Leonard de Vinci, vol. B. | ||||
f. 30,) dit qu'on le faisait avec du charbon de saule, du salpetre, | ||||
de l'eau de vie, de la resine, du soufre, de la poix et du camphre. | ||||
Mais il est probable que nous ne savons pas qu'elle etait sa | ||||
composition, surtout a cause du secret qu'en faisaient les Grecs. En | ||||
effet, l'empereur Constantin Porphyrogenete recommende a son fils de | ||||
ne jamais en donner aux Barbares, et de leur repondre, s'ils en | ||||
demandaient, qu'il avait ete apporti du ciel par un ange et que le | ||||
secret en avait ete confie aux Chretiens (Constantini | ||||
Porphyrogennetae opera,_ p. 26-27, _de admin. imper., cap. _12_)._] | ||||
Of Music (1129. 1130). | ||||
1129. | ||||
A drum with cogs working by wheels with springs [2]. | ||||
[Footnote: This chapter consists of explanations of the sketches | ||||
shown on Pl. CXXI. Lines 1 and 2 of the text are to be seen at the | ||||
top at the left hand side of the first sketch of a drum. Lines 3-5 | ||||
refer to the sketch immediately below this. Line 6 is written as the | ||||
side of the seventh sketch, and lines 7 and 8 at the side of the | ||||
eighth. Lines 9-16 are at the bottom in the middle. The remainder of | ||||
the text is at the side of the drawing at the bottom.] | ||||
A square drum of which the parchment may be drawn tight or slackened | ||||
by the lever _a b_ [5]. | ||||
A drum for harmony [6]. | ||||
[7] A clapper for harmony; that is, three clappers together. | ||||
[9] Just as one and the same drum makes a deep or acute sound | ||||
according as the parchments are more or less tightened, so these | ||||
parchments variously tightened on one and the same drum will make | ||||
various sounds [16]. | ||||
Keys narrow and close together; (bicchi) far apart; these will be | ||||
right for the trumpet shown above. | ||||
_a_ must enter in the place of the ordinary keys which have the ... | ||||
in the openings of a flute. | ||||
1130. | ||||
Tymbals to be played like the monochord, or the soft flute. | ||||
[6] Here there is to be a cylinder of cane after the manner of | ||||
clappers with a musical round called a Canon, which is sung in four | ||||
parts; each singer singing the whole round. Therefore I here make a | ||||
wheel with 4 teeth so that each tooth takes by itself the part of a | ||||
singer. | ||||
[Footnote: In the original there are some more sketches, to which | ||||
the text, from line 6, refers. They are studies for a contrivance | ||||
exactly like the cylinder in our musical boxes.] | ||||
1131. | ||||
Of decorations. | ||||
White and sky-blue cloths, woven in checks to make a decoration. | ||||
Cloths with the threads drawn at _a b c d e f g h i k_, to go round | ||||
the decoration. | ||||
_XIX._ | ||||
_Philosophical Maxims. Morals. Polemics and Speculations_. | ||||
_Vasari indulges in severe strictures on Leonardo's religious views. | ||||
He speaks, among other things, of his_ "capricci nel filosofar delle | ||||
cose naturali" _and says on this point:_ "Per il che fece nell'animo | ||||
un concetto si eretico che e' non si accostava a qualsi voglia | ||||
religione, stimando per avventura assai piu lo esser filosofo che | ||||
cristiano" _(see the first edition of_ 'Le Vite'_). But this | ||||
accusation on the part of a writer in the days of the Inquisition is | ||||
not a very serious one--and the less so, since, throughout the | ||||
manuscripts, we find nothing to support it._ | ||||
_Under the heading of "Philosophical Maxims" I have collected all | ||||
the passages which can give us a clear comprehension of Leonardo's | ||||
ideas of the world at large. It is scarcely necessary to observe | ||||
that there is absolutely nothing in them to lead to the inference | ||||
that he was an atheist. His views of nature and its laws are no | ||||
doubt very unlike those of his contemporaries, and have a much | ||||
closer affinity to those which find general acceptance at the | ||||
present day. On the other hand, it is obvious from Leonardo's will | ||||
(see No._ 1566_) that, in the year before his death, he had | ||||
professed to adhere to the fundamental doctrines of the Roman | ||||
Catholic faith, and this evidently from his own personal desire and | ||||
impulse._ | ||||
_The incredible and demonstrably fictitious legend of Leonardo's | ||||
death in the arms of Francis the First, is given, with others, by | ||||
Vasari and further embellished by this odious comment:_ "Mostrava | ||||
tuttavia quanto avea offeso Dio e gli uomini del mondo, non avendo | ||||
operato nell'arte come si conveniva." _This last accusation, it may | ||||
be remarked, is above all evidence of the superficial character of | ||||
the information which Vasari was in a position to give about | ||||
Leonardo. It seems to imply that Leonardo was disdainful of diligent | ||||
labour. With regard to the second, referring to Leonardo's morality | ||||
and dealings with his fellow men, Vasari himself nullifies it by | ||||
asserting the very contrary in several passages. A further | ||||
refutation may be found in the following sentence from the letter in | ||||
which Melsi, the young Milanese nobleman, announces the Master's | ||||
death to Leonardo's brothers:_ Credo siate certificati della morte | ||||
di Maestro Lionardo fratello vostro, e mio quanto optimo padre, per | ||||
la cui morte sarebbe impossibile che io potesse esprimere il dolore | ||||
che io ho preso; e in mentre che queste mia membra si sosterranno | ||||
insieme, io possedero una perpetua infelicita, e meritamente perche | ||||
sviscerato et ardentissimo amore mi portava giornalmente. E dolto ad | ||||
ognuno la perdita di tal uomo, quale non e piu in podesta della | ||||
natura, ecc. | ||||
_It is true that, in April_ 1476, _we find the names of Leonardo and | ||||
Verrocchio entered in the_ "Libro degli Uffiziali di notte e de' | ||||
Monasteri" _as breaking the laws; but we immediately after find the | ||||
note_ "Absoluti cum condizione ut retamburentur" (Tamburini _was the | ||||
name given to the warrant cases of the night police). The acquittal | ||||
therefore did not exclude the possibility of a repetition of the | ||||
charge. It was in fact repeated, two months later, and on this | ||||
occasion the Master and his pupil were again fully acquitted. | ||||
Verrocchio was at this time forty and Leonardo four-and-twenty. The | ||||
documents referring to this affair are in the State Archives of | ||||
Florence; they have been withheld from publication, but it seemed to | ||||
me desirable to give the reader this brief account of the leading | ||||
facts of the story, as the vague hints of it, which have recently | ||||
been made public, may have given to the incident an aspect which it | ||||
had not in reality, and which it does not deserve._ | ||||
_The passages here classed under the head "Morals" reveal Leonardo | ||||
to us as a man whose life and conduct were unfailingly governed by | ||||
lofty principles and aims. He could scarcely have recorded his stern | ||||
reprobation and unmeasured contempt for men who do nothing useful | ||||
and strive only for riches, if his own life and ambitions had been | ||||
such as they have so often been misrepresented._ | ||||
_At a period like that, when superstition still exercised unlimited | ||||
dominion over the minds not merely of the illiterate crowd, but of | ||||
the cultivated and learned classes, it was very natural that | ||||
Leonardo's views as to Alchemy, Ghosts, Magicians, and the like | ||||
should be met with stern reprobation whenever and wherever he may | ||||
have expressed them; this accounts for the argumentative tone of all | ||||
his utterances on such subjects which I have collected in | ||||
Subdivision III of this section. To these I have added some passages | ||||
which throw light on Leonardo's personal views on the Universe. They | ||||
are, without exception, characterised by a broad spirit of | ||||
naturalism of which the principles are more strictly applied in his | ||||
essays on Astronomy, and still more on Physical Geography._ | ||||
_To avoid repetition, only such notes on Philosophy, Morals and | ||||
Polemics, have been included in this section as occur as independent | ||||
texts in the original MSS. Several moral reflections have already | ||||
been given in Vol. I, in section "Allegorical representations, | ||||
Mottoes and Emblems". Others will be found in the following section. | ||||
Nos._ 9 _to_ 12, _Vol. I, are also passages of an argumentative | ||||
character. It did not seem requisite to repeat here these and | ||||
similar passages, since their direct connection with the context is | ||||
far closer in places where they have appeared already, than it would | ||||
be here._ | ||||
I. | ||||
PHILOSOPHICAL MAXIMS. | ||||
Prayers to God (1132. 1133). | ||||
1132. | ||||
I obey Thee Lord, first for the love I ought, in all reason to bear | ||||
Thee; secondly for that Thou canst shorten or prolong the lives of | ||||
men. | ||||
1133. | ||||
A PRAYER. | ||||
Thou, O God, dost sell us all good things at the price of labour. | ||||
The powers of Nature (1134-1139). | ||||
1134. | ||||
O admirable impartiality of Thine, Thou first Mover; Thou hast not | ||||
permitted that any force should fail of the order or quality of its | ||||
necessary results. | ||||
1135. | ||||
Necessity is the mistress and guide of nature. | ||||
Necessity is the theme and the inventress, the eternal curb and law | ||||
of nature. | ||||
1136. | ||||
In many cases one and the same thing is attracted by two strong | ||||
forces, namely Necessity and Potency. Water falls in rain; the earth | ||||
absorbs it from the necessity for moisture; and the sun evaporates | ||||
it, not from necessity, but by its power. | ||||
1137. | ||||
Weight, force and casual impulse, together with resistance, are the | ||||
four external powers in which all the visible actions of mortals | ||||
have their being and their end. | ||||
1138. | ||||
Our body is dependant on heaven and heaven on the Spirit. | ||||
1139. | ||||
The motive power is the cause of all life. | ||||
Psychology (1140-1147). | ||||
1140. | ||||
And you, O Man, who will discern in this work of mine the wonderful | ||||
works of Nature, if you think it would be a criminal thing to | ||||
destroy it, reflect how much more criminal it is to take the life of | ||||
a man; and if this, his external form, appears to thee marvellously | ||||
constructed, remember that it is nothing as compared with the soul | ||||
that dwells in that structure; for that indeed, be it what it may, | ||||
is a thing divine. Leave it then to dwell in His work at His good | ||||
will and pleasure, and let not your rage or malice destroy a | ||||
life--for indeed, he who does not value it, does not himself deserve | ||||
it [Footnote 19: In MS. II 15a is the note: _chi no stima la vita, | ||||
non la merita._]. | ||||
[Footnote: This text is on the back of the drawings reproduced on | ||||
Pl. CVII. Compare No. 798, 35 note on p. 111: Compare also No. 837 | ||||
and 838.] | ||||
1141. | ||||
The soul can never be corrupted with the corruption of the body,, | ||||
but is in the body as it were the air which causes the sound of the | ||||
organ, where when a pipe bursts, the wind would cease to have any | ||||
good effect. [Footnote: Compare No. 845.] | ||||
1142. | ||||
The part always has a tendency to reunite with its whole in order to | ||||
escape from its imperfection. | ||||
The spirit desires to remain with its body, because, without the | ||||
organic instruments of that body, it can neither act, nor feel | ||||
anything. | ||||
1143. | ||||
If any one wishes to see how the soul dwells in its body, let him | ||||
observe how this body uses its daily habitation; that is to say, if | ||||
this is devoid of order and confused, the body will be kept in | ||||
disorder and confusion by its soul. | ||||
1144. | ||||
Why does the eye see a thing more clearly in dreams than with the | ||||
imagination being awake? | ||||
1145. | ||||
The senses are of the earth; Reason, stands apart in contemplation. | ||||
[Footnote: Compare No. 842.] | ||||
1146. | ||||
Every action needs to be prompted by a motive. | ||||
To know and to will are two operations of the human mind. | ||||
Discerning, judging, deliberating are acts of the human mind. | ||||
1147. | ||||
All our knowledge has its origin in our preceptions. | ||||
Science, its principles and rules (1148--1161) | ||||
1148. | ||||
Science is the observation of things possible, whether present or | ||||
past; prescience is the knowledge of things which may come to pass, | ||||
though but slowly. | ||||
1149. | ||||
Experience, the interpreter between formative nature and the human | ||||
race, teaches how that nature acts among mortals; and being | ||||
constrained by necessity cannot act otherwise than as reason, which | ||||
is its helm, requires her to act. | ||||
1150. | ||||
Wisdom is the daughter of experience. | ||||
1151. | ||||
Nature is full of infinite causes that have never occured in | ||||
experience. | ||||
1152. | ||||
Truth was the only daughter of Time. | ||||
1153. | ||||
Experience never errs; it is only your judgments that err by | ||||
promising themselves effects such as are not caused by your | ||||
experiments. | ||||
Experience does not err; only your judgments err by expecting from | ||||
her what is not in her power. Men wrongly complain of Experience; | ||||
with great abuse they accuse her of leading them astray but they set | ||||
Experience aside, turning from it with complaints as to our | ||||
ignorance causing us to be carried away by vain and foolish desires | ||||
to promise ourselves, in her name, things that are not in her power; | ||||
saying that she is fallacious. Men are unjust in complaining of | ||||
innocent Experience, constantly accusing her of error and of false | ||||
evidence. | ||||
1154. | ||||
Instrumental or mechanical science is of all the noblest and the | ||||
most useful, seeing that by means of this all animated bodies that | ||||
have movement perform all their actions; and these movements are | ||||
based on the centre of gravity which is placed in the middle | ||||
dividing unequal weights, and it has dearth and wealth of muscles | ||||
and also lever and counterlever. | ||||
1155. | ||||
OF MECHANICS. | ||||
Mechanics are the Paradise of mathematical science, because here we | ||||
come to the fruits of mathematics. [Footnote: Compare No. 660, 11. | ||||
19--22 (Vol. I., p. 332). 1156. | ||||
Every instrument requires to be made by experience. | ||||
1157. | ||||
The man who blames the supreme certainty of mathematics feeds on | ||||
confusion, and can never silence the contradictions of sophistical | ||||
sciences which lead to an eternal quackery. | ||||
1158. | ||||
There is no certainty in sciences where one of the mathematical | ||||
sciences cannot be applied, or which are not in relation with these | ||||
mathematics. | ||||
1159. | ||||
Any one who in discussion relies upon authority uses, not his | ||||
understanding, but rather his memory. Good culture is born of a good | ||||
disposition; and since the cause is more to be praised than the | ||||
effect, I will rather praise a good disposition without culture, | ||||
than good culture without the disposition. | ||||
1160. | ||||
Science is the captain, and practice the soldiers. | ||||
1161. | ||||
OF THE ERRORS OF THOSE WHO DEPEND ON PRACTICE WITHOUT SCIENCE. | ||||
Those who fall in love with practice without science are like a | ||||
sailor who enters a ship without a helm or a compass, and who never | ||||
can be certain whither he is going. | ||||
II. | ||||
MORALS. | ||||
What is life? (1162. 1163). | ||||
1162. | ||||
Now you see that the hope and the desire of returning home and to | ||||
one's former state is like the moth to the light, and that the man | ||||
who with constant longing awaits with joy each new spring time, each | ||||
new summer, each new month and new year--deeming that the things he | ||||
longs for are ever too late in coming--does not perceive that he is | ||||
longing for his own destruction. But this desire is the very | ||||
quintessence, the spirit of the elements, which finding itself | ||||
imprisoned with the soul is ever longing to return from the human | ||||
body to its giver. And you must know that this same longing is that | ||||
quintessence, inseparable from nature, and that man is the image of | ||||
the world. | ||||
1163. | ||||
O Time! consumer of all things; O envious age! thou dost destroy all | ||||
things and devour all things with the relentless teeth of years, | ||||
little by little in a slow death. Helen, when she looked in her | ||||
mirror, seeing the withered wrinkles made in her face by old age, | ||||
wept and wondered why she had twice been carried away. | ||||
O Time! consumer of all things, and O envious age! by which all | ||||
things are all devoured. | ||||
Death. | ||||
1164. | ||||
Every evil leaves behind a grief in our memory, except the supreme | ||||
evil, that is death, which destroys this memory together with life. | ||||
How to spend life (1165-1170). | ||||
1165. | ||||
0 sleepers! what a thing is slumber! Sleep resembles death. Ah, why | ||||
then dost thou not work in such wise as that after death thou mayst | ||||
retain a resemblance to perfect life, when, during life, thou art in | ||||
sleep so like to the hapless dead? [Footnote: Compare No. 676, Vol. | ||||
I. p. 353.] | ||||
1166. | ||||
One pushes down the other. | ||||
By these square-blocks are meant the life and the studies of men. | ||||
1167. | ||||
The knowledge of past times and of the places on the earth is both | ||||
an ornament and nutriment to the human mind. | ||||
1168. | ||||
To lie is so vile, that even if it were in speaking well of godly | ||||
things it would take off something from God's grace; and Truth is so | ||||
excellent, that if it praises but small things they become noble. | ||||
Beyond a doubt truth bears the same relation to falsehood as light | ||||
to darkness; and this truth is in itself so excellent that, even | ||||
when it dwells on humble and lowly matters, it is still infinitely | ||||
above uncertainty and lies, disguised in high and lofty discourses; | ||||
because in our minds, even if lying should be their fifth element, | ||||
this does not prevent that the truth of things is the chief | ||||
nutriment of superior intellects, though not of wandering wits. | ||||
But you who live in dreams are better pleased by the sophistical | ||||
reasons and frauds of wits in great and uncertain things, than by | ||||
those reasons which are certain and natural and not so far above us. | ||||
1169. | ||||
Avoid studies of which the result dies with the worker. | ||||
1170. | ||||
Men are in error when they lament the flight of time, accusing it of | ||||
being too swift, and not perceiving that it is sufficient as it | ||||
passes; but good memory, with which nature has endowed us, causes | ||||
things long past to seem present. | ||||
1171. | ||||
Learning acquired in youth arrests the evil of old age; and if you | ||||
understand that old age has wisdom for its food, you will so conduct | ||||
yourself in youth that your old age will not lack for nourishment. | ||||
1172. | ||||
The acquisition of any knowledge is always of use to the intellect, | ||||
because it may thus drive out useless things and retain the good. | ||||
For nothing can be loved or hated unless it is first known. | ||||
1173. | ||||
As a day well spent procures a happy sleep, so a life well employed | ||||
procures a happy death. | ||||
1174. | ||||
The water you touch in a river is the last of that which has passed, | ||||
and the first of that which is coming. Thus it is with time present. | ||||
Life if well spent, is long. | ||||
1175. | ||||
Just as food eaten without caring for it is turned into loathsome | ||||
nourishment, so study without a taste for it spoils memory, by | ||||
retaining nothing which it has taken in. | ||||
1176. | ||||
Just as eating against one's will is injurious to health, so study | ||||
without a liking for it spoils the memory, and it retains nothing it | ||||
takes in. | ||||
1177. | ||||
On Mount Etna the words freeze in your mouth and you may make ice of | ||||
them.[Footnote 2: There is no clue to explain this strange | ||||
sentence.] | ||||
Just as iron rusts unless it is used, and water putrifies or, in | ||||
cold, turns to ice, so our intellect spoils unless it is kept in | ||||
use. | ||||
You do ill if you praise, and still worse if you reprove in a matter | ||||
you do not understand. | ||||
When Fortune comes, seize her in front with a sure hand, because | ||||
behind she is bald. | ||||
1178. | ||||
It seems to me that men of coarse and clumsy habits and of small | ||||
knowledge do not deserve such fine instruments nor so great a | ||||
variety of natural mechanism as men of speculation and of great | ||||
knowledge; but merely a sack in which their food may be stowed and | ||||
whence it may issue, since they cannot be judged to be any thing | ||||
else than vehicles for food; for it seems to me they have nothing | ||||
about them of the human species but the voice and the figure, and | ||||
for all the rest are much below beasts. | ||||
1179. | ||||
Some there are who are nothing else than a passage for food and | ||||
augmentors of excrement and fillers of privies, because through them | ||||
no other things in the world, nor any good effects are produced, | ||||
since nothing but full privies results from them. | ||||
On foolishness and ignorance (1180--1182). | ||||
1180. | ||||
The greatest deception men suffer is from their own opinions. | ||||
1181. | ||||
Folly is the shield of shame, as unreadiness is that of poverty | ||||
glorified. | ||||
1182. | ||||
Blind ignorance misleads us thus and delights with the results of | ||||
lascivious joys. | ||||
Because it does not know the true light. Because it does not know | ||||
what is the true light. | ||||
Vain splendour takes from us the power of being .... behold! for its | ||||
vain splendour we go into the fire, thus blind ignorance does | ||||
mislead us. That is, blind ignorance so misleads us that ... | ||||
O! wretched mortals, open your eyes. | ||||
On riches (1183--1187). | ||||
1183. | ||||
That is not riches, which may be lost; virtue is our true good and | ||||
the true reward of its possessor. That cannot be lost; that never | ||||
deserts us, but when life leaves us. As to property and external | ||||
riches, hold them with trembling; they often leave their possessor | ||||
in contempt, and mocked at for having lost them. | ||||
1184. | ||||
Every man wishes to make money to give it to the doctors, destroyers | ||||
of life; they then ought to be rich. [Footnote 2: Compare No. 856.] | ||||
Man has much power of discourse which for the most part is vain and | ||||
false; animals have but little, but it is useful and true, and a | ||||
small truth is better than a great lie. | ||||
1185. | ||||
He who possesses most must be most afraid of loss. | ||||
1186. | ||||
He who wishes to be rich in a day will be hanged in a year. | ||||
1187. | ||||
That man is of supreme folly who always wants for fear of wanting; | ||||
and his life flies away while he is still hoping to enjoy the good | ||||
things which he has with extreme labour acquired. | ||||
Rules of Life (1188-1202). | ||||
1188. | ||||
If you governed your body by the rules of virtue you would not walk | ||||
on all fours in this world. | ||||
You grow in reputation like bread in the hands of a child. | ||||
[Footnote: The first sentence is obscure. Compare Nos. 825, 826.] | ||||
1189. | ||||
Savage he is who saves himself. | ||||
1190. | ||||